JP6677868B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a ball-and-ball game machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a spinning-type game machine (generally referred to as a "pachi-slot machine").

  DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, the game machine provided with the external connection board which can connect island facilities and a game machine by wiring is known (for example, patent document 1).

JP-A-2002-085770

When connecting wiring to such an external connection board, it is also possible to connect the wiring to the attached external connection board, but the external connection board is configured to be detachable from the gaming machine, If the wiring is connected to the external connection board and then attached to the gaming machine, the wiring connection work becomes easy.
Here, when the external connection board is attached to the gaming machine, the connected wiring is arranged at a predetermined position. Here, when the external connection board is arranged at a predetermined position of the gaming machine, the connected wiring can also be arranged at a predetermined position, but if the external connection board deviates from the predetermined position, With this, the wiring may be shifted from a predetermined position.In particular, when the main body frame is opened and closed, the external connection board and the wiring connected thereto are sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame, and the external connection board may be damaged. There is a possibility that disconnection of the wiring may occur or interference with other members may occur. For this reason, it is necessary to check whether the external connection board is arranged at a predetermined position. However, conventionally, it is necessary to open the main body frame and check it from the back side, which makes the operation complicated. If the main body frame is opened without being aware that there is a possibility that the position of the external connection board is shifted, there is a possibility that the member may be damaged.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming a mounting state of a detachable external connection board from a front side.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] includes a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to an outer frame, and a game machine in which a game board is detachable with respect to the main frame. Provided, provided with an external connection board connected to the outside by wiring, the main body frame, from the front in a state where the game board is removed from the main body frame and the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame In the state where the game board is removed from the main body frame and the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, the opening is provided when the opening portion is visually recognized from the front, having an opening at a visible position. only part of the external connection substrate through a part is visible, by the end of the external connection substrate mounted on the body frame is visible positioned in the opening, the external connection board The installation status of the A gaming machine according to claim.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming a mounting state of a detachable external connection board from a front side.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the body frame and the body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a main body frame and a main body frame is opened from an outer frame in another embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame left assembly of the outer frame, and the outer frame right assembly, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and the fraud prevention member are removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 36B is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 36B (a). FIG. 37B is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 37A including a partially enlarged view. It is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partial enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line invalidating member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullification member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullification member. (A) is a longitudinal section front view of a foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line nullification member, and (b) is a cross-sectional plan view thereof. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. 37A and 37B are enlarged views of a main part of FIG. 37G showing a normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), and FIG. 37C is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line nullification member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. 37A is an enlarged view of a Z part of FIG. 37K, and FIG. 37B is an enlarged view of a Z part of FIG. 37K showing a state where a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 37K which shows the state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) is a state in which the operation line invalidating member is motorized, and is an enlarged view corresponding to the Z part of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of an important section showing other forms of an operation line nullification member. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 3B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front and the upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the production operation unit viewed from a pressing direction of a pressing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front lower part disassembled. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. It is the schematic of various detection signals input / output to the connection terminal board of rental devices, such as a game ball, which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 108. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram illustrating a sequel to FIG. 114; It is a circuit diagram showing a delivery motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 4 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure showing arrangement of an output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which performs drawing of the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 123 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 125. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payment control part. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in FIG. 128. 129 is a flowchart illustrating a payout control unit main process and a payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 129. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket home position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a ball flare judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for a ball rental. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball movement operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball squatting motion setting process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing at the time of the payout operation by ball lending (A), and the input signal confirmation processing from a CR unit (A). It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. 6 is a timing chart for explaining a timing at which a connection confirmation signal is output to an INIT terminal of a transmitter IC for an upper plate side liquid crystal. It is a block diagram of a 2nd embodiment which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a circuit configuration in a case where a plurality of sensor signal input units respectively connected to a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to a base terminal of a transistor of a detection circuit unit. FIG. 14 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 4) in which a detection circuit unit of a magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on a main control board. FIG. 16 is a circuit diagram showing another example (Example 5) in which a detection circuit unit of a magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on a main control board. FIG. 13 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Embodiment 6) in which an avoidance unit and a detection circuit unit of a magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on a main control board. FIG. 13 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 7) in which a voltage output unit, an avoidance unit, and a detection circuit unit of a magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic structure of the electrical connection of a detection sensor part, a panel relay board, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows typically each example of the arrangement position in a game machine of a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a figure showing an example of arrangement of an avoidance part unit to a panel relay board or a main control board. It is a figure showing the example of a vibration generating source in a game machine, and the example of arrangement of a panel relay board and a main control board. FIG. 4 is a block diagram mainly showing a basic configuration of electrical connection of an origin position detection sensor for detecting an origin position of a peripheral control board, a driving board, a driving means, and a movable effecting body. FIG. 17 is a front view conceptually showing a plurality of effecting movable members provided in the gaming machine and grouping of the plurality of moving members. It is a timing chart which shows an example at the time of performing the restoration operation to the initial position of a plurality of movable characters belonging to the character group 01. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by a fixed channel method. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel system as this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by an automatic channel method. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, reproduction | regeneration sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flow chart which shows an example of search processing of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure showing an example of a variation pattern of sound control by each channel method or those combination. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search processing at the time of performing control which outputs sound of this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of conditions for selecting a channel for which sound output is to be replaced (stopping sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of production for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is output. It is a figure showing an example of a priority of a sound effect in a production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half fluctuation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a composition table of a reproduction channel in sound source control in a modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the change of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a block diagram showing a ground system of a game machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit provided with the earth circuit board from diagonally rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the storage case part which accommodated the earth circuit board from the upper direction. It is a circuit diagram of a ground circuit board. It is a figure for explaining a fixed mode of a ball tank. It is the perspective view which cut out some rotation operation parts and showed the inside in the modification of this embodiment. It is the top view which cut out some rotation operation parts and showed the inside in the modification of this embodiment. (A) is a plan view showing a modification of a member provided on the base portion 221 of the ball lending operation unit 220, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a), (c) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). (A) and (b) schematically show members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (a). It is. (A) schematically shows members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (b) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (a). (A) to (c) schematically show members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (d) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (b). It is. (A) to (d) schematically show members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (e) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (c). It is. It is a diagram schematically illustrating members near the ball lending operation base 223. (A) and (b) schematically show members near the ball lending operation base 223, and (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (b). It is a thing. (A) schematically shows a member near the ball lending operation base 223, and (b) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (a). It is the figure which showed typically the sectional view which shows the modification of the member of the ball lending operation base 223 vicinity. It is the figure which showed typically the sectional view which shows the modification of the member of the ball lending operation base 223 vicinity. It is the figure which showed typically the sectional view which shows the modification of the member of the ball lending operation base 223 vicinity. It is the figure which showed typically the sectional view which shows the modification of the member of the ball lending operation base 223 vicinity. It is the figure which showed typically the sectional view which shows the modification of the member of the ball lending operation base 223 vicinity. It is the figure which showed typically the sectional view which shows the modification of the member of the ball lending operation base 223 vicinity. It is the figure which showed typically the top view which shows the modification of the member of the ball rental operation base 223 vicinity. It is the figure which showed typically the top view which shows the modification of the member of the ball rental operation base 223 vicinity. (A) is a perspective view schematically showing a payout base unit of the present embodiment, and (B) is an external terminal plate unit with respect to an external terminal plate mounting portion which is a part of the payout base of the present embodiment. It is the perspective view which showed the state of attachment typically. FIG. 225 of the embodiment is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 225 (B). (A) is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 225 (B) of the present embodiment, and (B) is an enlarged sectional view of the photocoupler shown in FIG. 227 (A). FIG. 227 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of FIG. 227 (A) of the present embodiment. FIG. 213 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of FIG. 226 of the present embodiment. FIG. 213 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of FIG. 226 of the present embodiment. FIG. 213 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of FIG. 226 of the present embodiment. FIG. 213 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of FIG. 226 of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing a plurality of examples constituted so that an external terminal board could be directly visually recognized by providing a dispensing base opening part which makes a punching-like opening in a dispensing base of this embodiment. It is a figure showing a plurality of examples constituted so that an external terminal board could be directly visually recognized by providing a dispensing base opening part which makes a punching-like opening in a dispensing base of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the attachment aspect which the external terminal board is attached to the payout base, and which showed a plurality of examples of a state where it is properly attached and a state where it is not properly attached. (A) and (B) are figures which show the attachment aspect of the external terminal board to the payout base, and (C) and (D) are figures which show the attachment aspect of the mounting surface cover to the payout base. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a front side perspective view, (B) is a top view, (C) is a left side view, (D) is a front view, and (E) is a right side. (F) is a bottom view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a back side perspective view, and (B) is a back view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a front side perspective view, (B) is a top view, (C) is a left side view, (D) is a front view, and (E) is a right side. (F) is a bottom view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a back side perspective view, and (B) is a back view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a front side perspective view, (B) is a top view, (C) is a left side view, (D) is a front view, and (E) is a right side. (F) is a bottom view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a back side perspective view, and (B) is a back view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a front side perspective view, (B) is a top view, (C) is a left side view, (D) is a front view, and (E) is a right side. (F) is a bottom view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a back side perspective view, and (B) is a back view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a front side perspective view, (B) is a top view, (C) is a left side view, (D) is a front view, and (E) is a right side. (F) is a bottom view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a back side perspective view, and (B) is a back view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a front side perspective view, (B) is a top view, (C) is a left side view, (D) is a front view, and (E) is a right side. (F) is a bottom view. It is a figure for showing the attachment mode of an external terminal board, (A) is a back side perspective view, and (B) is a back view. It is a figure which shows the embodiment applicable to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 237-248 of this embodiment, (A) is a front perspective view, (B) is a top view, (C) is a left side. (D) is a front view, (E) is a right side view, and (F) is a bottom view. It is a figure which shows the embodiment applicable to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 237-248 of this embodiment, (A) is a rear side perspective view, (B) is a rear view.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the ascending position, and FIG. is there. 10A and 10B are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided.
The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for driving game balls B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game balls B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral arranged behind the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving out a predetermined number of game balls B), a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. Obstacle nails are planted on the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the gaming area 5 a of the gaming board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or a movable effect by the back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by causing a luminous effect.

  When the player rotates the handle 182 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 described later, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is hit by the ball launching device 540 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. A game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through a launch ball passage formed by a launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001, and the inner rail 1002. When a game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened by the payout device 580 described later in accordance with the received winning opening. From the upper plate 201.

  In addition, due to the strength of the game ball being unable to reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball, that is, when the game ball fired with a weak firing force does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. As shown in FIG. 37A, it falls into a foul ball drop port 1013 opened between the end (end) of the firing rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, and this returns to a later-described return. It is received by foul ball receiving portion 150c of foul cover unit 150 constituting passage portion 1014, and is discharged to lower plate 202 from lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball, passing through foul cover unit 150.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front.
The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, respectively, and are arranged left and right apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the right side. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a flat-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates forward and backward through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper and lower fixing portions 12b and the upper and lower fixing portions 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively, while the upper and lower fixing portions 12b and 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with cutouts 41a that are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front side of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder 43 a. The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying the game ball B at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, even if it bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole 60d. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 for mounting the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51.
The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the upper hinge pin 512 of the upper frame member of the upper frame member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the tray, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. Door frame left side unit 400 and a door mounted on the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically and having a door window 101a that penetrates forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear lower right corner on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and mounted near a rear right lower end on the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The relay frame 106 after the handle, the door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4.
Further, foul cover unit 150 guides game ball B (foul ball), which has been fired by ball firing device 540 with a weak firing force and has not reached game area 5a of game board 5, to lower plate 202, This is for guiding the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is for playing a game to drive into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. And a cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear junction board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right end in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the front left side in front view, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in front. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and that faces a through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting a handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, A plurality (three in this example) of ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical part 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical part 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thus, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to favorably guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on a rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 (FIG. 83) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 84).

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an outer shape is combined with a square extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a square extending vertically, and extends vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view.
The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100 in such a manner that a portion extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation sensor 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered by the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover after the handle 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.
The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion in an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end on the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction on the lower surface.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hooking member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. A pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extensions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates forward and backward. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is And the door frame base 101 is located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending portion penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is located on the upper side. A portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper frame body hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by a lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire upper hinge pin 122. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to be inserted into or pulled out of the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below. it can. By inserting the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view can be hinged with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The hinge member 125 below the door frame is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 22) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular lock inserted into the keyhole 132 and attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 is achieved by inserting a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into a pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 in the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is formed in a box shape having a front end opened and closed at the rear end thereof, which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball firing device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around a vertically extending axis between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, a ball feeding member 144 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and a ball removing member 143 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 is provided. Further, a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the center in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (see FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to pivot between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is stopped by the blocking unit 144a from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a), and stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where it stays at the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip that swings up and down in the ball feeding action rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the up-down direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction, and engages with the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operation rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is located upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B at the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 contacts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c moves with the downward movement of the operation transmitting portion. Also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the operating member 143c of the removing member 143 contacts is formed by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball punching member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be separated from the partitioning portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line nullifying member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. I have. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated because the operation line is cut or pinched (pinched and stopped) or entangled (rolled up) or adhered by hot melt or the like. It refers to the state.

The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape having an outer shape in a front view extending left and right, and is vertically separated at a substantially central portion in a vertical direction from a right side to a left by a predetermined distance. And a sloped portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip end side (right end side in front view) of opposing sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702. And The first piece 701 of the operation line nullifying member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700 so that the right end in front view in FIG.
On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that expands in a V-shape toward the right.

  The operation line nullifying member 700 is attached to the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is located inside the hit ball supply port 142a. It is in a state of communicating with.

According to the operation line nullifying member 700, an unauthorized ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or, a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven from the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. The game is played by the ball launching device 540 when an operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as moving an illegal ball into and out of the first starting port 2002 is performed. The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 due to the momentum of the illegal ball fired (hit) with a strength that can reach the area 5a. The first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.
Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be another embodiment. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraud, the metal plate may be bent in a different form from the above, or the bent operation line invalidating member 700 may be bent. The configuration may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided instead of the metal plate.
When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the standby position (on the partition 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). By detecting with a sensor and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, it is possible to prevent the emission of the illegal ball itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feeding.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36A and 36B. FIG. 36A (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36B (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball firing device 540 with a force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) smaller than a predetermined force (a fire force that can reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is fired. The game balls B (foul balls) that have not reached the inside are guided to the lower plate 202, and the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 are guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .
As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.
The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in front view, and has a lower normal dispensing passage 610 a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and an upper dish ball supply port 211 a which is a ball opening of the dish unit 200. And a through-open passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a when viewed from the front. And a full tank receiving port 150b.

Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 150b, and lacks momentum despite being fired from firing rail 544 by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop port 1013 formed between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a, and a right front view. In the vicinity of the lower corner, the game ball B, which is open frontward and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for a ball of the dish unit 200, is provided. Discharge opening communicating with the ball discharge port 150d, a communication passage connecting the ball discharge opening 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. Is provided with a 50h, the. The communication passage 150h has an upper passage wall 150i disposed under the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c at a gradient opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball extends from the upper passage wall 150i. And a lower passage wall 150j disposed in parallel with an interval of a distance therebetween, a starting end opening upward to a downward inclined end of a bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and a terminating end being a storage passage 150e. Open downward.
In addition, a series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e are returned as foul ball return. A return passage 1014 is formed by a series of these elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving section 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 becomes full of the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154.
Accordingly, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the game balls B are full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, so as to urge the lower plate 202 to be full.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined such that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud preventing means for suppressing fraud by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached. A foul ball drop port 1013 opened between the rails 1001 is provided with operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S as third fraud prevention means.

The second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between upper passage wall 150i of communication passage 150h and bottom wall 150g of foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is enlarged in FIG. 37B. As shown in the figure, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixedly attached (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 cover and house the unit so that the hands of employees and gaming machine assembly workers are difficult to contact due to safety considerations.
A specific operation line nullifying member 7000 includes components equivalent to the operation line nullifying member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece portion 701 in FIG. The first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extending from the convex part 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 open in a direction facing the downward flow of the sphere of the communication passage 150h. A V-shaped shearing portion 7000v is formed.
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37B, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 has a lid 152 that constitutes the foul cover unit 150. Of the operation line nullifying member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. There is provided a tapered guiding portion 150k that can guide the operation line L by using the tapered guiding portion 150k. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is turned toward the lid member 152 at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line nullifying member 7000 side, and the width is narrowed along the lid member 152 toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second tapered portion 150 kb having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L), and a tapered guiding portion 150 k formed of the second inclined portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, comes into sliding contact with the guiding portion 150k in a spiral shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the first inclined portion 150ka to move from the first inclined portion 150ka. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 by sliding on the second inclined portion 150 kb. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for smooth flow of the normal ball and guiding the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

Since the second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is changed using the space communicating from the lower counter ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is made to enter the game area 5a, and at the same time, the operation line L protruding toward the lower counter ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, It is possible to prevent illegal acts such as moving the ball Q into and out of the first starting port.
For example, using a special tool such as a cell plate, the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage unit 1014 from the lower counter ball supply port 211c, flows backward, and is sent to the firing position of the ball firing device 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). A)), when the illegal ball Q moves toward the firing position of the firing rail 544 over the folded portion of the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, The operation line L is pulled (pulled by tension) and wraps around the folded portion in a U-turn shape. Then, the operation line L is guided by the operation line nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally cuts. As a result, since the operation line L cannot be operated, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act using the fraudulent ball Q.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, which is intentionally turned into a foul ball, and the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Also, in the event that an illegal act of grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball that has become a foul ball and firing the subsequent illegal ball Q to the game area 5a (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act B”) is performed, The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent ejection of the illegal ball Q (with tension applied). L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. Yes To become. FIGS. 37A and 37B are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where the fraudulent act B is performed. Also, with respect to the above-described fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, a foul ball). The operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength). Therefore, the present embodiment reinforces the measures against fraud by the first fraud prevention means. Also has the effect of doing. Therefore, when the injustice B is targeted, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line nullifying member 7000H as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are appropriately used together, and one first operation line nullification member 700 and another second operation line nullification member 7000 or a third operation line nullification member 7000H, 7000S are provided. The pachinko machine 1 may be provided together. In this case, since the first operation line nullifying member 700 and the second operation line nullifying member 7000 are provided together with the door frame 3 and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside, the first operation line nullifying member 700 and the second operation line nullifying member 7000 are hardly conspicuous. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble described above, the anti-fraud information is hard to leak. In addition, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the security performance if replaced with the door frame 3 because the sharpness and the like affect the security performance.

  By the way, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v and invalidate the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between the two metal plates 7011 and 7022, for example, so that the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled or is difficult to push and pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. May be invalidated as follows.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 37C and FIG. 37D, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by hatched portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 37C. The first half of the non-joined portion at the tip of 7022 is expanded in a V-shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is set as a clamping portion 7044. Such an operation line nullifying member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and furthermore, the unit main body 151 is hardly touched by an employee or a game machine assembler due to safety considerations. And is covered and accommodated from outside by a lid member 152.
According to the operation line nullifying member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37D, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded portion of the metal plate is turned into a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joined portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044, it is pinched and pinched like tweezers.
As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed backward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the firing position of the firing rail 544, or the illegal ball Q intentionally turned into a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower counter ball supply port 211c, the operation line L is only loosened thereat, and as a result, the amount of the operation line L to be fed out cannot be adjusted. Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.
In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joined portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V-shape to be the introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is set to the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surface, and the leading end portion of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V-shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (the guide portion). ), And the sandwiching portion between both plate surfaces may be used as the sandwiching portion 7044. Thereby, while achieving the same effect as the above-described fraud deterrence effect, the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate can be improved.

  The operation line nullifying member 7000 for pinching the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in a gap between the second inclined portions 150 kb in FIG. Thus, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be stuck to the adhesive portion so as not to move.

Also, the operation line nullifying member 7000 for pinching the operation line L changes the above-mentioned one composed of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. 37E, and replaces this coil spring with The guide part 150k may be installed and formed such that the guide direction of the second inclined part 150kb of the guide part 150k is substantially orthogonal to the center axis of the guide part 150k. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb fits between adjacent coils of the coil spring and is clamped.
Coil springs, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, which have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when there is no load, need to be installed in a compressed state like a compression coil spring. This is more advantageous for installation work.
The coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied. However, as shown in FIG. 37E, the coil spring is installed so as to be curved so that the coils on the entry side of the operation line L slightly expand. It is more preferable that the operation line L enters smoothly.
When the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed of a coil spring as described above, it can be manufactured at a low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Also, foreign matter such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line nullifying member 7000 from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c), and the guide plate 150k to the operation line nullifying member 7000 is closed with the cell plate. In order to cope with this, in the embodiment described above, a course change portion of the return path portion 1014 of the foul ball (a portion corresponding to a position directly above the lower counter ball supply port 211c in the present embodiment). Further, a slit 1015 into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 37A). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress further unauthorized manipulation of inserting the foreign matter from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c) and closing the guide portion 150k. In addition, as a countermeasure against illegal work in which foreign matter such as a cell plate is inserted from the ball opening (lower dish ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, foreign matter such as a cell plate as in the above-described slit 1015 is removed. A configuration in which a protruding obstacle 1016 that impinges on a foreign object such as a cell plate or the like to impede reaching the guide portion 150k as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. As such, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure in which the operation line L is invalidated after entering, but FIGS. 37K, 37L, and 37M. 37N and 37P, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that actively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

  37K, 37L, and 37M show one specific example of a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The operation line invalidating member 7000D includes a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). (A corner corresponding to a position directly above the lower bowl supply port 211c).

That is, in FIG. 37K, the operation line nullifying member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped nullifying portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion. A shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the invalidation portion 2646 intersects with the hole 2645; The support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and the support shaft 2649 is rotated approximately 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving position in FIG. 37L (a). It can swing to the release position of b). Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2650 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the nullifying portion 2646 across the shaft hole 2647. The ball receiving portion is biased by the balance weight 2650. In the state where no external force (specifically, the load for one game ball) acts on the portion 2645, the ball receiving posture of FIG. 37L (a) is maintained, while the load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. When actuated, it swings to the release position shown in FIG. 37L (b).
In addition, the edge of the nullification portion 2646 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is an intersection 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the nullification member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b), the cross side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above-described dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball connects the communication path 150h of the foul ball return path as shown in FIG. 37L (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course in the downward direction by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving unit 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649, and changes to the release posture of FIG. 37L (b). Then, the foul ball placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is discharged to the downstream storage passage 150e, and the operation line nullification member 7000D released from the foul ball is urged by the balance weight 2650. To return to the original ball receiving position.
Note that, in rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at once, but even in such a case, while the first foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul ball is as shown in FIG. 37L (b). Is stopped by the arcuate ball stopper 2648, and the processing is continued after the operation line invalidating member 7000D has returned. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul spheres are generated at the same time, the processing can be performed one by one without any trouble.

Next, the above-mentioned fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of the fraudulent balls Q is fired from the hit ball supply port 142a to the foul cover unit 150 having the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D). Into a foul sphere by intentionally launching the foul sphere weakly from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for a ball, and further grasping the operation line L connected to the foul sphere, and then following the fraudulent ball. When an illegal ball Q due to an illegal act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a) flows in, the illegal ball Q flows down the communication path 150h as shown in FIG. 37M (a) and travels downward at the course changing section. Immediately after the change, the player gets on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture of FIG. 37M (b). At this time, the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side portion 2651 of the edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing through the passage also naturally crosses, so that the operation line L is stuck between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Pinch). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D continues the release posture without being released from the illegal ball Q. Of course, since the operation line nullifying member 7000D is located at a position where it cannot be reached even if a hand is put in through the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q remaining at this position is taken out from the outside.
If it is difficult to reverse the operation line L by meandering the operation line L between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the state in which the operation line L is caught by the operation line invalidating member 7000D is obtained. It is also difficult to return the illegal ball Q to the hit ball supply port 142a. This allows the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D to be saved and collected as a proof ball.

The dynamic operation line nullifying member 7000D described above utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q, but the operation line nullifying member 7000D is operated by electric drive means as shown in FIG. 37N. Is also good.
That is, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of FIG. 37N connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as the electric driving means to the portion where the balance weight 2650 is provided, and connects the ball detector to the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D. When the game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D shifts from the ball receiving position to the release position. When the game ball changes, and the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change of the signal from the presence or absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is lowered. The disabling member 7000D returns from the release position to the ball receiving position. That.
When a normal ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, the occurrence and release of the ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received in response thereto. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one similarly to the operation line nullifying member 7000D using the own weight.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, and the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is pinched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646, and the illegal ball Q does not fall, Since no emission signal is issued from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 remains at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the aimed ball opening, illegality can be prevented beforehand.

Note that the above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersection side 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646. be able to. In addition, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal ball Q from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 covers the return passage portion 104. It can also be used as reverse running prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.
In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D has, for example, a nullifying portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and has a tip end of the shutter plate. Is a crossing side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream from the movable area of the crossing side, and the movable area of the crossing side is The invalid detector Q detects the illegal ball Q after passing, and activates the invalidating portion, so that the operation line L is pinched or cut off at the intersection side crossing the communication passage 150h. You may.
Further, the above-mentioned dynamic operation line nullifying member 7000D can be applied to the first operation line nullifying member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the effect of suppressing illegality can be surely enhanced.

FIG. 37P shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds and invalidates the operation line L.
That is, this operation line nullifying member 7000D is a square ring-shaped nullifying portion 2646 attached in the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 2656 that is orthogonal to the passage. A motor 2657 serving as an electric driving means for rotating the nullification unit 2646; and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the nullification unit 2646 as an intersection side 2651 downstream of the movable (rotation) area of the intersection side 2651. And a sphere detector 2655 provided in the sphere detector 2655. The invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul sphere is detected by the sphere detector 2655.
When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h, passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball is detected by a ball. The invalidating unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the detector 2655, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the ball opening.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q dives through the invalidation unit 2646. Since the illegal ball Q passes through the invalidating unit 2646 and the invalidating unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L is wound around the invalidating unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q will reach the hands of the unauthorized person.
In addition, the ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be one that is displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidating member 7000D for winding the operation line L described above.

The description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line invalidating member includes the following technical idea.
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
A ball launching device that launches a game ball,
A launching passage section that forms a launching sphere passage communicating from the launching position of the ball launching device to the game area,
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the launching ball passage and a ball opening for discharging a game ball to the outside in front of the machine,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from being operated from the forefront,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates the operation line by nipping or cutting or winding the operation line,
The operation line disabling member includes an intersection that crosses the foul ball return path of the game ball, and operates the intersection when the illegal ball passes through the movable area of the intersection. A gaming machine configured to cross a return path, and to pinch, cut, or wind up the operation line passing through the foul ball return path at the intersection side to invalidate the operation line. "

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B, FIG. 37A, FIG. 371, and FIG. ) And an operation line nullifying member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a resin rail base 1001x).

The operation line nullifying member 7000H provided at the end of the protruding side of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-shaped so that an operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. Are covered by the safety cover 1017 arranged side by side. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover 1017.
Therefore, as described above, an illegal act such as pushing the illegal ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 using the special tool such as a cell plate from the lower counter ball supply port 211c to cause the illegal ball Q to flow backward, and sending the illegal ball Q to the firing position of the ball firing device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls due to inclination toward the firing position, it is pulled (with tension applied) and the operation line L is changed to the operation line invalidating member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.
In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent to the firing position from the hitting ball supply port 142a, and is intentionally made into a foul ball, from the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even in the case where cheating B in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is grasped and the subsequent illegal ball Q is fired into the game area 5a is performed, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is formed. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H during the falling process, the operation line L is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10A, FIG. 37A and FIG. 37I, the operation line nullifying member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in the shape of a brush. It protrudes.
According to the operation line nullifying member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state where it is connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower dish ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if an unauthorized person is grasping via the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension of the operation line invalidating members 7000S to each other. After that, even if the force of manipulating the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is subsequently relaxed, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. Movement of the hand that has been loosened does not reach the illegal ball Q. In other words, the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, and as a result, illegal acts using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed.

As described above, the third fraud prevention means is that the operation line nullifying member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side is effective in the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullifying member 7000S on the side exerts an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.
In addition, it is of course possible to use either one of the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S alone, and a specific nullifying member of the operation line nullifying member 7000H and the operation line nullifying member 7000S is also implemented. The forms may be interchanged, or the same invalidating member may be employed.
In addition to the case where the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S are separately formed as in the embodiment and attached to the firing rail 544 or the outer rail 1001, for example, a metal plate forming the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. Forming member 7000H integrally, or integrally forming a wire on a resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or a V-groove at a corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 10B. The holding portion 7000Sv in the shape of a circle may be engraved, and the operation line L may be attracted to the inside of the groove of the holding portion 7000Sv to be held.
Furthermore, the operation line nullifying member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line nullifying member 7000 as shown in FIG. 37J, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIGS. 37C and 37D. , 7022, and a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

As described above, in the embodiment in which the second operation line nullification member 7000 for nullifying the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and the third operation line nullification member 7000 is similarly connected to the foul. Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop opening 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, at the entrance of the communication passage 150h. The line nullification member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the communication passage 150h (see the arrow z in FIG. 37A), provided at the rear side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 36B (a), or formed as a foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a part that bends by contacting a part of the return passage portion 1014, such as provided at the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the firing rail 544, and the operation line L is determined by the weight of the illegal ball Q and the like. Any position in the return passage portion 1014 is provided on condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is going to be straightened by receiving a tension by a pulling force by an unauthorized person. It may be kicking. In addition, the installation position of the operation line nullifying member 7000 of the embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch even if a fingertip is inserted from the ball opening, and this position is a safety surface of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of a security surface that makes it difficult to perform unauthorized operations on the forming member 7000 itself.

Further, in the embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 37F (a) and 37 (b), the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed to fill the entire passage width. A cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 37F (a) and (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the communication passage 150h are formed into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. Is not touched. As the cutting blade of the operation line nullifying member 7000 in this case, a well-known bent blade structure or tip structure is used, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i, and the unit main body 151 If a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in such a manner as to be able to be replaced by a new one, the sharpness can always be maintained.
In addition, in FIGS. 37F (a) and (b), reference numeral 1021 denotes a pinching part for the operation line L cut into the valley of the safety cover part 1017. It is designed to bite. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L may bite into the pinching part 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g, so that the certainty of preventing fraud is ensured. Is improved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown. However, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where the lower plate is not provided). In the case of, the fraudulent act of invading the illegal ball Q, to which the operation line L is attached, into the gaming area 5a by using a space communicating from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) to the gaming area 5a (the illegal acts A, B). In the case of such a gaming machine, it is illustrative that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper bowl supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second falsification prevention unit is provided in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage unit 1014, but a plurality of second fraud prevention units may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portions of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (at each of the folded portions) has Second fraud prevention means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of deterring an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage unit 1014, but a resin molded product having a similar configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding of the foul cover unit 150 itself may be formed into a special shape so as to function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud-preventing means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a taper provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide member 150k, a slit-like capture portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is pinched by the capture portion that is the narrowest portion of the guide portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same illegal deterrence effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. 37G, 37H, and 37K, the illegal sphere Q that prevents entry of the illegal sphere Q from the ball opening (prevents the reverse movement / backflow of the illegal sphere Q) without affecting the flow of the normal ball. By providing the reverse running prevention means, the fraud by the fraudulent ball Q is prevented.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37G, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into a course changing portion (a portion corresponding to immediately above the lower counter ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the illegal ball Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal ball reverse prevention means). Thereby, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as the illegal act A described above, which reverses the illegal ball Q, without affecting the flow of the normal ball. In addition, at the entrance of the attraction unit 1022, a capture valve (which allows the backflowing illegal ball Q to swing into the attraction unit 1022 only in the invasion direction of the attraction unit 1022 is allowed, and (A one-sided opening valve that makes it impossible to disengage the device, not shown) may be provided, so that traces of using the illegal ball Q and evidence of misconduct can be left.
Also, as shown in FIG. 37H, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downflow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (backflow). Yes (the second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of backflowing the fraudulent ball Q, such as the fraudulent act A described above, without affecting the flow of the normal ball. Note that the operation line invalidating member 7000D in FIG. 37K is also a kind of check valve, and has the same effect as the check valve 1023.
Further, the static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may have both of them.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an operation line nullifying member different from the first operation line nullifying member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. And between the launch position and the fall ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to the door frame base 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending in a flat plate shape outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b regulates the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not come off the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is provided with a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where the rear protruding piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Things.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). The energizing handle return spring 190 has one end attached to the inner base 186 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward from the outer peripheral surface in a circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (a shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is formed such that a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 182a is the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from a most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are substantially linearly inclined, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has translucency. The handle cover 185 has a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 controls the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the operation before the operation of the single-shot button 193 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is most rotated clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d is pressed by the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, The player's feeling of fatigue can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. , And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left and right directions, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, and a right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, The unit includes an upper tray removing unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray removing unit 240 attached behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252, and separated from each other left and right. A dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the transmission ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, a decorative substrate cover 353 for covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. Vibration speaker 354, an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape which bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and opens upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and a depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. B is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b which is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged to B.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a which penetrates up and down the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially square shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl 202 of the lower bowl 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower bowl supply port 211c in a state where the lower bowl 202 is assembled to the pan unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower ball hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 which is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and which is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front side of the plate unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And a unit 240 for removing an upper tray ball attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the right and left direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view, and extends rearward and downward under the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the right and left center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular manner; A cutout portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the upper right side in front view of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feed port 211e which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper plate ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper portion at the left of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. Port 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end thereof passes the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball outlet 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, by operating the upper ball drain button 222. The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 when assembled to the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper part and the rear part are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than an outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed at the upper portion near the right end.

  The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing upper and lower balls 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the lower left decorative board 283, and the lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and sends cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After a predetermined number of game balls B are inserted into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 after the player or the prepaid card is inserted, the remaining amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is displayed, or the ball rental machine is used. To return the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the game ball B after renting out the game ball B.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the extraction button 222 and has a translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 is provided on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball rental display unit 226 is provided below the rear part of the ball rental operation base 223.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B that has been lent is deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section 226 displays the amount of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper platen and the unit 240 for removing the upper platen in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored in the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231, and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on the lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball is provided with a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game at a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b at the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a guiding path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled with the plate base unit 210, and forwardly passes through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes rightward in rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish removing slider 242 has a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the slider 242 for removing the upper tray ball is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Therefore, the slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

The unit for removing the ball from the upper ball 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper ball 240 are positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the slider for the upper ball from the ball is removed. The upper ball removing button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper disc pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Accordingly, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving portion 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 through the entrance 141a and the ball feed member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper disc removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper disc removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper disc removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and is then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pullout button 222 is raised, the ball pullout member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c abutting on the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball dropout 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish main body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front of the dish unit main body 252 with a space left and right. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing unit 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. When the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball outlet hole 202a is connected to the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251; and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and have a dish upper left decoration unit 270, a dish lower left decoration unit 280, a dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower right decoration unit on the front surface, respectively. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  In addition, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, the lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling portions 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the attachment 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled with the lower plate removing unit 260, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 is attached. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-like lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower counter ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower plate empty base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower plate empty hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-back direction, and is slidably mounted in the left-right center of the lower dish removal base 261 so as to slide back and forth. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower ball removing cover 265 is attached to the lower ball removing base 261 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. And the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left-right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower tray removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower tray removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower bowl removing button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower bowl removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removing cover 265 located immediately above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, whereby the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removing hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to a state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through-hole, and the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball cover 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right and has a translucent upper left dish decoration 271, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The upper left dish reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the upper left decorative body 271, and a through-hole is formed in a portion of the upper left dish substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light.

  The upper left plate decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left dish decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, and And a dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decorative board 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Bottom left dish decoration unit and bottom right dish decoration unit]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Can be The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a translucent lower dish decoration 281, a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, A lower left dish decoration board 283 mounted on the rear side of the lower dish reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front.

  The lower left dish decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. The lower left decoration 281 is formed in milky white.

  The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted from the rear inside the lower left decorative body 281, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative board 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the lower left decoration body 281 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 is located on the lower left side of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in a state where the lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end of the lower left dish decoration unit 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300 is located. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decoration piece 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration piece 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent lower right decoration 286 and a lower right lower dish attached to the rear side of the lower right decoration 286. It comprises a reflector 287 and a lower right decorative plate 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The lower right dish decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. The lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear inside the dish lower right decorative body 286, and a through hole is formed in a part of the dish lower right decorative board 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decoration plate 288 are full-color LEDs, and the lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated by emitting light.

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of In the lower right dish decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decoration piece 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about に 対 し て of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 attached from the rear inside the dish center decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear inside the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the front light And a decorative board 316 below the center of the dish on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the LED are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with the front side swelling downward from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward.
In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The effect operation unit 300 has a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a gap between the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. As a foreign substance, there is a possibility that a liquid such as coffee or juice or a powdery substance such as ash or dust of tobacco enters. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 may cause a malfunction, a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b, and a gap between the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. When a foreign object is caught in the central portion, there is a possibility that a trouble such as the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, the rotating operation portion 302, etc. not moving smoothly may occur. Therefore, as a mechanism for discharging these foreign substances from the pachinko machine 1 to the outside, a drain hole 311a is formed in the unit lower cover 311.

Although a plurality of drainage holes 311a are provided, members that constitute the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower plate 202 are not provided directly below some of the drainage holes 311a, and foreign matter is discharged from these drainage holes 311a. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 falls directly on the mounting surface of the island facility on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted.
With this configuration, the foreign matter discharged from the drain hole 311a can be kept away from the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the discharged foreign matter from contaminating the pachinko machine 1. Become.

  In the present embodiment, although the members constituting the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower plate 202 are not provided directly below some of the drain holes 311a, the lower plate 202 is positioned directly below the drain holes 311a. Is also good. With this configuration, since the liquid stays in the lower plate 202, it is possible to prevent the mounting surface of the island facility on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted from being soiled.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed of an opaque polycarbonate resin having a thickness of about 2 mm. With such a configuration, even if foreign matter that cannot be completely discharged by the drain hole 311a remains around the drain hole 311a inside the unit lower cover 311, the presence of the foreign matter cannot be confirmed from the appearance, so that the appearance is not good. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  On the other hand, the unit lower cover 311 may be formed of a transparent resin so that the inside can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, when foreign matter enters the effect operation unit 300 from above and foreign matter flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the door frame 3 is opened, and the dish unit 200 is removed from the door frame 3. Further, it is not necessary to remove the effect operation unit 300 from the plate unit 200 and check the inside of the effect operation unit 300, and it is possible to observe that a foreign object has entered the effect operation unit 300 by external observation. The state of discharge of foreign matter by the drain hole 311a and the state of foreign matter staying in the unit lower cover 311 can be confirmed. In accordance with the state of entry of foreign matter into the staging operation unit 300, the business operation using the pachinko machine 1 is stopped, This makes it possible to appropriately perform the actions such as cleaning and component replacement.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is provided in the unit lower cover 311 has been described, the drain hole 311a may not be provided. Even in the case of such a configuration, the above-described effects can be obtained both when the unit lower cover 311 is formed of an opaque resin or when the unit lower cover 311 is formed of a transparent resin. In addition, by not providing the drain hole 311a, it is possible to prevent a player from performing a mischievous or harassing action such as inserting a thin metal wire such as a wire or a piano wire into the drain hole 311a from below. Becomes possible.

The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape such that the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape. With this configuration, when the liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 from above as foreign matter and flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the resistance of the liquid passing through the drain hole 311 a is reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 Discharge to the outside can be performed promptly.
Further, when solids such as tobacco ash as foreign matter enter the effect operation unit 300 from above and flow down to the unit lower cover 311, solids passing through the drain holes 311 a are prevented from staying in the drain holes 311 a. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be quickly discharged to the outside.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is formed linearly in a shape in which the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape is shown, the drain hole 311a may have such a non-linear shape. For example, the shape of the drain hole may be curved in an arc shape or an S shape. With such a configuration, it is a member provided in the staging operation unit 300 from mischief or harassment by a player such as inserting a thin metal wire such as a wire or a piano wire into the drain hole 311a from below. The vibration speaker 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like can be protected.

The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape such that the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape, and has a diameter of about 2 mm. The drain hole 311a is provided for discharging foreign matter that has entered the performance operation unit 300. However, it is necessary to keep in mind that a player may perform a mischief or harassment such as inserting a foreign matter into the drain hole 311a. There is. As the foreign matter to be inserted, the player's own finger (about 15 to 20 mm in diameter), a game ball (about 11 mm in diameter), a cigarette (about 8 mm in diameter), a thin metal wire such as a wire or a piano wire (0.2 to 0.2 mm in diameter), or the like. About 2 mm) is assumed. In order to prevent the insertion of these foreign substances, it is desirable that the diameter of the drain hole 311a be smaller than the diameter of these foreign substances. On the other hand, when the diameter of the drain hole 311a is reduced, the effect of the surface tension of the liquid flowing down into the unit lower cover 311 becomes a size that cannot be ignored, and the efficiency of discharging the liquid from the drain hole 311a may decrease. is there.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the drain hole 311a is set to about 2 mm.

  Of the foreign objects expected to be inserted as described above, a finger, a game ball, and a cigarette of a player can be impulsively inserted into the drainage hole 311a without requiring advance preparation. On the other hand, a thin metal wire such as a wire or a piano wire is not normally carried by a player, and cannot be inserted into the drain hole 311a unless the player intentionally carries it in the hall. It is considered that the possibility that a finger, a game ball, or a cigarette of the player is inserted is relatively higher than the possibility that such a situation occurs. Therefore, as a countermeasure against a situation where a player's finger, game ball, or cigarette is inserted seizurely, the diameter of the drain hole 311a may be set to less than 8 mm. With such a configuration, the vibrating speaker 354, which is a member provided in the staging operation unit 300, can be used to prevent mischief or harassment, such as inserting a player's finger, game ball, or cigarette from below into the drain hole 311a. , The operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390 and the like can be protected.

  The example in which the shape of the drain hole 311a is cylindrical is shown. However, the shape of the drain hole 311a is not limited to the column shape, but may be a slit shape, a tapered shape, a square shape such as a square or a rectangle, or the like. Is also good. Even in the case of these shapes, by making the width of the narrowest part of the drain hole 311a less than 8 mm, from the mischief and harassment act of inserting a finger, a game ball, a cigarette of the player into the drain hole 311a, The vibration speaker 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like, which are members provided in the effect operation unit 300, can be protected.

  The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape such that the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape. However, when the effect operation unit 300 including the unit lower cover 311 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the drain hole 311a is formed. Is inclined so as to be located rearward as going downward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined only rearward at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the liquid is discharged from the drain hole 311a as a foreign substance, the liquid is discharged in a state where the liquid is vigorously moved backward. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from splashing on clothes and the like of a player sitting on a chair and playing a game. Further, when the player is not playing a game, it is possible to prevent the liquid from splashing on the seating portion of the chair. Further, when a large amount of liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 and a large amount of liquid stays inside the unit lower cover 311, the water pressure applied to the drain hole 311 a becomes strong, and the liquid vigorously moves rearward. Is discharged, and the effect of preventing the liquid from scattering on the clothes and the like of the player can be further enhanced.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes downward is shown, the drain hole 311a may be formed so as not to be inclined. With such a configuration, the drop position of the liquid discharged from the drain hole 311a is limited to a position directly below the drain hole 311a, so that the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the mounting surface of the island facility. In this case, it is possible to easily predict the position at which the liquid falls, and to easily take measures against the liquid drop.

  Although the embodiment has been described in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes downward, the drain hole 311a may be inclined so as to be located forward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state of vibrating forward. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from dropping into the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ball tray in each unit counting system.

  Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be located backward as it goes downward is shown, it may be inclined so as to be located leftward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state where the liquid has a momentum toward the left. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from dropping on the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball tray in each unit counting system, and the hands of the player operating the handle 182. It is possible to do.

  Although the embodiment has been described in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes downward, the drain hole 311a may be inclined so as to be located rightward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged in a state of vibrating rightward. With such a configuration, a dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a ball tray in each car counting system, an inter-chamber machine generally installed on the left side of the pachinko machine 1, and a machine in each car counting system It is possible to prevent the liquid from dropping into the flow path connecting the ball tray and the inter-table machine.

  The embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes downward, and the drain hole 311a is in a state where it is inclined so as to be located forward, leftward, and rightward as it goes downward. Although the modified example described above is shown, the drain hole 311a may be inclined in a direction combining the front-back direction and the left-right direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from dropping on a player, a game arcade facility, or the like. For example, in the case where the drain hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned to the left front as it goes downward, the right hand of the player operating the handle 182, the dollar box, the ball tray in each car counting system, In addition, it is possible to prevent the liquid from dropping into the flow path connecting the ball tray and the inter-machine in each car counting system.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (specifically, eight) drain holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311. With such a configuration, even in a case where a foreign substance that has flowed down is clogged in a part of the drain hole 311a or a situation in which the player blocks the gum from the outside occurs, the discharging function of the drain hole 311a is performed. It is possible to secure.

  Although the embodiment in which a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311 (specifically, eight) is shown, only one drain hole 311a may be provided. With such a configuration, the drop position of the liquid is limited as compared with the case where a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided, so that it is possible to reduce the area of the gaming facility that is soiled by the drop of the liquid.

  In the present embodiment, the drain holes 311a are provided in a plurality (specifically, eight) below the spherical unit lower cover 311 that is convex downward, but four at the lowermost end and an intermediate height. Two heights are provided, and two heights are further provided. With such a configuration, when the amount of liquid flowing into the inside of the unit lower cover 311 is small, the liquid is discharged only from the four lowermost drain holes 311a. Since the lowermost four drain holes 311a are close to each other and the drop position of the liquid is limited, it is possible to prevent the game facility from being stained by the drop of the liquid. On the other hand, when a large amount of liquid has flowed in and a large amount of liquid has accumulated inside the unit lower cover 311, two drain holes 311 a provided at an intermediate height and two drain holes 311 provided at an upper level are provided. The liquid is also discharged from the three drain holes 311a. In this case, it is possible to increase the discharge amount of the liquid per unit time as compared with the case where the liquid is discharged using the four lowermost drain holes 311a.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose front view is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along a front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a forward part below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A lower plate center decoration 312b in which the protruding semi-arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius), and extending in a semi-arc shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached thereto. The dish center reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center decoration board 314 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center decoration board 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center decoration body 312a can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish bottom reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish bottom decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the light emitting decoration of the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be performed by emitting light.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the semi-circular shape of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative board 314 and the LED of the lower plate center decorative board 316 emit light, the whole of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and a main body 321 whose upper part is open, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  Since the main body 321 is attached such that the upper part thereof is inclined forward, the liquid flowing into the bottom wall 321a flows down on the bottom wall 321a and moves forward. A plurality of (specifically, three) through holes 321b are provided at the front end of the bottom wall 321a, and the liquid that has moved forward is discharged from the through holes 321b and the unit lower cover 311 Fall towards. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down.

  Although the embodiment in which the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a has been described, a driving / vibration generation motor, a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, and a dish unit relay board 214 are used instead of the vibration speaker 354. A board box 391 or the like in which an operation unit relay board 392 that relays a signal sent from the control unit 300 to the effect operation unit 300 may be attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a liquid enters these articles and the articles break down.

  In the present embodiment, the vibrating speaker 354 is attached substantially at the center of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. However, the mounting position of the vibrating speaker 354 may be a rear area on the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, the mounting position of the vibrating speaker 354 is increased, and even if a large amount of liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 and a large amount of liquid stays inside the unit lower cover 311, the bottom wall 321 a It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the device and causing the vibration speaker 354 to malfunction.

  In the present embodiment, the vibrating speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. However, the vibrating speaker 354 is provided on the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a with a vertical wall that stands vertically with respect to the bottom wall 321a. May be covered. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down. Can be suppressed.

  Although the example in which the standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354 has been described, a part of the periphery of the vibration speaker 354 may be covered by the standing wall. For example, at least the rear side of the vibration speaker 354 may be covered by an upright wall. Further, the standing wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the vibration speaker 354 and the periphery of the bottom wall 321a are closest. In addition, a portion where the wiring of the vibration speaker 354 is provided may not be provided with a standing wall at a corresponding portion. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down. Can be suppressed. Further, heat radiation of the vibration speaker 354 can be improved as compared with the case where an upright wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354.

  A plurality of ribs for increasing the strength of the bottom wall 321a are provided on the upper surface of the bottom wall 321a in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, respectively. The height of the ribs in the left-right direction (about 0.5 mm) is lower than the height of the ribs in the front-rear direction (about 2 mm). With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the liquid flowing into the operation unit base 320 to the through hole 321b without stagnation while maintaining the strength of the bottom wall 321a.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed outside.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter of approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotating base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotating base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted around an axis which extends vertically to the ring mounting base 331, and which are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and a lower side of the outer ring cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are mounted on the upper surface of the rotary base 332 to form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, and is circumferentially separated outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically projecting upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions for rotatably mounting the bush 333 and a circumferentially spaced outer side than the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions.
The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs on the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331.
The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. When the ring gear 332a is assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a three-dimensional shape on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative part 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and to the center side from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b which are arranged in plurality. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc constituting an inner portion and an upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape.
The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the rotary base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion of a half or more of a circle, and the entire portion has a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and cover the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward protruding portion from the left side of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detecting pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state where the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to drive the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby causing the rotary operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same rotation direction as the rotated operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The transmission ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear ring side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring gear 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive gear 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also controls the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 having a transparent upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and passes through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through-hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to form the rotation operation portion 302 on the outside of the ring. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward.

Here, the principle of the vibration speaker 354 will be briefly described. The vibration speaker 354 includes a voice coil, a magnet, a yoke, a diaphragm, and the like, like a general dynamic speaker. Further, a magnetic circuit unit having the magnet is elastically supported in the vibration speaker 354. When a sine wave having a predetermined frequency is input to the voice coil from the sound source IC, the voice coil is excited, and the elastically supported magnetic circuit unit resonates to generate vibration. The vibration is transmitted to the outside of the 354.
On the other hand, as a conventional method of generating vibration, a method of generating vibration by rotating a motor (so-called “eccentric motor”) having an eccentric weight attached to an output shaft of a cylindrical coreless motor is known. .
Compared with this method, the method using the vibration speaker 354 has advantages that it is thin and does not take up space, can obtain stronger vibration as compared with a method using an eccentric motor of the same size, and has high directivity of vibration. There is. In addition, the method using the eccentric motor applies a large load to the output shaft and is easily broken, while the vibration speaker 354 has an advantage of high durability.

The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the main body 321 via the leg 361b of the button unit base 361, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibrating speaker 354 is transmitted from the bottom wall of the main body 321 to the button unit base. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect operation button unit 360 via the leg 361b of the 361.
An effect operation ring 330 is attached to the main body portion 321 via a flange portion 322, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is applied to the effect operation operation from the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 via the flange portion 322. It is configured to transmit to the ring 330.
Further, the main body 321 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body 321, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is applied to the main body 321. It is configured to be transmitted to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom wall of the main body 321 from the bottom wall of the main body 321.
Further, it is configured such that vibrations from the unit lower cover 311 and the flange portion 322 are transmitted to the unit front cover 312.

  As described above, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320, and the vibration is transmitted through the operation unit base 320, so that the entire effect operation unit 300 can be vibrated.

  In addition, an axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and an axis that vertically passes through a surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are the same. The vibrating speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of an axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibrating speaker 354. Therefore, an axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibrating speaker 354 and a plane that forms the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are perpendicular to each other. By using the same axis as the passing axis, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

  In addition, an axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and an axis that vertically passes through the center of a surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are the same. The vibrating speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of an axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibrating speaker 354. Therefore, the vibrating speaker 354 has an axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibrating speaker 354 and a center of a surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303. By setting the axis that passes vertically to be the same, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

  The vibration direction of the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 and the operation direction of the pressing operation unit 303 are configured to be parallel. In this case, in response to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 by the player, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be directly transmitted to the player.

  The vibration speaker 354 is not attached to a member that moves by a pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303, but is a bottom wall of the main body 321 that does not directly move by the pressing operation by the player. , So as to be separated from the pressing operation unit 303. Thereby, even when the player strongly operates the pressing operation unit 303 and a strong impact is transmitted to the staging operation unit 301, the vibration speaker 354 is moved by the pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303. As compared with the case where the vibration speaker 354 is mounted in a member, the impact given to a movable body such as a voice coil and a diaphragm provided inside the vibration speaker 354 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent them from being damaged.

  Note that the means for generating vibration is not limited to the vibration speaker 354. For example, even when an eccentric motor is used as the means for generating vibration, the eccentric motor is also moved by a pressing operation by the player. By mounting the eccentric motor at a position where no eccentric motor occurs, it is possible to prevent the output shaft of the eccentric motor from being damaged.

  The vibration speaker 354 transmits the generated vibration to the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320, so that the whole effect operation unit 300 can be vibrated through the operation unit base 320. By transmitting vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the unit 300 is attached, the lower dish 202 of the dish decoration unit 250 constituting the dish unit 200 and the upper dish 201 of the dish base unit 210 also constituting the dish unit 200 You may vibrate.

  In this case, when the effect operation unit 300 is vibrated as an effect in the gaming machine, vibration is generated as an effect even for a player who does not touch the effect operation unit 300 and puts a hand on the upper plate 201. Because it is possible to recognize that, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by vibrating the upper plate 201, the game balls B staying in the upper plate 201 can be smoothly supplied to the ball firing device 540.

  In addition, by vibrating the lower plate 202, the game balls B staying in the lower plate 202 can be smoothly discharged below the plate unit 200.

The example in which the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 causes the entire operation unit 300 to vibrate and further transmits the vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the operation unit 300 is attached, but does not transmit the vibration to the handle unit 180. It is desirable to do so. This is because the operation of the handle 182 by the player may be obstructed by the vibration of the handle unit 180.
In order not to transmit vibration to the handle unit 180, a member for absorbing vibration may be provided inside the handle insertion port 252g, or the magnitude of vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 may be adjusted.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 300 has a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the rotating operation unit 302. Therefore, there is a possibility that liquids such as coffee and juice and powdery objects such as ash and dust of tobacco enter as foreign matter. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 may cause a malfunction, a gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b, and a gap between the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. If foreign matter is caught in the inside, there is a possibility that the central pressing operation part 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b, the rotation operation part 302, etc. may not move smoothly, so that these foreign substances are properly discharged. It is desirable to provide a mechanism for performing this.

  Therefore, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration as an effect in the gaming machine, and the entire effect operation unit 300 vibrates, these foreign substances fall down in the effect operation unit 300, and fall on the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311. It is configured to be able to gather and eventually be discharged to the outside through the drain hole 311a. Further, since the vibration speaker 354 is installed below the effect operation unit 300, the vibration can be efficiently transmitted to the unit lower cover 311 also installed below the effect operation unit 300. .

  The generation of vibration by the vibrating speaker 354 is used as an effect in a game machine. At this time, foreign matter can be discharged at the same time, so that it is possible to cope with entry of foreign matter without interrupting the game. Becomes In addition, as the effect in the gaming machine, the generation of the vibration by the vibrating speaker 354 occurs at a predetermined probability, so that the foreign matter is periodically discharged. Therefore, the effect operation unit 300 operates normally for a long period of time. It becomes possible.

As an effect of the gaming machine, an example in which vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 has been described. However, a store clerk or a player who has invaded a foreign object operates the effect operation unit 301 to arbitrarily use the vibration speaker 354. Vibration may be generated.
In this case, by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-game, in which the symbol does not fluctuate, or at the time of power-on, vibration may be generated by the vibration speaker 354. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the performance operation unit 300 is large, and the foreign matter is quickly discharged from the drain hole 311a as compared with the case where the game machine waits for the vibration by the vibrating speaker 354 to occur by chance as a performance in the gaming machine. It becomes possible.
In addition, when the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is arbitrarily generated by operating the performance operation unit 301, the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is generated with a different duration and a different strength as compared with the case where the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is used for performance in a game machine. Vibration may be generated.

On the other hand, as an effect in a gaming machine, even when the pressing operation unit 303 moves up or down or the rotating operation unit 302 rotates, the foreign matter that has entered is discharged similarly to the case where the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. Can be encouraged.
Further, similarly to the case where the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the store clerk or the player who has invaded the foreign substance operates the effect operation section 301 to arbitrarily raise or lower the pressing operation section 303. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated.
In this case, by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of a non-game where the symbol does not fluctuate or at the time of power-on, it is possible to raise or lower the pressing operation unit 303 and rotate the rotation operation unit 302. Good. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the effect operation unit 300 is large, and as compared with the case where the effect in the gaming machine waits for the upward or downward movement of the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 to occur by chance. In addition, it is possible to quickly discharge foreign matter from the drain hole 311a.
In addition, when the raising and lowering of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation of the rotating operation unit 302 are arbitrarily generated by operating the rendering operation unit 301, the raising and lowering of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation of the rendering operation ring 330 are performed. Ascending and descending and rotation may be generated at different durations and at different speeds as compared with the case where rotation is used for production in a gaming machine.

  In the present embodiment, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, a sound wave having a frequency of about 40 Hz ± 2 Hz is output, but this frequency is close to the lower limit of the human audible range. Considering the masking effect of the environmental sound of a pachinko hall or the like where the is installed, or the audible sound output from another speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) provided in the gaming machine itself, it cannot be recognized substantially by human hearing. .

  On the other hand, by giving a signal for outputting a sound wave having a higher frequency than that in the case where vibration is generated from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the vibration speaker 354 is controlled to emit an audible sound like a normal speaker. It is also possible.

  As described above, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the effect operation unit 300 can output both vibration and audible sound according to the signal given from the sound source IC.

  Further, by changing the amplitude of the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the intensity of the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 can be changed.

  The signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 may be supplied continuously or intermittently. For example, a continuous vibration is generated by continuously supplying a signal for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), or the supply of the signal is started and stopped every predetermined period (for example, 1 second). By doing so, an intermittent vibration may be generated. This makes it possible to improve the interest.

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and rotates the rotary operation unit 302 by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. At this time, when vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the operation unit base 320 is moved. Through this, strong vibration is transmitted to the operation ring drive motor 342, and the operation ring drive motor 342 may lose synchronism. Therefore, it is desirable that the driving of the operation ring drive motor 342 and the generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 be performed exclusively. For example, after the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342, and then the rotation is stopped, the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 or the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. Is stopped, the rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. As a result, step-out of the operation ring drive motor 342 can be prevented, and the accuracy of the rotation control of the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved.

  Further, when the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is driven, the pressing operation unit 303 is raised or lowered. However, even when a stepping motor is employed as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation ring driving motor Similarly to the case, it is desirable that the driving of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 and the generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 be performed exclusively. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the step-down drive motor 367 from falling out of synchronization, and it is possible to increase the accuracy of the control for raising or lowering the pressing operation unit 303.

  Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the time of non-game, in which the symbol does not fluctuate, or at the time of power-on, vibration transmitted to the game area 5a by the vibration speaker 354 may be generated. Thereby, without opening the door frame 3, a ball clogging state (a state called so-called "grape") in which the game ball B is clogged between the obstacle nails and between the obstacle nails and various accessories, or movable. It is possible to eliminate a state where a ball is sandwiched by the winning device (a so-called “ball biting” state).

[3-5e-8. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as exploded and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear member 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The elevating cam member 371 which is rotatably mounted and rotatably attached to the elevating base member 364, and the elevating driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 are covered from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be movable vertically by a pair of guide shafts 362. Center button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the center button body 373. A central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a closed upper end with a diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a center button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation section 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the center button main body 373 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer peripheral portion. An outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and ascending and descending so as to cover the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 with the central button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower end of the leg 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 forward and backward from the center, respectively, at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating the center in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. An upright wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c into the central hole 364b so as to face each other. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the bottom part 373b of the center button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the upper part 363, while the upper end of the upright wall part 364c abuts on the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other, and is detected by an elevation detecting sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  In addition, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to move the elevating base 364 up and down.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373 b (lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 comes into contact with the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer periphery button decoration board 377 are full color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can make the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a in a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is mounted on the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62A, the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 are moved in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by a pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also project upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves rightward, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, the lifting base 364 moves downward via the guide pin 364d against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the state of the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state where they are assembled to the production operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the state of the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 projecting downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the elevating spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation part 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original lowering position is restored.

The effect operation button unit 360 is placed in the operation unit base 320 with its upper part inclined forward, and is a part of the effect operation button unit 360, that is, a button unit base 361 and a button unit base 361. Similarly, the disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side is placed in the operation section base 320 in an inclined state.
With such a configuration, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, the entering liquid flows down the upper surface of the gear cover 372 to the front side, It will flow down into the operation unit base 320.

  Further, an operation button elevating drive motor 367 is attached to a rear area on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down to the operation button elevating drive motor 367 even if the liquid has entered through the gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. Becomes

  The operation button elevating drive motor 367 is provided with an operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a for power supply and control on the side thereof, and the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a is provided at the center of the button unit base 361. It is attached to the button unit base 361 so as to face. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down from the peripheral edge of the gear cover 372 toward the operation unit base 320, the liquid may come into contact with the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a and an electrical defect such as a short circuit may occur. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

  In the present embodiment, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, but the lower surface of the button unit base 361 is provided with an upright wall which stands upright in the vertical direction with respect to the button unit base 361. The entire periphery of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 may be covered. With this configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, the liquid enters the operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 Can be prevented from occurring.

  Although the example in which the upright wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button up / down drive motor 367 has been described, a part of the periphery of the operation button up / down drive motor 367 may be covered with the upright wall. For example, at least the rear side of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 may be covered by an upright wall. Further, the upright wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 and the periphery of the button unit base 361 are closest. In addition, an upright wall may be provided so as to cover at least a portion corresponding to the operation button elevating / lowering drive motor terminal 367a at a portion where the operation button elevating / lowering drive motor terminal 367a is provided. On the other hand, when the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a is attached to the button unit base 361 so as to face the center side of the button unit base 361, a vertical wall corresponding to the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a is provided. It may not be necessary. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, the liquid enters the operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 Can be prevented from occurring. Further, heat radiation of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 can be improved as compared with the case where an upright wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted inside the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 and the relay. I have.

  The board box 391 has a rectangular appearance, and is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 such that the long sides face the left and right directions. The substrate box 391 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized.

On the rear surface of the operation unit relay board 392, connection to various boards, motors, sensors, and the like provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and connection to the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are performed. Are provided in plurality.
The board box 391 is provided with a board box opening 391b at a position corresponding to the operation section relay board connector section 392a in such a shape that a plane forming the rear side of the board box 391 is hollowed out. The shape of the board box opening 391b is in accordance with the shape of the operation unit relay board connector 392a, and is specifically a square or a rectangle. In addition, through the board box opening 391b, various boards, motors, sensors, and the like provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and connectors provided at the ends of the wiring from the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are provided. It is connected to the operation section relay board connector section 392a.

  In the present embodiment, the substrate box opening 391b is provided in such a shape as to hollow out a plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391. A waterproof wall 391c may be provided. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane of the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the liquid may flow down into the substrate box 391 due to the waterproof wall 391c. Deterrence becomes possible.

  The modified example in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided rearward from the entire periphery of the board box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the board box 391 has been described. Instead of the entire periphery of the portion 391b, only a part of the periphery may be used. For example, at least a waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the periphery corresponding to the upper half area of the substrate box opening 391b, or may correspond to the upper side of the substrate box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape. At least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the periphery, or at least the waterproof wall 391c may not be provided on the periphery corresponding to the lower side of the substrate box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the liquid flows down into the substrate box 391. In addition, it is possible to easily attach and detach the connector at the board box opening 391b.

  The modified example in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided rearward from the periphery of the board box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the board box 391 has been described. It may be a part other than the periphery of 391b. For example, a waterproof wall 391c may be provided at a position separated from the board box opening 391b. Further, one waterproof wall 391c may be provided so as to prevent the liquid from flowing into the plurality of substrate box openings 391b. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane of the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the liquid may flow down into the substrate box 391 due to the waterproof wall 391c. Deterrence becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to easily attach and detach the connector at the board box opening 391b.

  Further, the waterproof wall 391c may be formed in a linear shape so that the waterproof wall 391c goes downward as it goes rightward or leftward. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane of the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the liquid may flow down into the substrate box 391 due to the waterproof wall 391c. Deterrence becomes possible. Further, the inclination of the waterproof wall 391c allows the liquid flowing down to be guided rightward or leftward, and keeps the liquid flowing down from other articles below the waterproof wall 391c. Becomes possible.

  The operation unit relay board 392 is attached to a position between various boards, motors, sensors, and the like provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 in the front-rear direction. . With such a configuration, the length of wiring connecting various boards, motors, sensors, and the like provided in the rendering operation unit 300 to the operation unit relay board 392, the operation unit relay board 392 and the dish unit relay It is possible to reduce the total length of the wiring connecting the substrate 214 and the length.

  The board box 391 is attached so as to be spaced apart in the front-rear direction from the gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer pressing unit 303b and the gap between the outer pressing unit 303b and the rotating operation unit 302 in the rendering operation unit 300. Have been. The board box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. With such a configuration, when the liquid enters the gap between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b or the gap between the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the rotating operation unit 302 in the rendering operation unit 300. However, the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 serves as a wall, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the liquid flows down into the substrate box 391.

  The board box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 such that the upper part thereof is inclined forward. With such a configuration, the area of the board box 391 in a plan view can be reduced as compared with the case where the board box 391 is attached so as to be parallel to the horizontal plane, and the board box 391 flows down from above. The effect of the liquid can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the board box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the upper part thereof is inclined forward, but such that the board box 391 is perpendicular to the horizontal plane. You may make it attach. With such a configuration, compared to the case where the board box 391 is attached so as to be parallel to the horizontal plane or the case where the upper part of the board box 391 is inclined forward, the board box 391 in plan view is provided. Can be reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

  Although the board box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320 so as to be perpendicular to the horizontal plane, the board box 391 is mounted such that the long sides of the board box 391 face up and down. You may. With such a configuration, the area of the substrate box 391 in a plan view can be further reduced, and the effect of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a substrate box opening 391b is provided in a shape that hollows out a plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, and various types of components provided in the rendering operation unit 300 through the substrate box opening 391b. A connector provided at the end of the board, motor, sensor, etc. and the wiring from the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is connected to the operation section relay board connector portion 392a, but covers the board box 391. The board box cover 393 may be attached from behind the board box 391 so as to cover at least a part of the board box 391. The board box cover 393 is desirably formed in a plane shape that is parallel to a plane forming the rear side of the board box 391. In addition, it is desirable that the board box cover 393 be provided with a certain interval between a plane forming the rear side of the board box 391 and a plane portion forming a part of the board box cover 393. Further, the board box cover 393 may be formed to have a rearwardly convex shape so as to cover at least a part of the upper end, the left and right ends, and the lower end of the board box 391. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a liquid enters the operation unit relay board connector unit 392a.

  The modified example in which the board box cover 393 that covers the board box 391 is attached from the rear of the board box 391 has been described, but the gap formed between the board box 391 and the board box cover 393 has an operation section relay board connector section. An excess portion of the wiring connected to 392a may be stored. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various kinds of wiring in the effect operation unit 300 are contaminated by the flowing liquid.

  The modified example in which the substrate box cover 393 that covers the substrate box 391 is attached from the rear of the substrate box 391 has been shown. However, a projecting substrate box cover liquid that guides the liquid flowing down to the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393 in the left-right direction. The guide portion 393a may be provided so as to stand upright on the rear surface of the board box cover 393. Specifically, on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be linearly formed so that the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a goes downward as it goes rightward or leftward. Also, on the back of the substrate box cover 393, two linear substrate box cover liquid guiding portions 393a are provided in the shape of a mountain having a convex top, and the liquid flowing down in the right and left directions is distributed. It may be. Although the example in which the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a is inclined rightward or leftward is shown, the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be provided in parallel with the left-right direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the liquid flowing down to the board box cover 393 away from a portion in the gaming machine 1 where the liquid does not want to flow down.

  Although the example in which the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a is provided so as to stand upright on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, the substrate box cover 393 is replaced with or in addition to the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a as described above. The liquid may be provided with a step, and the liquid may be guided by the step.

[3-5e-10. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 disposed in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in a left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. I do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b.
Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy and a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  This allows the player to touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. Sex is raised. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform a rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, by turning on the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-embellished. In the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descending position that projects slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). As a result, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the elevating base 364 to a state of the ascending position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the center operation unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the center operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b The state is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 detects pressing.

  Also, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in the state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operating unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is substantially at the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, and thus, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the production operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participating type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation is facilitated by the player using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 becoming a hindrance. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, And a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are full color LEDs.
The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can emit and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 in a flat plate shape, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b inside the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to obscure the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right side, and the player playing with the right pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 attached to the front surface and having a plurality of side window decoration portions 410b extending cylindrically forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and a plurality of side-window decorative portion decorative substrates 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a plurality of side-window decorative members 412 are provided. And internal reflectors 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends up and down, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left and right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and front and rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than a rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion of the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property.

  The in-side window decorative portion decorative board 413 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the in-side window decorative member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross shape around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Have been. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that penetrate back and forth, and in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and back, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415.
The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side reflector 415.
The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full color LEDs.
The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can emit light and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end of the upper right side of the door frame 450 of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a ４ portion from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration section 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits light from the LED of the side window interior section decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b are turned off. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b at 410a. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. The player can make the entire game area 5a hard to see from the player, and make it difficult for the player to feel as if viewed by another player, so that the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Furthermore, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a, and makes it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to look inside the game area 5a. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent another player from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the attention is paid to the other player. You can prevent discomfort from becoming unable to concentrate on the game as a result of being unable to concentrate on the game, and prevent the mood from being lost by inducing mistakes, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers both left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 mounted on the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. A top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a bottom cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top bottom cover 465 from below; Door frame top relay board attached near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as the front ends downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 has a shape in front view substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in milky white having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction, connects the front end and the rear end, and extends vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the center part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, a door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting LEDs on the decorative boards, A light emission effect can be shown to a player so that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorations 312a and 312b are attached vertically spaced apart from each other at the top and bottom of the dish. Door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 41 of door frame left side unit 400 of the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the dish unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302 and the two dish upper decorations 312a and the dish lower decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower dish decoration 312 b arranged below the upper dish decoration body 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by operating the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower center decoration 312b is larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facilities of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 having a rear portion insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. A main frame upper hinge member 510 which is rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the upper frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3; A lower body frame hinge assembly which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 on the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. And a solid 520.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 mounted on a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and covers a rear side of the game board 5; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the one rail cover 554 to the left as viewed from the front, and the tank rail 553 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to provide the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 with the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 is attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and is connected to the connection cable 503, and is provided to guide the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends back and forth, and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ３ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion. The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side of the unit 501e when viewed from the front, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a front view, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j that is rotatably mounted and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a to mount the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g, around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, thereby enabling the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b to be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a. And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting concave portion 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable mounting concave portion 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame auxiliary relay board 104 of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left and right direction is hingeably mounted on the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are changed. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being fastened together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted into the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 pushes the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from being abnormal.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. Thus, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the folding habit, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axial center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 is moved in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be securely closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 above the door frame is rotatably mounted.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge body 511. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extended portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the body frame 4 can be hinge-rotated. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower part for the door frame into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view, and has a constant cross section and extends vertically. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat-plate-like launching base 541 attached to the launching device attaching portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 541 on the right side when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A shooting rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the firing position on the upper right end of the firing rail 544, and the game ball B is placed at the firing position of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is turned in the supplied state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. The game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through a launch rail 544 and a launch ball passage (see FIG. 37A) of a launch passage portion 1012 composed of an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 (see FIG. 37A). Driven in.

  In addition, due to the relationship between the hitting strength of the game ball B and the like, when the fired game ball B does not reach the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 37A, the distance between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 is increased. The ball falls from the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened in the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, and passes through the foul cover unit 150 from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front view is substantially the same as the top plate portion and extends downward. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose front-rear direction width is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position nearer to the front side than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width. Left back plate portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b. Extends to almost the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f in front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

[Electrostatic noise countermeasures]
By the way, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of control boards including a main control board 1310 are mounted, and a game control, an effect control, and a game control are performed by cooperation of the control boards through a command output from the main control board 1310. Various controls such as payout control are performed. Since a large number of electronic components, such as CPUs, which are susceptible to electromagnetic noise are mounted on these control boards, in order to guarantee a stable game operation without malfunction, the influence of the electromagnetic noise should be eliminated. Is very important.

  There are various possible sources of this electromagnetic wave noise, but a game ball is a noise source unique to a game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium, such as a ball game machine, and has the greatest influence. That is, the game balls are supplied to the ball tank 552 from above the respective game machines by the game island facilities, are provided for the game in the game machines, and are collected again in the game islands. Static electricity is generated due to friction between the game balls, friction between the game balls and the passage walls, and the like. Electromagnetic noise is generated by the discharge from the charged game balls, which adversely affects electronic components such as the CPU.

  As described above, the ball tank 552 is where the most game balls serving as noise sources are supplied and concentrated. Next is a tank rail 553 for guiding game balls from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580. That is, it is considered that the amount of static electricity accumulated in the ball tank 552 is the largest. Therefore, it is considered that it is advisable to eliminate static electricity in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552. In addition, in order to realize more stable game operations, in addition to measures to suppress the generation of electromagnetic noise due to such instantaneous discharge of static electricity, even if electromagnetic noise occurs, electronic components due to it It is also desirable to take measures that can eliminate the adverse effects of the above.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69), as to the static elimination of a game ball put into the ball tank 552, " The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via a grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via a grounding fitting 782. The game ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731 so that the charged static electricity can be removed. " Each ground is temporarily integrated on a power supply board 630 (see FIG. 95) arranged on the CR unit 6 side below the main body frame 4 of the gaming machine so as to easily supply a power supply of 24 V AC for communication. , It has been grounded through the power supply board 630 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility.

  FIG. 202 (a) is a block diagram showing a ground system of a conventional gaming machine showing this mode. Conventionally, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), static electricity generated in various places such as a ball tank 552, various control boards typified by a main control board 1310, and an interface board 635 for interfacing with the CR unit 6 is generated. Once integrated on the power supply board 630, it was connected to the earth 6000 of the island facility through the power supply board 630 and grounded.

  Since the power supply board 630 is generally heavy, it is often placed below the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate on the ground power supply board 630, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank 552 on the upper part of the gaming machine, the payout device 580, or the like toward the lower power supply board 630. By drawing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic wave noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way and may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board 630, if any problem occurs in the power supply board 630, the ground is affected. On the contrary, the current flows through the ground wire, which affects the operation of the power supply board 630. There was a risk of giving. Further, when the ground of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it may be cumbersome because it is necessary to route the ground wire collected by the power supply board 630 from below to above again and connect it.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball tank 552 to which the largest number of game balls are supplied and which generates the most static electricity is grounded without passing through the power supply board 630.
In addition, the ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin (for example, a resin obtained by increasing the content of the ABS resin mixed with a conductive filler) in order to eliminate static electricity quickly. Where the static electricity is connected to ground through a tank rail or the like, the ball tank 552 is directly connected to ground. Then, an earth circuit board 559 which exerts a static elimination action is disposed separately from the power supply board 630 independently of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 and the earth circuit board 559 are connected by an earth wire. Further, the ground circuit board 559 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility.

  FIG. 202 (b) is a block diagram showing a ground system of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), static electricity generated in various places, such as an interface board 635 for interfacing with the CR unit 6 and a power supply board 630 as well as the ball tank 552, is once aggregated in a ground circuit board 559 to form a ground circuit. It was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the substrate 559 and grounded. As described above, the grounding circuit board 559 plays a role of temporarily collecting static electricity generated in various places. In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635, the power supply board 630 and the like are directly connected to the ground circuit board 559. Although the tank rail 553 for guiding the game ball is made of a transparent non-conductive resin, the tank rail 553 may be made conductive and have conductivity as a unit with the ball tank 552. In this case, it is possible to provide conductivity by providing a metal plate inside, as is conventionally done. Further, the ground may be taken from the ball guiding unit 570, but in such a configuration, the ground path from the ball tank 552 and the plurality of paths of the ball guiding unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552 may be provided. Is formed, and interference may occur between the two. Therefore, it is desirable that the grounding be performed at an appropriate point at one point.

  In addition, grounding fittings can be connected to a plurality of locations such as the side surface or the rear surface of the ball tank 552. Since the supply (falling) positions of the game balls to the ball tank 552 vary depending on the island facilities installed on the game arcade side, it is necessary to connect an earth wire for electrical connection. This makes it possible to change the position closer to that. The mounting position of the grounding metal is appropriately selected in the ball tank 552 and is arbitrarily mounted. Then, an earth circuit board 559 exhibiting a static elimination action is arranged in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate.

  FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the payout base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for performing static elimination as viewed obliquely from the rear of the main body frame 4. FIG. 204 is a rear view of the storage case portion 551j that houses the ground circuit board 559 as seen through from above, and FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. FIG. 206 is an enlarged view of a main part mainly showing the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 203, the payout base 551 has transparency, and the payout base unit 550 is located on the right side of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551, and Above 553, a case portion 558a in which circuit portions of an external terminal plate 558 formed of a transparent resin case that can be visually recognized from the outside are arranged, and a circuit portion of the external terminal plate 558 (for example, a terminal) Both the connection portion between the outer surface of the external terminal plate 558 and the outside of the external terminal plate 558 are visible from the outside. In this example, the external terminal board 558 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and its long side is arranged along the left-right direction of the main body frame 4. Further, in this example, the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is disposed along the up-down direction of the main body frame 4, but is not limited thereto, and the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is arranged with respect to the up-down direction of the main body frame 4. May be arranged at an angle. An external terminal plate 558 (connection portion) is provided on the rear surface of the case portion 558a.

Above the inside of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, a thin box-shaped storage case portion 551j made of a transparent resin whose inside is visible is disposed, and the inside of the storage case portion 551j is neutralized. Circuit board 559 is accommodated with the back surface (solder surface) facing upward. Therefore, not only the connection portion of the external terminal plate 558 but also the back surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal plate 558, the back surface of the ground circuit board 559, and a connector portion described later are provided so as to be easily visible from the outside. In this example, a transparent resin case makes the case visible from the outside. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A hole (for example, a slit, a slot, or the like) that opens in a case that is not necessarily transparent may be used. So that not only the connection portion of the external terminal plate 558 from the hole but also the back surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal plate 558, the back surface of the ground circuit board 559, and a connector portion described later can be easily visually recognized from the outside. Is also good.
Further, if the payout base 551 is also formed of a transparent resin, the back surface (solder surface) of the external terminal plate 558 can be visually recognized from the inside by removing the game board. Note that the storage case portion 551j may be formed separately or integrally with the payout base 551.

  Since the ground circuit board 559 is provided at such a position, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, simply removing the gaming board, the payout base unit 550 and the external parts included therein are provided. The terminal plate 558 and the ground circuit board 559 can be visually recognized. At this time, the external terminal board 558 and the ground circuit board 559 are located near the upper left when viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, so that it is necessary to open the door widely in order to perform wrongdoing. In addition, it becomes difficult to attach an unauthorized electric element to the ground circuit board 559 or the like, and even if it is performed, it becomes easy to find out that an illegal act has been performed from the outside.

[Fixing mode of ball tank 552]
A manner of fixing the ball tank 552 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper back surface of the payout base 551 having transparency on the left side in rear view by screwing. In this example, laterally protruding mounting portions 552a and 552b are formed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the front portion of the ball tank 552 which is in contact with the mounting surface to the payout base 551. Then, screws are fixed to the payout base 551 from the rear of the main body frame 4 to the mounting portions 552a and 552b.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has a mounting portion 552c formed by a boss protruding from substantially the center of the outer surface of the ball tank 552, and a boss portion protrudingly formed at the right rear portion of the ball tank 552 in the front-rear direction when viewed from the rear. And a mounting portion 552e for the tank rail 553 and a mounting portion 552e for the grounding metal.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the attachment portions 552c and 552d of the ball tank 552 by screws from below. In this example, a grounding metal connected to one end of a ground wire 5591 (see FIG. 204) is screwed to the mounting portion 552e of the ball tank from below with a metal screw (not shown).

[Attaching Mode of Grounding Fitting in Ball Tank 552]
In this example, the mounting portion 552e of the earth metal fitting of the ball tank 552 is provided independently and exclusively for other mounting portions, but is not necessarily limited to being provided independently. It can also be used in common with the mounting part. The respective examples are described below.

  For example, in the case where the supply points of the game balls from the island facilities installed on the game center are concentrated on the left side inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view from the back side of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. 206. The static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the left side of the ball tank 552 near the point where the game ball enters. In such a case, a grounding metal may be fastened to the dispensing base 551 together with a metal screw on the mounting portion 552a.

  Further, for example, the supply points of the game balls from the island facilities installed on the game arcade side are concentrated in the central portion inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. In such a case, static electricity is most likely to accumulate in the center of the ball tank 552 near the point of entry of the game ball. In such a case, a grounding metal may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw to the mounting portion 552c.

  Further, for example, in the case where the supply points of the game balls from the island facilities installed on the game arcade are concentrated on the right side of the ball tank 552 in the perspective view from the back side of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. The static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the right side of the ball tank 552 near the point where the game ball enters. In addition to the entry points of the game balls, the right side of the ball tank 552 may easily accumulate static electricity by a large number of game balls charged with static electricity. Further, since the tank rail 553 has the ball rectifying member 556 for aligning the game balls in a line so as not to overlap each other, the game balls are easily stopped. In such a case, a grounding metal may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw to the mounting portion 552d.

  FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the storage case portion 551j of the payout base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for performing static elimination as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 204, the ground circuit board 559 includes five connectors CN11 to CN15. More specifically, one end of a ground wire 5591 for static elimination connected to the ball tank 552 made of a conductive resin at one end is connected to the connector CN13. A plurality of bosses for earth connection may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ball tank 552 so as to be able to cope with a change in the arrangement due to an increase in each of the main effect devices disposed below the ball tank 552. In order to cope with the cause of the generation of static electricity, it is preferable that the bosses for ground connection are provided separately from each other.

  Further, the other end of the ground wire 5592 for static elimination connected to the body frame metal member provided on the body frame 4 at one end is connected to the connector CN14. It is to be noted that the ground connection terminal 570a may be connected to the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 with a grounding metal fitting for grounding, and a separate connector CN16 (not shown) may be provided on the grounding circuit board to provide a grounding connection terminal. In this case, as shown in a circuit diagram of FIG. 205 described later, the connection may be made in parallel with CN13 or CN14.

  In addition, one end of the ground wire 5593 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the connector CN15. Further, the other end of the ground wire 5595 whose one end is connected to the frame ground of the interface board 635 is connected to the connector CN11. Note that the frame ground of the interface board 635 is electrically connected to a housing (frame) in which the CR unit 6 is housed through predetermined wiring, and noise current from the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed. Are connected to a ground circuit board 559 via a frame ground of the interface board 635 and a ground wire 5595. One end of a ground wire 5594 is connected to the connector CN12. Then, by connecting the other end of the ground wire 5594 to a ground provided in an island facility (game machine facility) in which the game machine 1 is installed, the entire game machine is grounded.

  FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. One end of a ground wire 5591 connected to the ball tank 552 is connected to one end of a connection line from the connector CN13 to which one end of a ground resistance ER1 is connected. Also, one end of a grounding wire 5592 connected to the body frame metal member provided on the body frame 4 is connected to one end of a connection line from the connector CN14 to which one end of the ground resistor ER2 is connected. That is, a portion where static electricity is accumulated is electrically connected via a ground resistor ER1 (in this example, a resistance value of 510Ω as an example), and gradually discharged except that the static electricity is gradually guided to the ground of the game machine equipment. Suppresses instantaneous discharge of static electricity.

  Further, the other end of the ground resistor ER1 and the other end of the ground resistor ER2 are connected, and the subsequent stage of the connection point on the ground resistor ER1 side is branched into two branches, and one branch is connected to the connector CN15 (power supply board). The other branch is connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment). The subsequent stage of the connection point on the side of the ground resistor ER2 is connected to the connector CN11 (interface board).

  Since the noise current flowing from the CR unit 6 to the interface board 635 through the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed is small, the ground wire 5595 is formed by using a thinner ground wire than the other ground wires 5591 to 5594. The connector CN11 for connecting the ground wire 5595 is smaller than the other connectors (see FIG. 204).

  As described above, the ground circuit board 559 having the ground resistors ER1 and ER2 is provided inside the storage case portion 551j, and the ground connected to the ball tank 552 at one end of the ground resistor ER1 provided on the ground circuit board 559. A wire is connected to suppress an instantaneous discharge of a high voltage that causes electromagnetic wave noise via the ground resistor ER1. Further, an earth wire connected to the body frame metal member of the body frame 4 is connected to one end of the earth resistor ER2 so as to suppress instantaneous discharge of high voltage which causes electromagnetic wave noise via the earth resistor ER2. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 205, static electricity at various points is connected at one point to the connector CN12 (island equipment) at one point so that static electricity is released by one system. For example, a configuration is possible in which the ground wire is taken from the ball guiding unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552 while the ground wire is taken from the ball tank 552. Since the static electricity is divided into two systems, a system directly connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment) and a system connected via the ball guiding unit 570, static elimination by each path interferes with each other to form a good ground. It may disappear.

  In addition, since the static electricity generated in various places is once collected on the ground circuit board 559 disposed on the upper rear surface of the main body frame 4, the static electricity is temporarily transmitted to the power supply substrate 630 disposed on the lower rear surface of the main body frame 4 as in the related art. The arrangement of the ground wiring is simpler than that of the centralized wiring.

  The ground circuit board 559 and the external terminal board 558 are brought close to each other, and both are arranged on the upper right side of the main body frame 4 when viewed from the back, so that the ground wire 5594 from the ground circuit board 559 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility. The connection and the connection of the output wiring from the external terminal plate 558 to the island facility can be easily performed at the same time, and the workability is improved.

  Then, the ground wire 5594 (see FIG. 204) is connected to the other end of the ground resistor ER1 and the ground resistor ER2 toward the gaming machine equipment, and the ground wire 5594 is further drawn out from the rear surface of the storage case portion 551j. The ground wire 5594 thus drawn is connected to the ground provided in the game arcade facilities, so that the entire gaming machine is grounded. As described above, the length of the ground wire 5591 connecting the ball tank 552 in which static electricity easily accumulates and the ground circuit board 559 exhibiting a static elimination action is set to be shorter than other ground wires.

In addition, each ground wire is collected on the ground circuit board 559, and the ground wire 5594 drawn from the connector CN12 (island facility) of the ground circuit board 559 is directly connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility. Can be grounded without passing through. For this reason, even if any problem occurs in the power supply board 630, it is possible to reduce the influence on the ground.
Conversely, conventionally, since the grounding is performed via the power supply board 630, there is a possibility that the operation of the power supply board 630 may be affected when a large amount of current flows through the ground wire. Such a danger can be avoided by grounding without using the power supply board 630.

  In the embodiment, the ground resistance is provided between the connector CN13 (ball tank) of the ground circuit board 559 and the connector CN12 (island equipment) and between the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment). Although ER1 and ER2 are provided, it is not always necessary to provide a ground resistor. The grounding resistor is provided to prevent a sudden current from flowing at the time of grounding. Therefore, the grounding resistor may be provided in accordance with a predicted generated voltage. If necessary, the connector CN11 (interface board) and the connector CN12 (island) A resistor having an appropriate resistance value can also be provided in the equipment) and the connector CN15 (power supply board). In addition, a ground resistance of an appropriate size may be provided in front of the connector CN12 (island equipment) to provide a common resistance for grounding static electricity generated in each part. It is also possible to perform grounding with an appropriate amount of current without providing a grounding resistor.

  The ground circuit board 559 is housed inside the storage case portion 551j with the board back surface (solder surface) facing upward, and is disposed so as to be visible from the outside of the payout unit base 550. For this reason, even if an incorrect electric element is attached to the ground circuit board 559, it can be immediately visually detected. Also, on the lower surface of the board, the connector CN13 (ball tank) of the earth circuit board 559 and the connector CN12 (island equipment) and the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) are provided. Earth resistors ER1 and ER2 are provided between the respective connections, and these are also attached so that they can be visually recognized from the outside. In addition, in order to prepare for an unexpected situation such as a loose connector, the storage case portion 551j may be detachable from the dispensing unit base 550, and the ground circuit board 559 may be detachable from the storage case portion 551j.

  Further, hook portions (for example, hooks) for hooking a ground wire are provided at a plurality of locations on the outer surface of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, and after hooking the ground wire on these hook portions, the ground circuit board 559 is provided. The configuration may be such that the ground wire is connected to the connector. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the influence on the connector due to the fluctuation of the ground line itself due to the weight of the ground line and the fluctuation when the ground line comes into contact with another member, thereby stabilizing the connection.

Since the ball tank 552 is formed of a resin, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 80, a game ball is stored in the ball tank 552 or a ball collides from the upper portion, so that the bottom of the ball tank 552 is formed. When the bottom of the ball tank 552 is bent, the ball tank 552 does not come into contact with the top plate 551a of the payout base 551. A gap is formed so as to avoid it. Further, by providing the gap, an impact when a game ball is thrown into the ball tank 552 from the island facility is not transmitted to a member therebelow.
Further, in the case where the ground is taken from the mounting portion 552a provided on the left side of the ball tank 552 and is connected to the ground circuit board 559, the ground wire connecting the mounting portion 552a and the ground circuit board 559 is connected to this gap. It is good to constitute so that it may pass using.

  Further, as shown in the perspective view of FIG. 12, when the game board 5 is fitted and mounted on the main body frame 4, the peripheral control unit 1500 is located below the ball tank 552. Since the peripheral control unit 1500 has an electric drive source for driving the effect display device 1600 and other movable movable objects for effect, the peripheral control unit 1500 easily generates heat. Therefore, a flame-retardant polycarbonate resin (transparent or black) is used for the peripheral control board box 1520 in the peripheral control unit 1500 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. By making the peripheral control board box 1520 made of resin, there is an effect that the weight can be reduced as compared with the case where the peripheral control board box 1520 is made of metal.

  The peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is made of a conductive resin having a lower electric resistance than that of the ABS resin forming the ball tank 552. (For example, increasing the amount of carbon contained). That is, the conductivity is higher in the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 than in the ball tank 552. The peripheral control board box 1520 may be made of metal. This is because the peripheral control board 1510 that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to static electricity is housed inside.

  The peripheral control board box 1520 is also connected to the ground circuit board 559 via a grounding member (not shown) to the body frame metal member via a ground wire, and finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 via the ground wire 5592. ing. For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to suppress the electromagnetic wave noise generated by the discharge of the static electricity, and to remove the static electricity as soon as possible so as not to be easily affected by the electromagnetic noise. In addition, since the polycarbonate is resistant to high heat, the self-extinguishing property (resistant to high temperatures) of the polycarbonate can suppress the influence of heat transfer to the main control unit 1300 disposed therebelow.

  In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a contact pressing portion that presses against a ball supply lever that is operated to open in a direction in which game balls on the island facility are supplied to the ball tank 552. Are formed on the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552. In this example, a projection projecting outward is provided on the upper edge of the peripheral wall that forms the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552 (see the side and rear of the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 80). ). For this reason, the impact when the ball tank 552 hits the ball supply lever can be absorbed to some extent.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, and the length in the front-back direction is shorter than the depth in the front-back direction of the top plate 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view in which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  Also, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. Mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopping member 557 is slidably mounted in the left and right direction in the vicinity of the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553 in front view, and is slid to the left to close the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, The game balls B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream. The ball stopper 557 is disposed inside a concave portion (not shown) formed in the payout base 551, and does not project rearward as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is possible to prevent accidental contact with the ball stopping member 557 and hooking.

  As described above, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the upper surface of a portion extending right and left of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the upper full tank path unit is operated from the ball discharge path 580b in which the ball release lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guiding path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 movable by a game ball B flowing in the guiding path 570 a, and a game ball B in the guiding path 570 a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence / absence (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion rotatably mounted around an axis extending frontward and rearward at a position on the right outside of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e.

  The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a that is a box-like shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotation axis protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585, and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; A second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. It has a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that are integrally rotated with the dispensing gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. And a blade rotation detecting sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detecting the detecting piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is attached to the part branched from the pay-out passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball-moving passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at a position where the ball-moving movable piece 592 closes the ball removing passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end downward, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Are formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to be formed, and extend vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in the rear view from the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched and on which the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached. A main-body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b when viewed from the rear. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward as viewed from the rear at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the back view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed by a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. This allows the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b to move to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are mounted coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view as viewed in rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted on the upper and lower ends of the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it can protrude into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreat outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can contact the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a bead on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592, becomes a ball removal movable piece 592. And flows down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facilities downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall.

  Also, when the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-passing passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is moved between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball-movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and the main body side guide can be used. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full spherical path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view is vertically extended.

  An upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with an open rear side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends rightward as viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the entire width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end of the upper surface in the front view. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side in a front view. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thus, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharging passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the front left, on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b have respective front end openings (downstream ends). Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, the lower full fill payout path 610b, and the lower ball emptying path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. Thus, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full fill payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the normal full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings.
Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 that is open upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portions 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and passes through the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game balls B paid out from the 580 stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B are upstream from the lower normal payout passage 610a. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B begin to flow down to the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate is dispensed. The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the state of the rising end position. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower portion of the rear surface of the body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a is mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position lower than the game board placement portion 501c, and forwards near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to swell from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. Thus, a sufficient space on the right rear side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, the front recess 621b for the space bulging forward is formed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, the enclosure 624 of a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the low frequency range, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the aperture of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thus, a sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball-pulling guiding unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that opens upward on the right side when viewed from the front downstream of the ball-pulling guiding unit 627 and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guiding unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In a state in which the ball guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream end opening of the lower ball discharge passage 610 c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the lower end guide portion 627 has the lower end. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is easy to secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover mounted on the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97).
The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball rental button 224 of the ball rental operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed such that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against illegal acts.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto.
The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a manner that the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the front is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, and depending on the rotation direction, the door frame. And a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the locking unit 650 urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by being engaged with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in front view, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame is slid downward, the plurality of hooks 653 for the outer frame move downward, and the outer frame 2 is moved relative to the main frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the gaming area 5a. This is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 and a game carried out by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The table unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate unit 2003; and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A large winning prize port 2005 is provided in which either one of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B can receive the game ball B.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in a front view and having two general winning openings 2001, and a start in a lower right corner in a front view in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in a front view and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005; A frame-shaped center mounted above the side unit 2200 and substantially in the center in front view in the game area 5a and slightly upward. Is provided with a thing 2500, the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the rear end of the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a at the left end in rear view, and an inside of the back box 3010. And a plurality of back production units 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 which connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out opening 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 penetrate the lower full tank. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and has the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponds to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 and is recessed upward from the lower end. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a through hole 1121 whose inside is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. It has.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below and the rear side in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling the content of the game and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 is provided with a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning port via a panel relay board 3031. The sensor 3001, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 99, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying a game state and a normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball B to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 made up of two LEDs and a normal hold display 1403 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port. A first special reserve number indicator 1405 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of game balls B to 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1406 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special reserved number display 1407 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 And

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 includes a round formed of five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005. A display 1408.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces 1602 protruding outward from the right side in front view. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c that are open on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is inserted. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front face of the panel board 1110, and a part of the rear end passes through the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality (four in this example) of general prize ports 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general prize ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, and a gate section 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate portion 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be received in accordance with either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower portion in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is arranged below the center in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1008 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a starting port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001 and a first starting port 2002; One side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 in front view and has two general winning openings 2001, and one side unit which is mounted on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in front view. An attacker unit 2400 having two general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached substantially at the center in the game area 5a. And a presentation effect unit 2600 attached to the center role 2500.

  The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large A special winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 102). In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a starting port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate unit 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port. And an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2005 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the game ball 2004.

  The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially at the center in front view, and slightly above, and the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided. It is attached to the front of The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. it can.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is positioned inside the frame. To prevent intrusion.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter, and a game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 can be released. There is provided a warp exit 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 in the left-right direction and then into the game area 5a after rolling.

  The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2503 is tilted so that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley) on the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front. The game balls B can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  When the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side and the upper side of the right side of the upper surface in the front view in the front view are formed with the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. An attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper right side of the center role 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B can pass through the gate unit 2003 with a high probability. In addition to this, the game ball B can be accepted with a large winning opening 2005 that is opened (open) with a high probability.

  Although not shown in detail, the presentation effect unit 2600 is based on a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations that can move and emit light, and can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect. The display effect unit 2600 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorations, and can present a variety of pattern effects to a player by appropriately combining them. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done.

  The game balls B received in the second starting port 2004 are sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and are discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first starting opening sensor for detecting a gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 attached to the rear end of the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a at the left end in rear view, and an inside of the back box 3010. Back production unit 3100.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed from the inside to the outside on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, and A cut-out portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the portion 3010b in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a big winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning port sensor 3001, This is for relaying the connection with the one starting port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

  Although the back production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations that can move and emit light, and can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect. The back effect unit 3100 can perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorations, and can present a variety of pattern effects to a player by appropriately combining them. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect image display on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although a detailed illustration of the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is omitted in FIG. 102, as shown in FIG. 154, the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly connected to the main control board 1310. The magnetic sensor 3003, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the starting opening solenoid 2404, and the attacker solenoid 2405 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 3031. Is also good. A detailed description of the control configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 153.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and an input / output device (I / O device). A main control I / O port, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a RAM built in the main control MPU And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for completely erasing information stored in the RAM. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting for detecting a game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a gaming ball B passing through the gate section 2003, and a gaming ball received in the special winning opening 2005. The detection signals from the special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting B, the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting improper magnetism in the game area 5a (hereinafter, referred to as a magnetic detection sensor 4024), and the like are respectively the main control I. Input via the / O port.

  The main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 by outputting a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals. From the main control I / O port, the status indicator 1401, the ordinary symbol indicator 1402, the ordinary reserve indicator 1403, the first special symbol indicator 1404, the first special reserved number indicator 1405, the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400. A drive signal is output to the symbol display 1406, the second special reserved number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning port sensor 2403. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are provided. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first startup port sensor 3002, the second startup port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is used. Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3001, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be described in detail later.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. To be described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and the firing that performs the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball tank 552, a tank rail for maintenance. 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port, or receives the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch input from the dispensing control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via a payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, that the game ball B bites between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number “3” is displayed, “Count (Specifically, the abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut off from anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, the message "ST. That is in click "(specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined payout non game ball B) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. Is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to the ball lending display unit 226 of the operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the above; a firing solenoid driving circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; And a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by a player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of the game ball B struck toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182 based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5. A game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or For transmitting a drive signal to the drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the like. Door-side drive light emission comprising side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is effected from the serial I / O port for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512 and outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front presentation unit 2600 and the back presentation unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. The detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 Monitors operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and performs various effects from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played according to. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal (eg, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal) as sound information. By transmitting a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  In addition, in the vibration speaker 354, similarly to the other speakers, the sound information that changes to vibration is extracted from the sound ROM based on the control data from the peripheral control MPU using the sound source IC, and used together with the push button effect. Is done. For example, the player presses the button !! displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the player presses the button !! sound generated from the speaker that generates the sound. At this time, the vibration speaker transmits the vibration of the vibrating speaker to the effect operation unit 301 by using the sound information that changes to vibration to the vibrating speaker with the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 facing the diaphragm. At this time, the player gets a feeling as if the effect operation unit 301 was shaking.

  Here, the vibration speaker 354 provides sound information to vibrate the staging operation unit 301, and provides sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, since the resonance depends on the characteristics of the vibrating speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibrating speaker is attached, and the mounting method, input sound information only at a specific frequency. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a certain width. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (swept) eight times in one cycle of each 1 Hz, approximately one second. This is intermittently repeated for one second sweep input and one second later input again.

As for the inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, a series of processes in the RAM clear process as shown in steps S16 to S36 of the flowchart in FIG. 125 is used, or the RAM clear process is triggered. I'm trying to do it.
In the gaming machine described in this embodiment, the information stored in the main control board 1310 and the information stored in the payout control board 633 when the power is turned off are stored and held in a similar manner.
Specifically, a capacitor for storing electric charge during energization is connected to a power supply terminal for the RAM incorporated in the CPU, and power is supplied by the electric charge stored in the capacitor when the power is cut off.

Here, when the gaming machine is shipped, sufficient power is not supplied, no charge is stored in the capacitor, and the RAM may be in an indeterminate state. Then, when power is supplied in a state where no electric charge is stored in the capacitor, the RAM is abnormal because the checksum value and the backup flag value recorded at the time of power-off do not exist as normal values. Is determined. In this case, the CPU clears the entire area of the RAM and transmits a RAM clear notification command to the sub-control board as a command related to a state at the time of power-on. Upon receiving the RAM clear notification sound command, the sub-control board repeats the notification regarding the RAM clear for a predetermined period, for example, 90 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the vibration speaker is confirmed using the RAM clear notification period.
When the push button is operated when the state of the sub-control board is in the RAM clear notification state, as described above, the CPU of the sub-control board performs a sine wave signal of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz (38 Hz to 42 Hz in each 1 Hz unit in units of 1 Hz). (Sweep) about eight times per second. This is intermittently performed by inputting a one-second sweep, then repeating the input after one second, and controlling the input to the vibration speaker for a predetermined period.

  In the first place, information is stored in the RAM as security in the event of a temporary power failure when the player is in an advantageous state, for example, during a big hit or during a probability change. Conversely, in order to maintain fairness among players in the event of a probability fluctuation state immediately before closing or when a situation occurs in which the player must stop playing in the probability fluctuation state due to the convenience of the player, A RAM clear function is provided as a function to set the state to the initial state. By pressing the RAM clear button when power is supplied, a series of processes in the RAM clear are executed even when it is determined that the RAM clear button is pressed. Therefore, even if the operation check of the vibration speaker is performed during the RAM clear notification period, the state of the sub-control board suddenly shifts to the operation check state of the vibration speaker unless the RAM is consciously cleared during normal business hours. Never.

The sound source IC (or built-in IC) of the gaming machine described in this embodiment has six sound output terminals to which speakers can be connected, and the sound set for each channel is mixed by the built-in mixer. Is output via the connected audio output terminal.
Here, the audio output terminal can be selectively set, and for the vibrating speaker, one of a plurality of audio output terminals is set as an audio output terminal dedicated to the vibrating speaker. ing.

In addition, since the sound signal of the normal speaker and the signal for vibration of the vibration speaker have the same form, a common sound source IC can be used for signal generation. However, since their functions and purposes are different, in order to avoid confusion between them, it is preferable to separate the audio output terminal used for audio from the audio output terminal used as a vibration source. With this setting, for example, when it is desired to uniformly reduce the volume at once, the volume adjustment can be collectively managed using a main volume or the like described later. Sound and vibration can be controlled separately so that control by the vibrating speaker generated at the same timing can be performed without being narrowed down at the same time.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. The system diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board of the game board 5, are a plurality of serial input commands different from the display command. This is performed by the output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. The lighting signal or the blinking signal is output to the LED of each decoration board provided in the game board 5.

  Further, the effect drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, the respective drive motors provided on the game board 5, and the like. Or output to

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP for displaying and controlling the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. Have.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect on the effect display device 1600. Control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be rendered on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM from the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is defined in advance.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs the extracted data to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to effect display device 1600. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP adopts a line buffer system. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. Output to the

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in 2 × 3 are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeatedly performs a main scan for setting a display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. And the sub-scan to be performed. When the rendering data for one line output from the rendering display control unit 1512 is input, the rendering display device 1600 sequentially performs one-line rendering from left to right as viewed from the front of the rendering display device 1600 as main scanning. Is output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the image is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the firing passage 1012 formed by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the firing rail 544 and the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the stronger the ball can be driven in the clockwise direction, the maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously played in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B is placed on the obstacle. , The falling velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B, so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the front view left side of the outermost surface of the center role 2500 from the highest portion, it contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). Flows down the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and moves forward from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valley on both the left and right sides of the top. Released. When the game ball B is released from the center top of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the top is located right above the first start port 2002, so that the top is located in the first start port 2002 with a high probability. . When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the game ball B rolling on the stage 2503 is discharged into the game area 5a from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game balls B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. May be accepted to the general winning opening 2001 or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or starting There is a possibility that the first start port 2002 of the mouth unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like may be accepted. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper portion of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-hand). Are discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the center role 2500. This portion is provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the closed second starting port is closed. 2004 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain period of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0). .01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. As the normal fluctuation time is shorter, the game ball B in which the "normal hit" is drawn in the gate unit 2003 can be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal lottery result is suggested, it is not possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of reserves of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if it is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without suspension. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”, A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” is performed, and the selected special lottery result is It suggests to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation period), and the lottery is performed by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Special lottery results include "losing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probable change (probability change)", "time saving (time reduction)", " Probably variable time saving " Per ", and the like.

  The special lottery results (first special lottery results and second special lottery results) drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are used as special lottery results for generating an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). Is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 is opened to be able to receive the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the special winning opening 2005 When one of the conditions of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern in which the game balls B cannot be received in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state where three pattern rows are arranged in the left and right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern row that is variably displayed is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the image sequence fluctuates and the final image is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, inhibit the rotation operation, and operate the operation button lifting drive motor. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, the luminous effect is produced by appropriately using each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the display effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, and the like. And a movable effect can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a correct operation is performed when a player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is a bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are storage trays of the present invention, and the directing operation in the directing operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the unit cover unit 310 correspond to the decorative body of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative part of the present embodiment. In the unit front cover 312, the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 corresponds to the second decorative portion of the present invention, and the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 and the lower plate center decorative substrate 316 of the present embodiment correspond to the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The effect operation ring decoration board 352, the center button decoration board 376, and the outer periphery button decoration board 377 in the embodiment are used as the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention. Corresponding to that.

[9. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is provided at a position lower than the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 that closes the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The plate unit 200 including the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 capable of storing the front plate is swelled forward, and the plate unit 200 has a front end having a length of about 約 with respect to the entire width of the door frame base 101. Is provided with an effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101, and a center press operation unit 303a concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310; A section 303b and a rotation operation section 302 are provided. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 having the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the upper surface below the door window 101a that allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a is opened. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the plate unit 200 (the effect operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and appeal to the player. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played. In addition, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly protruded forward below the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 must be moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. And the length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player places his hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his hand on the upper plate 201, the portion of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 that is hidden by the hand of the player is reduced. Therefore, when the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is illuminated and decorated by the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 is given to the player. Can be easily noticed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly protruded forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is provided. Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is illuminated and decorated by the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 according to the playing state, and the staging operation is performed. When the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, the light irradiates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 The player's line of sight is directed to the lower unit front cover 312 and the staging operation unit 301 by the luminous decoration of It is possible to, by directing the line of sight of the player downwards, can be difficult away within the game area 5a provided in the front from the player's field of vision, it is visible within the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second starting port 2004 or the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. Then, by making the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 emit light, the player is directed downward under the game area 5a. Changes in the body, etc. can surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the unit front cover 312 can be noticed by illuminating and decorating the unit front cover 312 in accordance with the game state, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area 5a in the gap. The luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate to the player that a chance has come (for example, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage). Thereby, a premium feeling can be given to the light-emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excitedly excited by whether or not the unit front cover 312 performs light-emitting decoration, and the player can enjoy the game. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the unit front cover 312 is greatly protruded forward, when the player tries to look at the entire unit front cover 312, he / she will look away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire game machine including the game area Is easy to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she has set one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310, which protrudes greatly forward, is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized, and the interest of the player is strongly attracted. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played with enhanced appeal to a player. Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both hands of the player can be easily extended forward, so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. For example, the operation of the handle 182 and the handling of the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 can be facilitated, so that it is difficult to apply stress to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, which are arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, have a semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulging outward. Since it is formed to extend in a semi-annular shape, a half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut is projected forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to a player, The player can play the game in a calm mood, and can dedicate the player to the game to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is hard to be injured even if the player touches at first glance It is possible to make the player aware that the game is safe, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by relieving the player.

  Further, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 projecting from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 are simultaneously illuminated and decorated, so that the plate unit 200 swelling forward below the door window 101a. Can be made to illuminate the whole, so that the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and strongly attract the interest of the player, and the whole luminous decoration does not have anything good for the player. In addition to being able to make the player think, the player's interest can be directed to the staging operation unit 301 to urge the player to operate the staging operation unit 301. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the dish upper decorative body 312a and the dish lower decorative body 312b are formed in a semi-donut shape, the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 can be used in accordance with the game state. When the entire decoration body 312a and the under-center decoration body 312b are illuminated, the luminous decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. When performing luminous decoration, for example, if luminous decoration is performed so that light flows from one side, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which light moves and rotates inside the donut to the player, so that the player Surprisingly, it is possible to think that there is something good, and the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is provided with the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312a. The player can be urged to rotate in the same direction in which the light of 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the player can see a light emission effect in which light moves up and down by alternately emitting and decorating the upper plate center decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b arranged vertically. At the same time, the light that moves up and down can prompt the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a. Accordingly, by appropriately illuminating and decorating the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the player is prompted to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 or to press the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the player can accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and entertainer-type effects can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 extends forward from the side (outside of the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. A side in which three side window decorative portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window decorative member 412 are arranged in the flat plate-shaped door frame right side unit 410 that is protruding at intervals in the vertical direction. The window 410a is formed, and in the normal state, since the LED of the decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window for emitting and decorating the decoration part 410b in the side window is off, the three side windows in the side window 410a are turned off. The player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side (the end of the island facility) of the pachinko machine 1 through the space between the inner decoration portions 410b. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest. Thereafter, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player can satisfactorily view the inside of the game area 5 a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3. In addition, the player can play the game in the game area 5a, and can enjoy the game for the player, and can know the current game state by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  At this time, in the door frame 3 whose left side with respect to the main body frame 4 is hingedly mounted by a hinge pin 122 above the door frame and a hinge pin 126 below the door frame, the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a in the left and right directions. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside far from the hinge axis, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame right side unit 410 includes the side window interior decoration part 410b. Can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, so that the entire player area 5a can be difficult to see from other players, as seen by other players. By making the player less likely to feel the game, the player can play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined game state, the LEDs in the side window decorative portion decorative board 413 cause the three side window decorative portions 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window decorative portions 410b to emit light. By making the inside of 410a dazzling, the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light can be radiated in a band shape and radially, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled, making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from between. In addition to the side window 410a, the light emission of the side window interior decoration portion 410b allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the side window interior decoration portion 410b. Visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the next to look inside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

  More specifically, in the gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of a chance for the player to be advantageous, the three side window decorative portions 410b emit light, and the glare causes The visibility through the window 410a is reduced. This makes it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to recognize that a chance has arrived at the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the other player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1. You can avoid discomfort, so if you get attention, you may feel discomfort because other players are worried that you can not concentrate on the game, or you may feel sickened by inducing mistakes Can be prevented, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from looking inside the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It is possible to entertain more and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the side window 410a, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. Also, since the three side window decorative portions 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window decorative portions 410b do not emit light, the opposite side of the side window 410a passes between the three side window decorative portions 410b. (In the game area 5a), a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. Without this, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily found.

  In addition, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window decorative portions 410b having a certain height emit light, a portion having the same height in the game area 5a is formed. Can be made difficult to be visually recognized by other players through the side window 410a, so that the specific side window decorative portion 410b of the three side window decorative portions 410b emits light in accordance with the game state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction in the game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from looking inside the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a game state such as the arrival of a chance, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It is possible to entertain more and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending forward long is provided with the side windows 410a penetrating left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, and the side windows 410a are turned off. In the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is kept visible, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a. From the end of the game area 5a, it is easy to find out that an illegal act is performed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side farther than the left side attached to the main body frame 4 rotatably from the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened by 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when performing operations such as maintenance and replacement of the game board 5 by opening the door frame 3, the door frame 3 can be hardly obstructed by opening the door frame 3 widely, thereby preventing deterioration in workability. can do.

  Further, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light in accordance with the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called “big hit” game) may occur. Depending on (expected value), the decorative portion 410b in the side window may be turned on or off. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, or the like, when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is made to emit light to make it difficult for other players to look through, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs. When the game is not performed (at the time of "losing"), it is possible to avoid an unpleasant atmosphere with other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is not turned on or off, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even in a state where it is easy for other players to look in (a "big hit"). ) Does not create an unpleasant atmosphere and can suppress a decrease in interest, and can also create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, thereby enhancing the interest of the player in the game. You can enjoy the game more.

  Furthermore, since the three side window decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called "big hit" game) may occur. Depending on the expected value), the three side window decorative portions 410b emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to both the upper and lower sides, etc.), and among the three side window decorative portions 410b. Or the specific side window interior decoration portion 410b may emit light. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, or the like, as the expected value becomes higher, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light in order from the bottom or from the top, and so on. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to be peeped at, and to suggest an expected value, thereby increasing the player's expectation of the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  The light emission modes of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b as described above include, in addition to light emission (lighting) and light off, a blinking pattern, a difference in light emission color, and a change in light emission color (for example, from a cold blue to a hot blue). A change in feeling to red, a change in blue-yellow red imitating a traffic light, etc.) or a change in brightness (brightness) may be achieved, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved. With the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, the decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

  From the above, conversely, during execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, and the like, the light emitting mode such as the presence or absence of light emission and the light emission pattern of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b provides an advantageous gaming state for the player. Can be suggested by the degree (expected value) of the likelihood of occurrence of the game, so that the player is excited depending on whether or not the three side window decorative portions 410b emit light during the performance of the effect. -It is possible to be excited, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 may allow the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to arbitrarily emit light or turn off the light. . Thus, for example, when a reach effect or a reach development effect, etc., when the possibility (in a so-called expected value) of an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous is low, the effect operation is performed. By operating the unit 301 to emit the light in the side window decoration unit 410b, it is possible to prevent the player from being peeped out by other players, so that the advantageous gaming state does not occur (when "losing"). In addition, it is possible to avoid an unpleasant atmosphere due to being seen by another player, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being performed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the decorative portion 410b in the side window does not emit light. (Or by turning off the side window decoration portion 410b), even if the player is peeped by another player, the advantageous game state occurs, and the unpleasant atmosphere is not generated, and the decrease in interest is reduced. In addition to being able to suppress, it is possible to make the atmosphere that other players are cheering on, so that the interest of the player in the game is enhanced and the game can be more enjoyed.

  Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the timing and the light emission mode of the three side window interior decoration units 410b may be set. With this, in the preset default state, the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped from other players is not set, so that some players feel uncomfortable by being peeped and have interest in the game. However, since it is possible to customize according to the player's preference by operating the staging operation unit 301, the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable and remove the ball. If the passage 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream cannot be flowed to the ball removal passage 580b by the movable ball removal piece 592. Then, the air continues to flow downstream of the payout passage 580a, and can be sent to the payout blade 589 through the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball removing lever 593 is raised (unlocked) to bring the ball removing movable piece 592 into a rotatable state (second state), the game balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream are dispensed. Instead of flowing to the downstream side of 580a, the ball passes through the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility side via the ball removal passage 580b. it can. Since the discharge blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the ball removal lever 593 makes the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable (first state) in a normal state. On the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a rosary.

  When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B upstream of the payout blade 589 flows downstream, and the ball movable piece 592 guides the game ball B to the payout blade 589 side. And the payout blade 589 pays out the game balls B one by one, so that the speed at which the game balls B flow upstream of the payout blade 589 becomes relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball-moving movable piece 592 due to the contact is relatively weak, and the opposite side of the ball-moving piece 592 in contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is provided. Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is not damaged. From this, it is possible to reduce the damage to the ball-moving movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the ball-moving movable piece 592 and giving the player discomfort. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, at the time of exchanging the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5) or performing maintenance, when ejecting the game balls B from the payout passage 580a, the ball ejection lever 593 is raised so that the ball ejection movable piece 592 can be rotated. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which has been in a state like a rosary on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592, flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly. As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed. Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facilities downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall.

  Also, when the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-passing passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is moved between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward. The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball-movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and the main body side guide can be used. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball passage 580b.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is opened and closed around an axis extending vertically on the left side with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The main body frame 4 that is attached so as to close the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 is closed, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial center) on the left side with respect to the main body frame 4. ), The door frame 3 attached to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) is closed, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 extend parallel to each other while facing each other. The payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like on the main body frame 4 side are connected to the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, and the like on the door frame 3 side. Connection cable The cable 503 extends from the portion of the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward on the front surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame 4 away from the axis to the shaft core side, and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. After being held by the guide main body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending in parallel with the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface thereof, the connection cable guide member 502 further extends to the vicinity of the axis, and then turns back and extends in the direction away from the axis to form the door. After being held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axis than the end of the connection cable guide member 502 in the frame 3, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side are attached. It is connected.

  When the door frame 3 that closes (closes) the front side of the body frame 4 is hinged about the axis on the left side so as to open from the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes Since the part of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves forward away from the main body frame 4 because the connection cable 503 moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) about the mounting shaft 502c away from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 with the deformation of the connection cable 503. As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axis protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are hardly obstructed.

  In other words, since the connecting cable guide member 502 has its distal end extending from the mounting shaft 502c that is rotatably mounted to the shaft center side, the base end of the guide member can be moved like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is extended in the direction away from the axis, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded portion of the connection cable 503 can be set as a position that is hardly obstructed.

  On the other hand, when closing the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4. Moves in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is not sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance, the maintenance can be performed smoothly, and the maintenance is interrupted. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the playing game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Also, the connection cable 503 that extends from the end of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the axis and then turns back and extends in the direction away from the axis is positioned closer to the axis than the end of the connection cable guide 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) becomes a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. A tangent line passing through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is smaller than an angle at which the connection cable guide member 502 intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3. The rear surface can be prevented from forming an angle close to a right angle. Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame is When closing 3, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the shaft center by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a.

  From these facts, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 does not close or the connection cable guide does not move. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality such that the end of the member 502 abuts on the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is disconnected. Therefore, when an abnormality that requires the door frame 3 to be opened and closed to perform maintenance occurs during the game, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and the maintenance can be performed. The game can be smoothly performed, the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. Thus, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the folding habit, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  In the door frame 3 opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (the axis is lower than the cable holder 103a). (A position close to the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 in the speaker duct 103) by which the connection cable 503 can be pressed toward the body frame 4 side on which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted. Which protrudes rearward on the side). Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, a tangent line passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and contacting a circle passing through the pressing portion about the central axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 The crossing angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Accordingly, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the connection cable guide member 502 is provided with the frame pieces 502b on the two long sides of the guide body 502a, the rigidity of the flat guide body 502a is increased and it is difficult to bend. In addition, the connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operation and effect can be reliably realized.

  Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is increased, even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 including many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated about the mounting shaft 502c, and the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more electric wires can be guided. As a result, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be centralized in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  In addition, with the connection cable 503 attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the through-holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503. By winding the cable guide member 502 and the binding band 504 together, the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 passing through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off from the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be securely held, and the connection cable 503 is caught between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by the connection cable 503 being detached from the connection cable guide member 502. Can be avoided, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the space on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is provided below the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection tube portion 43a. Since the space between the port member 47 and the connection tube portion 43a in the assembly 40 (the inner space 40a of the curtain plate) is communicated, the main frame speaker is formed by the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently ensured, heavy bass can be output from the main frame speaker 622, and the sound of the heavy bass can delight the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can be. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment concave portion 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume in the speaker unit 620a is reduced, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main frame speaker 622. Since it is possible, the main frame 4 can be provided with the cable mounting concave portion 501h which is recessed rearward below the main frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described operational effects can be mounted on the main frame 4 side. In addition, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is attached to the inside of the cable attachment recess 501h that is recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is housed in the cable attachment recess 501h, so that the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body of the main body frame 4 passes through the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion opening 501b of the frame base 501 can be visually recognized from the front (from the player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end in the longitudinal direction (lateral direction) of the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port is formed at the lower part of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end opposite to the member 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker unit 620a communicates with the front side of the body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the body frame 4 while covering the rear side of the body frame speaker 622. The internal space of the (speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection tube 43a of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. In this state, when the main frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622, such as sound, music, and sound effects, is output to the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. The light is radiated toward the player through the speaker port 621a and the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the sound output backward from the main frame speaker 622 passes through the connection portion 621c and the connection tube portion 43a and enters the interior of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. Is transmitted to the front player side from the port member 47. At this time, the space (enclosure 624) on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 is constituted by the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40. The volume can be made as large as possible, and a sound that is extended forward in the low range from the main frame speaker 622 can be output. Further, since the connection tubular portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (the speaker unit 620a ), The width in the depth direction (front-back direction) at the connection portion with the speaker unit 620a can be made larger than in the past, so that the width of the connection tube part 43a and the connection part 621c in the front-rear direction is increased. Attenuation of the sound from the space to the side of the curtain frame inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the bass range can be amplified and the phase can be inverted, and the port member 47 can be inverted. 47 can output a sound whose bass is amplified. The sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are synthesized, so that the sound volume is further increased. In addition, it is possible to make the player hear richer low-pitched sound, and to make the player enjoy sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is inverted at the port member 47 and radiated forward (constituting a so-called bass reflex speaker). If the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, their phases are the same, so that the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases. As compared with the case where the passive radiator is used, the sound output can be increased with a simple configuration.

Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion slot 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimension of the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be provided. Of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which the game is played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1.
For this reason, it is relatively easy to secure a space below the pachinko machine 1, so that it is lower than the game board insertion slot 501b in the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the main frame 4 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2. Since the vertical dimension on the side can be relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. In addition, it is possible to output a sound in which the bass is richer, to allow the player to enjoy the sound, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the connecting tube 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, simply closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 causes the connecting portion 621c to come into contact with the connecting tube 43a and to be mutually connected. It is possible to achieve the same operation and effect as described above, and there is no sliding resistance between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability during maintenance or the like.

  Furthermore, since the sealing member 48 seals the space between the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c. The pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board is relatively formed. The insertion slot 501b can be enlarged to provide a game board 5 having a wider game area 5a, and the wide game area 5a can make the player more entertained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by seeing, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the left and right direction in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Since the main frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated in the left and right direction, the sound output forward from the main frame speaker 622 and the sound output front from the port member 47 are separated by the outer frame. 2 (pachinko machine 1) and interfere with each other at a certain distance in front of the player, the sound can be amplified near the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and, as described above, You can hear rich low-pitched sound.

  Further, as described above, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 to the front is amplified by causing interference near the player and amplified. Unamplified sound will reach the player. Thereby, when a sound that indicates the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can hear a sound with a large volume and a rich bass, thereby increasing a sense of expectation for the game. Can be done. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player playing with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from the present pachinko machine 1, so that it is difficult to recognize that a chance or the like has been suggested in the present pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of another player peeping into the pachinko machine 1, thereby causing discomfort to the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 and lowering the interest. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the position of the connection tubular portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set at the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connection tubular portion 43a. Is located at the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be from the vicinity of the left end where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center. In FIG. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center therebetween. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, another member is disposed in a space secured on the opposite side to the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction therebetween, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction therebetween, the game balls B are discharged to the space. Base unit 620b including a ball guiding unit 627 and a discharged ball receiving unit 628 for the player, and a ball launcher 540 for driving a game ball B into a game area 5a of a game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4. , A power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of the game medium balls, and the like can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely be provided with them. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 bulging forward in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is played is provided with the central pressing operation part projecting upward from the upper surface. 303a, an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operation portion 303a and having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an annular rotating operation surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. Since the part 302 and the upper part of the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 are arranged in a state of being inclined such that the front end side of the upper surface becomes lower, The head (face) faces in a certain direction, and the center press operation unit 303a, the outer periphery press operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are easily conspicuous, and are arranged concentrically. The three large operation units (the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, giving a strong impact to the player, and the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to recognize at a glance that the operation unit is provided in a form clearly different from that of the first embodiment, and to differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines to strongly attract the player's interest. Can be. In addition, since the center pressing operation section 303a, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b, and the rotation operation section 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the player operates the center pressing operation section 303a, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b, and the rotation operation section 302 is performed. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player-participated effect, and to advance the game so as to be in a game state in which the player-participated effect is executed (here, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). ), And when the player participation type effect is executed, it is possible to make it easier to participate in the effect, so that the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are slightly protruded from the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 by a lifting mechanism including an operation button lifting drive motor 367 or the like in accordance with a game state. ) And a protruding position (elevated position) projecting upward from the retracted position, and in the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371. When the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted positions, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is not accepted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably press the center pressing operation section 303a, and to enjoy the player participation type effect, thereby reducing the interest. It is possible to control.

  Further, in the retracted position state, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is in a non-pressable state, so that there is an immovable outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b between the central pressing operation section 303a and the rotation operating section 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a to the momentum of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the momentum of pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a is performed. Can be made hard to occur, and it is possible to surely entertain the player-participation-type production and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Then, by moving to the protruding position, the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are greatly protruded upward on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, so that the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b can be made to stand out, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given to the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. It is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the game by assuming that the game may not be possible. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to participate in the player-participation-type effect in which the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b and the center pressing operation part 303a are pressed, and to suppress the decrease in interest by making the player-partitioning effect entertained.

  In the state of this protruding position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be newly pressed, and the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotating operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically. When the central pressing operation unit 303a has to be pressed, the outer pressing unit 303b is pressed, or both the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer pressing unit 303b are pressed, or When the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b must be pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are pressed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated or the rotation operation unit 302 needs to be rotated, the outer peripheral pressing operation is performed. Or accidentally pushes the section 303b, and an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a can be induced to or accidentally pressed. This allows the player to perform a pressing operation or a rotating operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed or the rotating operation unit 302 to be rotated when performing the pressing operation or the rotating operation. , It is possible to give a sense of tension to the pressing operation and the rotating operation, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to enjoy the player participation type performing the pressing operation and the rotating operation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of the player.

  Further, a notifying unit such as the vibration speaker 354 and the effect display device 1600 is provided, and in the player participation type effect, the player presses the center pressing operation in a protruding position where the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be pressed. If only the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b is pressed by mistake when the part 303a is to be pressed, the notification means notifies the user that the center pressing operation part 303a is to be pressed, so that the pressing operation is performed again to perform the pressing operation. The center pressing operation section 303a to be pressed can be reliably pressed, and the player can enjoy the player participation type effect, and the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected, so that the player is damaged by a mistake. It is possible to avoid a feeling of mood, and to enjoy a player-participatory effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the player is supposed that he / she is correctly performing the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a, the reaction (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a. Is different from desired, and if the center pressing operation unit 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion and the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notifying means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, the belief of the player can be corrected, and the center pressing operation section 303a can be correctly pressed to perform the player participation. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate 201 and a lower plate for storing a game ball B for swelling forward and in front of and below a game area 5a of a game board 5 where a game is played. An annular rotation operation unit 302 having an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside and rotatable around an vertically extending axis; A pressing operation unit 303 composed of a center pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is arranged at the same time, and the rotation operation unit 302 is changed according to a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a. Is performed by the peripheral control board 1510 in which the player performs a rotary operation or presses the pressing operation unit 303. Then, when the player participation type effect is performed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303 to perform the rotation operation or the pressing operation. Since the effect changes, the player can participate in the effect, entertaining the player, and suppressing a decrease in interest. When rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the player touches any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface that is exposed to the outside, and performs the operation. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is touched and rotated, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface to be rubbed in one direction by a player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at a high speed is executed, as described above, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed. , The effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be tired at an early stage. A player-participatory effect in which the operation unit 302 is rotated can be continuously enjoyed, and a decrease in interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or rotated with a light force, in the player participation type effect, various rotation operations are requested to the player, It is possible to request different rotation operations in each of them, and it is possible to present more diverse and diverse player participation-type effects to the player, and it is difficult for the player to be bored, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (configured by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337) that the player touches and rotates is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes in an arc shape outward (in the direction opposite to the rotation center) from the rotating base 332, even if the rotating operation is performed to rub the outer peripheral side surface, the plate unit 200 does not interfere. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than right beside the rotation operation unit 302 (a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis). When rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the player can operate the rotary operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the external side surface. It can be, it is possible to enhance the operability of the rotation operating part 302. Therefore, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type effect. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, the rotation operation at a small rotation angle can be easily performed and the rotation operation can be easily performed as compared with a rotation operation unit having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. In this case, it is possible to make the player more aware that the rotary operation unit 302 is being rotated, and the rotation operation unit is used in the player participation type effect. The rotation operation of 302 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape. The player can touch and rotate a part such as the inner side surface or the like according to the preference or situation of the player, so that the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be performed. It is possible to make the participation-type production more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, even if the rotation operation unit 302 includes the pressing operation unit 303 in the ring, The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 comfortably, so that both the rotation operation and the pressing operation can be sufficiently enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped by the player. The appearance of the part 302 can be completely different from the appearance of a steering wheel of an automobile, a control stick of an airplane, or the like. Thus, for example, when the rotary operation unit is configured as a steering wheel of an automobile, it is assumed that the player operates the rotary operation unit at the moment the player sees the rotary operation unit. Because only operations such as handle judgment can be performed, when a player participation type production that requires various rotation operations is executed, a rotation operation different from the handle judgment cannot be performed, and a player participation type production can be performed. There is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced because the user cannot enjoy the game. However, in the present embodiment, the appearance of the rotary operation unit 302 is completely different from that of a steering wheel of an automobile, a control stick of an airplane, or the like. Can be wiped off, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated as desired by the player, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, since the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotary operating unit 302 are exposed to the outside, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotary operating unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not interfere, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated comfortably, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate for storing a game ball B for swelling forward and playing the game forward and below the game area 5a where the game is played on the game board 5. On the upper surface of the plate unit 200 provided with the rotary unit 202, an annular rotary operation unit 302 whose rotation axis extends vertically, and a central pressing operation unit 303 a and an outer circumference pressing operation unit 303 b in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates about the axis of rotation, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 rotate the transmission detection gear member 34. To the sense rotation by detecting the detecting piece 345b, it is possible to detect a rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, there is no need to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference. Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion (the operation ring transmission gear 350) for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345. Is only a part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space below the rotation operation unit 302, and to produce an effect in which a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. The operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be arranged.
Then, in accordance with the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the rendering operation ring decorative board The entirety of the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 can be sufficiently (uniformly) light-embellished by appropriately emitting the plurality of LEDs 352. Thus, the rotary operation unit 302 can be made to stand out, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

  Further, since the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 At the same direction and at the same speed, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 can be sequentially lit (lighted on / off). As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific portions of the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 are decorated with light emission. It is possible to give an illusion that an LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to enjoy rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 and suppress a decrease in interest. Alternatively, when performing a player participation type effect requesting a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 in accordance with a game state, the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to entertain the player-participatory effect and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The plurality of LEDs can be sequentially turned on so as to have the same rotation speed as the rotation operation unit 302. This allows the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate together with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain portion of the rotation operation unit 302 emits light, even though the player is performing the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the luminous decoration, and to think that there is something good for the player. As a result, the sense of expectation for the game can be raised, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are sequentially emitted, and the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the circular rotary operation unit 302 is for performing a rotary operation, and to facilitate the participation of the player when the player participation type effect is executed. In addition to this, it is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is mounted rotatably around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation detection gear member 345 is rotated. The transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the configuration related to the rotation operation unit 302 in the plate unit 200 (the production operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340). , The diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be made more conspicuous to attract the player's interest.

  Further, an operation ring drive motor 342 for driving the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 in accordance with the game state is provided. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated around according to the game state, By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out below and in front of the game area 5a, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation is performed. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be reduced. . Alternatively, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, and the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be increased. Can be heavier. Further, in response to the rotation operation by the player, by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342 at every predetermined rotation angle, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed. Click feeling can be imparted.
Further, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 reciprocally within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated. As described above, since various operation feelings can be given to the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to cope with a wider variety of player participation-type effects, so that a variety of effects can be applied to the game. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, since the operation operation ring decoration substrate 352 is provided, when giving the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the operation operation ring decoration substrate 352 are set in the same manner as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in the direction or emitting light sequentially in the direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operation feeling can be assisted by light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, a space below the rotary operation unit 302 is easily secured, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be more uniformly and brightly illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376 cause the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a to emit light and decorate in a favorable state, respectively. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light, only the rotation operation unit 302 can be illuminated and decorated, only the pressing operation unit 303 can be illuminated and decorated, only the center pressing operation unit 303a can be illuminated, and the outer periphery pressing operation can be performed. Only the part 303b can be illuminated and decorated, so that the player can easily recognize the operation part desired to be operated, and can enjoy the player participation type effect.

  In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, by emitting them sequentially, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light is turned. An effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the effect by the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b can be performed. Specifically, for example, when prompting the player to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are sequentially lit, respectively. , To perform luminous decoration in which light is rotated in two rows. Alternatively, while the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 also rotates the light in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, On the other hand, when it is desired to prompt the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the opposite direction, the LED on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 performs light emission decoration such as rotating the light in the opposite direction. In this way, the effect of various light emission can be shown to the player, so that the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a rendering operation ring decoration board 352, an outer circumference button decoration board 377, and a center button decoration board 376 for emitting and decorating the rotary operation section 302, the outer circumference pressing operation section 303b, and the center pressing operation section 303a, respectively, are arranged concentrically. For example, the rotation operation unit 302 may emit light in the order of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the center button decoration substrate 376, or emit light in the reverse order. It is possible to show an effect of light that concentrates on the center pressing operation unit 303a from the center and an effect of light that diffuses from the center pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, a variety of light-emitting decorations can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be directed to the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302. Thus, the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 can be promoted, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front face of the main body frame 4 is opened and closed. On the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3, which is closed as much as possible, a door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is formed, and a glass unit 160 having a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window. The upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 which are attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the door 101a and store game balls B for playing a game below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. Is mounted.

  On the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a cylindrical shape arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the pressing operation portion 303 including a columnar central pressing operation portion 303a are attached, and a semicircular donut shape similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. And two large upper plate center decorations 312a and lower center plate decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other and connected to both ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a and lower center plate decoration 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame Door frame top decorative body 453 of Puyunitto 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Accordingly, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two upper plate center decorations 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous, and can be operated by a player. The rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby increasing the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b have a donut shape in which a similar cylindrical shape (tube) is formed in an annular shape, and are provided below the rotary operation unit 302. The left side decorative body 404, the right side decorative body 419, and the top decorative body 453 of the semi-cylindrical door frame surround the outer circumference of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the upper plate center decorative body 312a. Therefore, a decoration in which the outer periphery of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube can be shown to the player, and a sense of unity can be given to the decoration on the front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 The appearance can be improved, and the interest of the player can be directed to the inside (the game area 5a and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. Determined force can be enhanced, it is possible to easily this pachinko machine 1 is selected let increase the expectation as a pachinko machine for a game on the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by operating the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower center decoration 312b is larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Further, since the rotary operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape having a circular column shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, and the like of the rotary operation unit 302 are compared with a flat disk shape. Since the fingers are easily applied, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as desired by the player. In addition, since the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, it is possible to place an arm or put a finger on the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. And the presence of the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b protruding forward from the rotary operation unit 302 can prevent the player from being too close to the rotary operation unit 302. Thus, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotary operation unit 302 in which an arm or a finger moves for a player to operate, thereby improving the operability of the rotary operation unit 302. Can. As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, it is possible to make the player think of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player A participatory effect can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between a retreat position (down position) and a protruding position (up position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the pressing operation unit 303 projects greatly above the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 may appear larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to strongly attract the player's attention, and to increase the sense of expectation for the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Also, when the pressing operation unit 303 is at the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's interest is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is more conspicuous than the rotating operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by moving the pressing operation unit 303 between the descending position and the ascending position in accordance with the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the effect operation unit 301 to be operated by the player is prompted. Thus, the player can accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to enjoy the player participation type effect.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is at the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a have the same height, and the rotation operation is performed. When the pressing unit 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a protrude upward from the rotary operating unit 302. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a become operable. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately use the staging operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player in accordance with the contents of the player participation type staging, thereby enabling a variety of stagings to be supported and allowing the player to enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the effect operation ring decorative board 352, the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decorative of the door frame right side unit 410 Since the substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided, the rotary operation unit 302 and the dish center upper decorative body 312 a are provided. The decoration of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole is improved by illuminating the decoration below the center of the dish 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal by attracting the player's attention. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light as appropriate. By decorating, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from within the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or from the effect operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. Depending on the state, it is possible to cause the player to operate the staging operation unit 301 or to play a game in the game area 5a, so that it is difficult for the player to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, even when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end in a state where the pressing operation section 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b does not occur. Although not detected is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be detected. Thus, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different effects, or when the outer pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the center pressing operating unit 303a is prompted. It is possible to perform a more versatile player participation type effect, and entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the above embodiment, when the pressing operation unit 303 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the rising position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the moving unit moves to the descending position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after slightly moving from the raised position.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotating unit 302 is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 bulging forward. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the arrangement, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the plate unit. This also allows the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the speaker unit 620a that is communicated with the curtain plate inner space 40a (port member 47) via the connection tubular portion 43a is provided in the main body frame 4, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 102, FIG. 154, and FIGS. FIGS. 102 and 154 are block diagrams of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102, and FIG. 104 is a connection terminal for a game ball rental device for relaying electrical connection between a payout control board constituting a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 154, FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 107 is a liquid crystal display control. FIG. 5 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a section.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect display device related to the effect display is not provided on the door frame 3. However, in the following description, apart from the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, the door frame 3 may be provided with a door frame side effect display device 460 (see FIG. 107) related to the effect display. Next, a description will be given assuming that the control configuration is adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on, and performs a game operation. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring the sign of a power failure.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 32767 is set as the minimum value in advance in this embodiment), The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a). Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly duplicated based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are transmitted to the various input terminals. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function without a reset terminal and having no reset function And is composed of The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, and the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on the output is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  FIG. 99 shows a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and the like. A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Also, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 99, a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic sensor 3003 attached to the game board 5 to detect cheating using a magnet is transmitted to a predetermined input of a main control MPU 1310a via a panel relay board 3031 attached to the game board 5 and a main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port based on a detection signal from each of these switches, so that a main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. A control signal is output from 1310ca to a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 3031, and a predetermined output port thereof. A drive signal is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the first special symbol display 1404 from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca via the panel relay board 3031 and the function display unit 1400. A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1406, the first special reservation number display 1405, the second special reservation number display 1407, the ordinary symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1408. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) relating to the game to the board 633 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main circuit with a reset function is output. For example, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the special winning port sensor 2403. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403. In contrast, detection by the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 and 2012 where game balls do not frequently enter. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb from an output terminal of the predetermined serial output port, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 633 as serial data. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 633.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a mainly includes a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects to the bus 1310ah. It is connected to the circuit (see FIG. 112). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. 112). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 108). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power-on. Is output from the payout control board 633, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (Cleared).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, a payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls and the like, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that also serves various functions, and a state of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. Error LED indicator 860b. An operation switch 954 also having a function as a RAM clear switch is a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. ) Is output as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 103, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out a game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a drive signal to be output to a payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. For exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit 6. It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the.
The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program converts various types of game-related information (game information) and various types of payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 into a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b as serial data of the serial system as a signal (command transmitting means).
The payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process was executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process was executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated by operating the operation switch 954, and output of warning information according to the error is stopped (error canceling control unit).

  When a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command). When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). At the same time, when a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input.
In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches, which are input to the various input terminals, by the dispensing control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The dispensing control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and dispensing control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function. And is composed of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a later-described dispensing control system reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on the output is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  A ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the running out of game balls in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting game balls emitted from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 580. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the interface.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 630 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The dispensing control MPU 952a receives various commands related to dispensing from the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data system, or receives an operation signal (detection) ) Is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data is completed, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

  The dispensing control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, thereby performing the dispensing control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.

  When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, so that the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, output a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 584, and output the status of the pachinko machine 1 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port to an error LED display. By outputting a drive signal to be displayed on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is output to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 580), and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 580, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance, and the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. Is informed) and the number When "3" is displayed, it is notified that "the payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 is abnormal based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), When the number “5” is displayed, it is notified that “retry error” has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number “6” is displayed. If the game ball is full, it is determined that the game space in which the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is full. Informing, when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR not connected" (that the electrical connection is cut off from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it is "stock in stock (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present)" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls). Number has been reached).

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game room (a hall). ), The number of game balls and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there is an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal plate 784 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down. The main computer 1310 that progresses the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 633 that controls payout and the like are provided. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via 869.
The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 via the game ball renting device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. The payment control MPU 952a is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of lent game balls, and transmits a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball return display unit to the game ball or the like. It is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending display section is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. I have.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 108) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. I have. The payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is turned off by the capacitor BC1 in the power-off processing. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, the operation signal is transmitted to the predetermined information of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental devices such as gaming balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 633a and the CR unit 6, and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the game device rental terminal connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 633, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (Accurately, the connection terminal plate 869 for a game ball or the like rental device is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , CR unit 6 and game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and main door relay is performed. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected.) Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 633, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. Each wiring (harness) is electrically connected between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the board with the connection terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like and the frequency display board 365. In addition, AC 24 V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game device rental terminal connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) and the ground voltage LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 633 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch is positioned at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. Is mounted, and a ball return display unit, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via a ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  The ball lending display section has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicators are sequentially driven by one digit at a time. Are controlled to be turned on. By such lighting control, the ball rental display unit displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6, or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending display unit displays digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment display of the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (seven signals in total) for designating the content to be lit and displayed are provided from the CR unit 6 to a connection terminal plate 869 for a rental device such as a game ball and a relay terminal plate for a main door. 880, the one-digit segment display is sequentially lit according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G. Can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363.

  Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending display unit. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the connection terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like and the relay terminal board 880 for the main door. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL via a CR unit lamp 365d, a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the like. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from 24 V AC supplied from the power supply board 630 by a built-in voltage generation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be loaned in one payout operation (in the present embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen). Is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. And a signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the lent ball is possible or impossible is output to the CR unit 6 through the terminal PRDY. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the clerk of the hall or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that a game ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for 200 yen in total are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of paid out game balls as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 630]
Next, the power supply board 630 will be briefly described. The power supply board 630 includes a power supply switch 934 that can be electrically connected to or cut off from 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from a pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. And a launch control unit 633b for performing launch control by the launch solenoid 542 of the hit ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and controlling the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 operates the power switch 934 to rectify 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor improving circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182, and a palm on the handle 182. And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not a finger is being touched, and a single-button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launching (firing) a game ball according to the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the firing control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal notifying the fact via the payout control board 633. .

  The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (firing) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189, and outputs the current to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. In addition, control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 performs an effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 19. A peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450 and drawing control of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sound such as music and sound effects from the 573, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, “RTC”) that stores calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second. The control unit 4165 and the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are turned by the knob. Operation and a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511 a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various kinds of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and various light emission modes such as various LEDs) which are continued across the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a blank signal is input. Manage schedule data that defines Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ), And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c cannot hold the stored contents only for a time period in which the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 630, no backup power is supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can't keep it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, Motor output data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the rendering operation unit 400. Are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and are input to the serial I / O port for effect operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and the system runs out of control using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. Diagnose whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I, with the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as a center. / Peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak are read and written various data via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d; A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between the I / O port 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ＤＭＡDMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading from and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The input / output devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board, a serial I / O port for a motor driving board, a frame decoration driving amplifier board, a motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a production I / O information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output.
This LED is a high-luminance white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Thus, noise countermeasures can be taken with respect to the lighting control of the LED, which is meaningful in the game. It should be noted that the lighting control of the LED is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is adjusted. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of an occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an improper behavior with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and a content related to a game effect are notified. (For example, to render the screen displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 as more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effect from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing a wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the wrongdoing of the player by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, In addition to music and sound effects, it is possible to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 or to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for designating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read out and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or may be used when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the brightness of the game board effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is obtained based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Thus, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board-side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the setting information being 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further added by 5%, and the game board side is turned on. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power supply of the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired for the 75%. The backlight of the game board effect display 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores, among the various types of information updated by the execution of various control programs, the information to be backed up exclusively for backup. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing a copy of various control programs stored therein, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. And a control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copied data, and backup non-management for exclusively storing, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, those not to be backed up. A target work area 1511cf is provided.

  Note that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and is cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. Regarding the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 143) starts RAM clearing. (For example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described below. ) Is backed up as a backup target, and effect information (1 ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information. Subsequent “0” means that the storage area is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In other words, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank0”, “Bank1”, where the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4” (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored in the storage area. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (for an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, while other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies is set. ai includes various kinds of information (for example, the effect of the operation operation) of acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data. Direction with peripheral control board 1510 based on LOCKN signal to be described later, which is output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired abnormality frequency and abnormality occurrence state between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor-drive-board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  When the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. You. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf includes a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. −DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door decoration is performed in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed is set. The processing proceeds on the basis of this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. In some cases, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms) which is the content copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated as the effect backup information (1ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511 cc is managed as one page, with one pair of Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511 cc is a pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and a pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), for a total of two pairs. This area is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d include a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to a momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 122). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 103 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Also, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit game state) Etc.), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is used for effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is Subsequent “0” means that the storage area is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4" provided in an area from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , And “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with one pair of two banks as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at a high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing this pair as one page, with the Bank1 (SRAM) and the Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and the backup second area. An area 1511dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
As shown in FIG. 105, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 which performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source, and various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data on the screens displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data. The audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting toward the decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that is disposed near the lower part of the device 460 and transmits to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511. A signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the differential circuit 1512e for differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal, and a signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f for circuit connection. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b includes, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and volume adjustment icon In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, etc., the body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 can be viewed from the player, the display of the service mode screen Break used to display service mode screen image data and break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. According to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source is incorporated. Output to VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, transmits the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, one by one from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound instruction data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. According to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the first sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in VRAM”) is also provided. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay. The effect display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board effect display device 1600 are Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is, as described above, the peripheral data. Since the control board 1510 is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1, the V-by-One ( (Registered trademark) ", the system is less affected by noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial type differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel type interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to effect display drive board 4450. The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the gaming board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, which is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 for one screen (1). Frame data) on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and the door frame side Image data for effect display device 460 is shown from channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to rendering data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 in the built-in VRAM. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then (transmit), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Further, even in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a system in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel numbers. An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 to a store clerk or the like are adjusted. Subvolume values are included.
Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the sound is amplified to a master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, and the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is increased. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually compared with the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the Volume control button set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound built into the track And the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound becomes the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It amplifies to the master volume value, serializes the amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, in the case where the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of outputting the notification sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 to a store clerk or the like will be briefly described. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound Is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually converted to the speaker 921. And a master volume value, which is a volume that flows from the upper speaker 573, and serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound to produce audio data. And outputs the audio data transmission IC1512c as.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows actually from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the production sound progressing in accordance with the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the production operation unit 400). If the setting is shifted to the setting mode by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to inform the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the silenced production sound proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data. When the sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing, but proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed after the notification sound started flowing. It starts to flow again from.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 107, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw in the game board side character data to be drawn in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. , And various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into a positive signal and a negative signal as serial data of a differential system, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and as differential serial data in which left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for directing door frame side]
As shown in FIG. 107, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the interface based on the parallel system is used for the channel CH2.
The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , Green video signal, and blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, that is, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to distinguish, the lower two bits that are output from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a and contain the weak color information are invalidated.

  Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Are input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs three image signals of a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. A signal and a clock signal are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and only one differential pair cable is used. These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600 is provided. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door. Since the signal is output (transmitted) to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the path from the channel CH2 to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side (No. Since the length of the wiring required for the second path is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite side of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. On the side of the main frame 4, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, in addition to the payout device 580, the game balls paid out by the payout device 580 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 and the upper plate 321 is provided on the closed side of the main body frame 4. A full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching out the paid game balls to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is provided.

  Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, there is provided a payout unit 560 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized unit of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 580, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 630, and the like. In addition to the noise due to the driving of the payout motor 584 provided in the payout device 580, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise due to the electrostatic discharge by the game balls, and the like. In an environment that receives noise and the like that has entered the vehicle.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the product of "Thine Electronics Co., Ltd." By adopting the differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less affected by noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. Is not a parallel line provided simply in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a brief description will be given of a case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the electronics for the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are provided by THine Electronics. Even if a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise by adopting a differential communication method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., such a hardware-based configuration alone causes an electrostatic discharge of a game ball. When serial data in the parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko machine where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. For effect on the door frame side provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) at the time of reception by the transceiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The frame data is received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as disturbed data different from the normal data, and in the display area of the door frame-side effect display device 460, an image such as a so-called sandstorm is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The directing transmitter IC 1512d employs a differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise. In addition to such a hardware configuration, A twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. Thus, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by the noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display controller 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 In the connection between the two, ie, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally formed, but a separately assembled one is used to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Accordingly, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the main frame 4 so that the maintenance of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed. When the abnormality that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be eliminated, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the abnormal door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side are provided. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs the differential communication “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Was adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver. More specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive. Each of the substrates and the substrate 4450 is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while each of power supply wires and other wires for transmitting various signals is electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided. A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates, such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on these relay terminal plates is formed on these relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of a signal for transmitting serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is reduced. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red, the other is gray, the power supply wires of the harness are red, and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes a LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In the differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state. During the operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Are transmitted as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred between the connections, ie, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection to transmit the two signals, When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Have been. Accordingly, when two signals that have been differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to be transmitted so that the two signals are transmitted. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit connection is performed so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a period of displaying the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on on the gaming board effect display device 1600, or performing a demonstration by the gaming board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and converts various serialized signals. And a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the signal to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Upon receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) for notifying the drawing data to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , And outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying the predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal and outputs the image to the gaming board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

  In addition, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Then, the signal is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the control unit. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the plate unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that an abnormality has not occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "An abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device." Please call the clerk.)) And control the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to display the game board side effect. In addition to outputting to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, a notification sound (for example, "there is an abnormality in the upper-panel liquid crystal display device.") Is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. A notification sound flows from a speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the RTC control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying the year, month, and day and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds is configured around an RTC 4165a.
The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in the present embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RAM 4165aa with a built-in RTC. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the above-described peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets the acquired calendar information and time information in the acquired calendar information and time information. The effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the LED luminance setting information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by the PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker.
In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture which is the hour, minute and second.

  As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. Sometimes, it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. The calendar information and the time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is desired. Or the brightness of the image. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the game board effect is displayed. The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and sets the calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if June has already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5% which is the correction information obtained for. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information obtained by the correction. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the peripheral date and time described later. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current date and time may be specified.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 1510a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a store clerk or the like of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect (E.g., a screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 as a more powerful one, or a notification that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, or the like). Etc.) also flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, so that the sound from the muffling starts. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effect from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing a wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the wrongdoing of the player by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is directed as a more powerful one, and is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. I have. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the volume of the music and the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the case where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 are performed. And the method of adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation to increase or decrease the value of the board volume to adjust the volume of music or sound effects. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the clerk of the hall can turn the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. However, the sound volume adjusted by the hall clerk may be small for the player and difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or may be large for the player and feel loud with the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the user operates the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, enters a waiting state for customers, and performs a demonstration using the game board effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the effect sound to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult to hear the music and the effect sound because the clerk of the hall feels the volume adjusted to be small, the effect operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired volume. If the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall feels loud and the music and sound effects are loud, the production operation unit By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined time, and a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. Thereby, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game previously feels that the adjusted volume is low and it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effects, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player playing the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the player who has been playing feels loudly at the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud about the music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and performs the game this time can use the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 or the like. The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 630 will be described, and then power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 630]
The power supply board 630 is electrically connected to a power cord, and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 630, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the power supply board 630 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 633b. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that generates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The unit 633b is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 542 of the hit ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the connection terminal board 869 for a rental device for game balls or the like via the power supply board 630, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the rectified power to the power factor improving circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies the DC + 37V to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple to smooth the + 37V and supplies the resulting signal to the emission control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the emission control unit 633b.

  Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU 952a of payout control section 633a in payout control board 633. Backup power to the supplied RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 633b uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball at a launching strength (firing strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 182, as shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the sphere feeder 542 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 542, the ball feed unit 250 outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145, thereby controlling the ball feed unit 250. The ball sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d supplies a direct current + 5V (+ 5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+ 5V"), a + 12V direct current (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 12V") and a direct current from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is generated and supplied to the payout control board 633 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is a + 5V power line, the power system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is a + 12V power line, and the power system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is a + 24V power line.

  The + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 633 as described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 633 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The + 5V generation circuit 1310g generates + 5V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 633. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633 and is discharged. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 633. That is, +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the discharge control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. The current flows toward the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electric connection method of + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630, and returns to the power supply board 630 from the payout control board 633 and again from the payout control board 633. Is supplied and can be charged. Thus, when the + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. , And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g allows a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward directed by the diode MD0, the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, The current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by supplying + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. You can do it. As a result, the + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V generation circuit 1310g can generate + 5V. When the charge is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 as the main VBB. Although the current is interrupted by MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 108, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power source board 630 are supplied to the payout control board 633, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and + 12V are output. The two kinds of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply board 630 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral voltage is supplied through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 109A, the three kinds of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are used as the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a.
The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter, referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board effect display 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to a backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V generation circuit 194a that generates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. In addition to + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates and the like of the door frame 3.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-panel-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates + 3.3V from + 12V. The + 3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. And the door frame side effect display device 460. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this + 5V.
The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, a payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a.
+ 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used at all in the payout control board 633.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. The + 5V generating circuit 1310g receives + 12V from the power supply substrate 630 via the payout control substrate 633, and generates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. With such a circuit configuration, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V power supply line of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from the + 5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. + 12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and + 24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 630 via the payout control substrate 633, and monitors the signs of the + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a power failure or a momentary power failure at + 12V and + 24V. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 633. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the data is input to a decorative board or the like of the door frame via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, and applies the voltage to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Circuit of main control board]
Next, a circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 112 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 108 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid driving circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control circuit 1310g shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 110, in addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), thereby first removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage). And smoothed.

  The + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). , The ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 has a power outage or a momentary power outage at a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing a ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and has one end grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, +5 V from which a noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, the + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V generation is performed. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is interrupted by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in FIG.
The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the capacitance of this capacitor MC5 sets the delay time by the delay circuit. You can do it. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is smaller than the threshold value while the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing a ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected at one end to the other end of the capacitor MC8 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A, B, C, and ST in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the output terminal F by applying + 5V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND). It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b includes the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the RAM (built-in control built-in RAM) incorporated in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 and the main control of the main control board 1310 are controlled within a predetermined period from the power-on, as described above. The operation is performed when the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from power-on, and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on). And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have a function of canceling an error of the payout control board 633, if an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control board 1310 The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control board 1310. HI is input from the payout control board 633 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 110, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 10A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  A circuit for outputting an operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 633 is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and transmits an operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control substrate 633 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW when the operation switch 954 is not operated, while the operation switch 954 is operated. In this case, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  The circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a must instruct that the RAM to clear the information stored in the main control built-in RAM be cleared. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal which is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform a RAM clear for deleting information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 633. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the effect of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using the voltage of + 12V. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2402, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are shifted to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and the gate sensor 2401, which are input through the panel relay board 3031 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input to 1310, it is pulled up to + 12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two kinds of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and the + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors + 12V and + 24V signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when detecting a power failure or a momentary power failure sign, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. 633 to the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, monitoring of +12 V power failure or momentary power failure, and output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 111, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal, which is a reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is a cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set) serving as a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , +12 V and the reference voltage Vref. The third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V, and the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring terminal V2 of +12 V is applied to a fifth terminal, which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to a sixth terminal, which is a minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. A third terminal, which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line, as shown in FIG. The other end of the resistor MR22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, and the other end of the resistor MR21, MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21, is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage starts to fall from + 24V when + 24V fails or momentarily stops. In this case, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 has a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12 V is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 111, a fifth terminal which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and one end. The other end of the resistor MR25, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the resistor MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21, is divided by +12 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47 V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of + 12V starts to fall from + 12V when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. , The monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

  When the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure notice signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal). On the other hand, when the signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured such that when a signal whose logic becomes HI is inputted to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic of the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is LOW. Is input, the state where the signal whose logic is set to HI is output from the output terminal 1Q is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is a negative logic). The state of output from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal as the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal are each grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal is connected to the 1CK terminal as the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal as the D input terminal is stored, and is not output from the 1Q terminal as the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 supplies a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, for monitoring the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary interruption, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal for inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The power failure clear signal is output after the main control side MPU 1310a performs power-on processing to be described later and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal PR terminal is inverted and the output terminal is inverted. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The function-less main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 633, and also outputs a peripheral power failure notice signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

  As shown in FIG. 111, a main control input circuit 1310b for electrically connecting the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed through the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  A circuit including the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from a 1Q terminal that is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as a payout power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and is connected to the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Also, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). (Harness) is electrically connected to the payout control board 633. Note that, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness), the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the subsequent transistor MTR22 is a subsequent switching circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from a 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the preceding transistor is turned off. The MTR21 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The first-stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the first-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the second-stage transistor MTR22, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 633.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. By being input, the preceding transistor MTR21 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is reduced to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, whereby the latter transistor MTR22 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). The payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 633.

As shown in FIG. 111, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 105, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit including the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board. 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310b for transmitting a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the control circuit 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, has one transistor, and a power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral. While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 633. Main control without reset function to output as power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage. The logic of the payout power failure notification signal is based on the logic of the power failure notification signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure notification signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. And is different from the logic of the power failure notice signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 having one end electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is also connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected to the payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a at 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of Through (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the power control unit 1310 is mounted on the main control MPU 1310a, the power outage notification is performed by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is connected between the main control MPU 1310a and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 in order to suppress the influence of noise entering a wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the boards. Control of payout control MPU 952a and peripheral control MPU 1511a Is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. An RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 110 via the main control input circuit 1310b as a payer serial data reception signal. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 633 as a main payment serial data transmission signal without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 633, and transmits the serial data transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is transmitted as the peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above is input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, and, for example, a payout that notifies the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal. The payer ACK signal from the control board 633 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 110 are received via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. A main payment output ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 633, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the starting port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the starting port solenoid 2404 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1404 shown in FIG. To the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Outputs a signal to output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to various displays, and outputs various information (game information) related to a game to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca with a reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633, and the like.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V. ing. The main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is increased by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. Have been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is configured.
).

To the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310, + 12V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied via the dispensing control board 633, and to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50, the minus terminal is grounded to ground (GND). Is electrically connected to a positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Accordingly, when power from the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 due to, for example, a power outage or a momentary power outage, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in the present embodiment) shown in FIG. 110 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The main charge serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

  As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of the intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main serial data, a main serial data transmission signal whose logic is set to HI by + 12V can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting the main circumference serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the gate. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is connected to ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is shifted to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  To the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510, + 5V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground terminal (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also to a Vcc terminal (terminal No. 6) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (the fourth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (the fifth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main circumference serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Input terminal.

  Accordingly, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main serial transmission port 1310ae can be completely transmitted, and the main serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without being lost.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW due to the voltage being lowered to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. As described above, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V which is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage decrease. That is, for the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line is reduced, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained. The control reference voltage includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 decreases due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminal and the terminal, the terminal is the second auxiliary power supply. By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thus, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a command being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

  The plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a are all configured as main circumference serial data and are constituted by a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. Thus, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that allows all commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main circumference serial data is performed. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and does not lose the commands. Can be reliably received.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control section, etc., FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 114, and FIG. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 118 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, followed by the circuit of the payout control unit, and various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 113, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. To the first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, +5 V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. The +5 V from the power supply board 630 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing ripples (AC components superposed on the voltage). The second terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, and smoothing is performed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to a power supply terminal of a payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. . The power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is provided with a power supply terminal, a VDD terminal. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) incorporated in the payout control MPU 952a, and has a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. Since the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the current does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by the application of the payment VBB.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 MHz in this embodiment) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and the various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the capacitance of the capacitor PC5 sets the delay time by the delay circuit. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to an SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a reset terminal of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and the dispensing control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW. Each is input to the reset terminal. The SRT0 terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are each a negative logic input. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected at one end to the other end of the capacitor PC7, which is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. Further, the smoothed +5 V is applied to not only the VCC terminal but also an OE terminal which is an output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from an OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is a clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to a ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e included in the main frame 1310 shown in FIG. 114 and the door frame release switch 618 and the main frame release switch 619 shown in FIG. 124, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input via the power supply board 630, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described. A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 154 and the ball cut detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591 and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration for inputting the detection signal from the switch is almost the same, the circuit for inputting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut off) in a state where 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 20A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to an external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is further pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit including the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit including the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit including the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are provided with a door frame opening switch. A switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor PTR 20 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. You. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the main frame becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is increased to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 because the door frame open switch 618 is OFF. As a result, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a by turning off the door frame opening switch 618. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame release switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut off) in a state where 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer frame door open information output signal.

  The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to main control board 1310. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 has a + 12V power supply in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a voltage change from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  When the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor PTR23 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor is turned off. The PTR 24 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the main frame becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR 28. As a result, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board. 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. Then, while the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned off, and the logical Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of a state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. , It is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, but the door frame 3 and / or The player that the main body frame 4 is open can determine that a state that does not occur during the normal game has occurred, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. Because it is supposed to be entered, The frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Or, although it cannot be determined whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, a state in which the player who has opened the door frame 3 and / or the main frame 4 does not normally occur during the game. Can be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the normally open switches of the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are employed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the switch is turned on (conductive), the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 even if the switch is turned on (conducted) for some reason. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a short circuit occurs, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (a door frame opening switch 618 ′ and a body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and the main frame 4 is opened for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, even when a normally open switch is used for the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a disconnection occurs. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of the two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 630, and does not perform the reset function when the power failure or the instantaneous power failure is detected. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 633 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large value are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the paid outage power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 633, one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 633.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V. At this time, since the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 633, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic has become HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V When there is a sign of a power outage or a momentary power outage, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 633, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power outage or a momentary power outage of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. , The logic of the payout power failure notification signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the third terminal PIC50 through the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC40 has a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 154 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630, When the signal which is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 633 in the payout control board 633, while the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, , The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630, and the signal becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 633.

  When the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 154 is applied to the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630. When a signal whose logic is set to HI by being pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor 44a is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 154 is applied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630. At 633, a signal whose logic is LOW due to being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, whereby the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is raised to the +5 V side by the resistor PR47, and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 are supplied to a T-type filter circuit such as a three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. This is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without any intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 154 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with a ball cutting detection sensor 574, a payment detection sensor 591, and the like provided in the dispensing device 580 attached to the main body frame 4. However, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a uses the full tank detection sensor. When it is determined based on the detection signal from 154 that the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body. Control is performed. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the payout motor 584 even though the accommodation space is not filled with the game balls. In some cases, the driving control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 584 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls. When the payout rotator is controlled to rotate and the payout rotator continues to pay out the game balls, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 584 becomes unable to rotate when the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball path described above. The dispensing motor 584 is overloaded and abnormally generates heat, causing a failure or transmitting the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotator. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is first subjected to a circuit configuration in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The first and second terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are set to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding and succeeding stages are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is converted into an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48, and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR48, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of main collector input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit. When the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact of the operation switch 954 repeatedly flaps for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 due to.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent switch circuit. The resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from an operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (discharge control built-in RAM) incorporated in the dispensing control MPU 952 a of the dispensing control board 633 and the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. The operation is performed when the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM) is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from time and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on). Function. An operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in a function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from power-on, and after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). In the function for canceling the error in ()), the signal is an error canceling signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned on, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned on. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 43. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 at the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit at the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. It is determined that the instruction is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. , The transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. As described above, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the power-on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW becomes the transistor of the preceding stage. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 42. Is increased to the +5 V side by the resistor PR51, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that the instruction is given.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as described above, this logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is an instruction to perform a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 116 will be described. As shown in FIG. 116, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to a + 12V power line and a + 5V power line, respectively, to which +12 and + 5V are applied, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be. The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 584. And the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 via the zener diode PZD60 with + 12V or + 5V as the motor driving voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, and is also supplied to the payout motor 584.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are connected to the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60. Discharge motor drive signals are input to certain first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 584. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 584, and rotate the payout motor 584. When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When the back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-mentioned zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to a stage preceding the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. Circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 117 will be described. The payout control board 633, from the CR unit 6, via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869, as described above, BRDY which is a ball lending request signal and BRQ which is a single payout operation start request signal , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG generated from 24 V AC supplied from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible via terminal board 869. And are output. As shown in FIG. 117, input / output circuits for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly include photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and is connected to a transistor via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, which has one end grounded to the ground (GND).
The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 113 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC80A) without inverting the logic). Is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned on / off, the logic of a signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 630 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 630 via a wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) having one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line at power supply substrate 630. Is electrically connected to the other end. By turning on / off the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 630 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. You.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 630 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 630. You.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 630 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 630. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via a resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. I have.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and a payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the internal control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is output to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The transmitted EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the EXS logic output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is different from the EXS signal logic output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible or impossible from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is transmitted via the resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC 74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the PDY signal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR86 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the internal control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic becomes LOW is output to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  An RXD terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal, as shown in FIG. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb as the payout serial data transmission signal. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

  The input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a are connected to the above-described RWMLR signal, the dispensing power failure notice signal, the door open signal, the full signal, and various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) from the CR unit 6. In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output via the payment control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 124 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to output the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switch signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. The payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. Besides doing A payer ACK signal for notifying that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the payer ACK signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output signal is output to the substrate 1310 or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the error LED display 860b. Output to

[10-3. Various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to external terminal boards]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 633 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 633 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the payout control board 633 includes a payer serial data transmission signal, a payer ACK signal, an operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 633 includes a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round big hit information output signal, Games such as jackpot information output signals such as two-round jackpot information output signals, probability fluctuation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, ordinary symbol display information output signals, time saving information output signals, starting opening winning information output signals, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 633 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as prize balls reaches ten. Prize ball number information output signal outputted every time, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal A game information signal such as an output signal, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, an information output signal during time reduction, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. I do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 633 and an award ball number information output signal from the payout control board 633 are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main award balls from the main control board 1310 is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, hourly information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 633.

  The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a game or the like of the player. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer determines the number of jackpots in which two rounds have been performed (2 round jackpots). The number of hits of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of hits of the pachinko machine 1) and the number of hits of 15 rounds (the number of hits of the 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of occurrences of the two rounds or the number of 15 land hits from the total number of the jackpots, so that the number of the jackpots actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is large. It cannot be grasped whether it is a 2 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be skewed to the number of occurrences of the two round jackpots. Therefore, even if the player starts the game, only the two rounds of the jackpot hit occur. In some cases, a 15-round big hit does not easily occur. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may excite the player more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal separately as the jackpot information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot, The number of occurrences of the 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is two rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter shows 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of big hits and the number of occurrences of two rounds can be displayed separately, or only the number of occurrences of 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state, which may excite the player more than necessary Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the two round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the two round jackpot until the end, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal also has the 15 round jackpot information output signal. It is output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the two round big hit information output signal and the fifteen round big hit information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a two round big hit occurs, the two round big hit information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a two-round jackpot information output signal and a 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability variation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 633, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. A signal that indicates that a state has occurred, and a prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal includes various prize ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize ports 2001 and 201, and the large prize port 2005 shown in FIG. Is a signal that informs the player every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the ball reaches 10 balls, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal generates a 15 round jackpot. In the state The two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability variation is a signal that indicates that the probability variation is occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that informs the user that there is a special symbol display information output signal, and the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that the state is "stopped", and the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal in a state where the variable display of the ordinary symbol is ended (stopped) on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The information output signal is a signal that informs that there is a certain time reduction, and the information output signal during time reduction is a signal that indicates that the time reduction state is occurring. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is output in white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer sets the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the paid out game balls and to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player whose door frame 3 and / or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during a normal game. In the present embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the body frame 4 are open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. // It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the signal is a signal that indicates that the state is a state. In the present embodiment, the end of the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 (stop). Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and to count the number of times to display the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting port winning information output signal.
The starting port winning information output signal is, as described above, a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, the game ball is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer executes the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the starting opening 2004, and to count the number of times that the starting opening winning information output signal has been inputted, and to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

  The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal for notifying that the 15-round jackpot is occurring. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When a 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15 round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal has been input can be counted, and the total number of times that the 15 round big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the two-round big hit information output signal is a signal for notifying that a two-round big hit is occurring. In the present embodiment, while the two-round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the two round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a two round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the two round jackpot information output signal is input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of times the pachinko machine 1 has made the two round big hits can be grasped by counting the number of times the two round big hit information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT7 is used for outputting a normal symbol display information output signal in blue. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal for notifying that the normal symbol variable display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variable display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the ordinary symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the ordinary symbol display information output signal and receives the ordinary symbol display information output signal from the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the ordinary symbol has been completed (stopped), and to count the number of times, and to display the total variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red to output an information output signal during time reduction. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that indicates that a time saving state is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the information output signal during time reduction from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time reduction state is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during time reduction is input. In addition to counting the number of times the information output signal has been input during the time reduction, the total number of times the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be ascertained.

The output terminal PT9 is orange and outputs the information output signal during the probability fluctuation.
As described above, the information output signal during probability variation is a signal that indicates that a probability variation is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability variation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the information output signal during probability variation is input, sets the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the probability variation is occurring. It is possible to grasp that there is, and to count the number of times that the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is provided with a light blue color and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the ball that has hit the ball reaches ten, this signal is transmitted to the ball. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the pachinko machine 1 to output 10 prize balls each time the main prize ball information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the game balls to be paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do.
Game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various prize ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize ports 2001 and 201, and the special prize port 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds. The output is made at intervals of 0.128 seconds so as to form one continuous signal.

  Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 633 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output (passed) via the payout control board 633. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and a wiring having a connector colored in the same color as these colors is electrically connected to each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10. Connection can be prevented. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 633 are transmitted to the hall computer so that the various signals output on the payout control board 633 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are connected to the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, also in this point, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 633 side to the hall computer, and various types output on the main control board 1310 side The wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 to the hole. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island facility side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the number of remaining game balls is low, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally makes a 15-round hit, and the payout is performed because the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (For example, if a ball is clogged or a ball is generated in the payout device 580, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be eliminated). Then, as described above, the number-of-prize-balls information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side is such that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal that informs each time, the payout control board 633 can output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk at the hall, for example, checks a hose-shaped replenishing nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 and specifies the position of the ball clogging (for example, when the ball is generated in the payout device 580). Then, the position of the clogged ball or the position of the ball is identified) and resolved, thereby returning to a state in which the game ball is paid out.

  However, even when the clerk of the hall is proceeding with the work, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and after the 15 round big hit, the game ball is paid out by the work of the clerk of the hall. When returning to the state where the payout control board 633 returns, the payout control board 633 pays out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal indicating that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. In this case, an extremely large number of game balls are paid out even during the period in which the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the relationship cannot be accurately grasped by the hall computer.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 584 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 633 to actually pay out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 633. The main control board 1310 receives the game balls entered into various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls on the basis of the number of game balls reaches ten, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal notifying that, and the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 784 are output. Via a hall computer. Accordingly, even if the above-described trouble (trouble such as clogging of the supply nozzle or the like, clogging of the ball in the dispensing device 580, or trouble of the ball) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of game balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit for effect display drive board]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near and below the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It mainly includes a liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper-panel liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 120, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the minus signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the disturbance of the serial signal.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The signal is restored to three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from the channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a have 8 bits each for the red, green, and blue video signals. Since the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two LOCKN signal output request data are also input into the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510, where two signals are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so as to be connected to the circuit. Thus, when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so that the two signals are transmitted. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450 V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame. From the side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a serial signal (serial data) by the differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect, while the differential circuit 1512e At When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the output request of the LOCKN signal is received when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal to be described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, renders the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on as a game board side effect. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or the period during which the game board effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer and performing a demonstration with the game board effect display device 1600, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510; In order to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door-frame effect display device 460 is used. This is transmitted as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, The data format is completely different from the differential signal (serial data) of the differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of the company. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when the received data is determined to be abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a different data format from the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, for the purpose of forced output. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD, VDDO, LVDSVDD, PLLVDD, and PDWN terminals of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit. A capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GND terminal serving as a ground for the digital circuit. A + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal is provided. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output. A capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GNDO terminal serving as a ground for TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between a terminal and a PLLGND terminal serving as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal indicates that when +3.3 V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power is reduced. It is a terminal to communicate. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is a rising edge for transmitting various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, and D0 to D17 terminals) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, a rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal is for instructing whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by connecting the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. And a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are three synchronizing signals (three-bit synchronizing signal). is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, For some reason, a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (a 3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal for some reason. If it is difficult to draw the data on the door frame side effect display device 460 with appropriate data, the mode is automatically switched from the normal mode to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Through this, it is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the effect to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image is provided from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the effect display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect. Transmit to the receiver IC SDIC0. The connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored by receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in advance. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive substrate 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal indicating that data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, is valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal are connected to three video signals (18, red, green, and blue video signals, respectively, restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with a clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. These are input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other, and are connected to the same ground. Has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 124 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122, and FIG. 124 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described. Subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the big winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. The award ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 (the payout device 580) drive the payout motor 584 to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage plates. When a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine", the main control board is connected to the main control board as shown in FIG. Commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as the prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 633. The command 10H designates one prize ball and the command 11H. , Two prize balls are specified,..., 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as a rental ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is provided. When the ball lending machine 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the main control board 1310 switches to the payout control board 633. , A command 20H to a command 2EH are prepared, a command 20H specifies one prize ball, a command 21H specifies two prize balls,..., A command 2EH 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 633 controls the payout control board 633 to drive the payout motor 584 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 121C, a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies a self-check. The transmission side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as the command reception confirmation is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 synchronizing effect-related, special figure 2 synchronizing effect-related, jackpot-related, power-on, ordinary figure synchronizing effect-related, ordinary power actor-related, information display, state It is classified into indication and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization production related)
The special figure 1 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 123, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1404 is composed of commands named as "Start special figure 1 synchronizing effect", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special effect 1 synchronizing effect", and "Specify fluctuation state". To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronizing effect start command instructs the start of special figure synchronizing effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command specifies out-of-range, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. Note that the probability and the time reduction state include a low probability time reduction state indicating a low probability state and a time reduction state, a high probability time reduction state indicating a high probability state and a time reduction state, and a low probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is not the time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is not the time-saving state and the high-probability state (as the normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low-probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal pattern display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for displaying the symbols in a fluctuating manner is shorter than that in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), and the stop display is performed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. Increase the number of stop displays compared to the non-time saving state, and further increase the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without decreasing the number of balls held. (In other words, in comparison with the non-time saving state, the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and when the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed, By lengthening the duration of the opening and closing operation of the movable piece of the pair is a gaming ball acceptance rate of the second start hole 2004 state of increasing (ball entrance ratio)).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 change, the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect starts, and the special figure 1 tuning is performed. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure hit information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special effect 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102, and as shown in FIG. 122, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1406 is composed of commands named start of special figure 2 tuning effect, designation of special symbol 2 and end of special figure 2 tuning effect. These various commands have a status "B * H" and a mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number).
) Are assigned (“*” indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronizing effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronizing effect in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying out, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The end of the special effect 2 tuning effect indicates the end of the special effect 2 tuning effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 change, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 122, the categories of the jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is for instructing the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is started during the opening of the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (the starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 99). During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (when the starting opening unit 2100 is closed). The special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 123). The number of the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 2005 detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403) is transmitted. Is intended to indicate the ending start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is started during the small hit opening (while the small winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium-high winning opening prize production effect (a game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds is opened (the start opening unit 2100 The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the time of opening the N-th round of the special winning opening 2005, and is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the start-up opening unit 2100). The special winning opening 1 count display command is displayed when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the starting winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005). Is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403), and the big hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, when the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium-high winning opening (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403), the small hit ending The command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 122, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command named main control return destination at power-on. To these various commands, “D * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is issued when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power is restored). When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating the fact and when power is turned on (including when power is turned on and when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure and power is restored) .
), Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the low probability time saving state, the high probability time saving state, the low probability non-time saving state, and the high probability non-time saving state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of the pachinko machine, for example, when each of the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type is created, what kind of work is the copyright, what kind of game specification (for example, a probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the change of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) (A so-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to identify the type code among the Max type, Middle type, and Sweet digital type that indicate the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. The copyright code and the game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that if the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited. And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the game specification occurs.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs a return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123 and information indicating the driving state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. It is configured.

  The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is as follows: when the main control board power is turned on (when power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, Is also transmitted.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control-side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission processing, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to zuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 123, and is divided into the general symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The command 1402 is composed of commands entitled start of general figure synchronizing production, specification of general pattern, end of general figure synchronizing production, and specification of state at the time of change. To these various commands, "E * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general figure synchronizing effect start command instructs the start of general figure synchronizing effect in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specifying command specifies out-of-range, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the end of the ordinary figure synchronizing effect, and the fluctuating state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state are a low probability time saving state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving state indicating a high probability state and a time saving state as described above. State, a low-probability non-time-saving state indicating that the state is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. As the gaming state, a low probability non-saving time state is set).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 change, the general symbol designating command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol omission information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The normal electric production effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which can be opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 99. It is composed of commands called opening, opening of public telephone, and ending per ordinary figure. To these various commands, "F * H" is assigned as a status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per day is a command to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during the opening of the day. (The pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right directions by driving the starting port solenoid 2404.) State or time of expansion), and the ending per-figure-end command instructs the start of ending per-figure-per-figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for ordinary electric power is transmitted when the ordinary electric power is released (a pair of movable pieces are moved right and left by driving of the starting port solenoid 2404). The ending command is transmitted at the time of starting the ending of the per-figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification]
As shown in FIG. 124, the notification display section includes commands having the names of winning a prize display, connection failure display, disconnection / short circuit failure display, magnetic detection switch failure display, door open, and door close. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The prize award display command indicates that a game ball enters the special prize port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 when the player wins the special prize port other than during the big hit (during operation of the condition device). Is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electric connection in a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When there is a temporary connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification. The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, When the disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with the special winning opening sensor 2403 or the like occurs, it is instructed to start the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 123.

  The door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. When the door is in the open state, the door frame is instructed to be notified. The door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this state, the instruction to end the door opening notification is issued. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (open signal) from the body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. When the main frame 4 is in the open state, the main frame opening command is issued. The main frame closing command is issued by the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning prize display command is transmitted when a prize is won in a special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device), and a connection abnormal display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 633 at the time of sending the command to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the special winning port sensor. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when any of 2403 and the like is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619), The frame closing command is transmitted when the main frame closing is detected (when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the status display section is composed of commands having a frame state 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error release navigation command (corresponding to an error release command), and a frame state 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (where “H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 633, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. The command is set as a status, and the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a adds “7 * H”, which is additional information, to these received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, at the time of a change in the frame state, and at the time of error clearing navigation. , And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 123, the test-related section is composed of various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 105). Inspection of various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated, the main control-side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 123, the other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 123, a start opening prize, a fluctuation shortening operation end designation, a high probability end designation, a special symbol 1 memory, a special symbol 2 memory, a normal symbol memory, a special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect, It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned “9 * H” as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect, and based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the start of an effect when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, and And a start of an effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively. The high-probability termination designation command instructs a state transition from the shortened operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state, and the high-probability end designation command instructs a state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is a special symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400). The number of balls that have not been used yet (the number of reserves) is displayed on the display. The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). When the player enters the ball and notifies the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 of the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not been used for the variable display of the special symbol, the normal symbol storage command is the ordinary symbol 1 Reserved 0 to 4 (the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the normal symbol change display on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8) The special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400. The special design 2 storage prefetching production command informing the notice of the display result by the first special design display 1404 based on the special design 1 hold is instructed. Before the second special symbol display 1406 is used for the variable display of the special symbol, a pre-reading instruction to pre-read and notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1406 based on the special symbol 2 reservation is given. Is what you do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 2402), the speaker 622 shown in FIG. 72 and the upper speaker 464 shown in FIG. Is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is determined (after the loss stop period has elapsed) after the specified number of changes have been reduced, and the high-probability end designation command is The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is determined (after the loss stop period has elapsed) after the high probability number has been exhausted in the case of “high probability N times”. When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a pending number that is not yet used in the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400, (When a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves decreases from the number of reserves used for displaying a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404) The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls changes (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 displays the special symbol 2). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used in the fluctuation display, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the second special symbol display 1406 displays special information based on the number of reserves. Pattern The normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of pending balls has been reduced by using the variable display, and when the number of normally activated ball 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 is performed). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not been used yet in the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol on the symbol display 1402, when the number of the reserves is further increased by the passing of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, or the ordinary symbol display is displayed based on the retained number. When the number of reserved symbols is reduced by using the normal symbol in 1402 and the number of reserved symbols is reduced, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is set to the first starting port 2002). Is transmitted when the number of pending balls increases and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls is increased when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation is increased (the number of retained game balls enters the second starting port 2004). But Sent when it increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or the second starting opening When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 2402), the message is mainly transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to notify the fact by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification in which the pachinko machine 1 is used to monitor the presence or absence of a fraudulent activity in addition to notifying by sound from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not notify the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 633 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 633 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) is provided with a broken ball, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error, and a CR not connected. When the ball is broken, bit 0 (B0, “B”) is used. Represents a bit.), The value 1 is set in bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, the value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2) in the case of 50 or more stocks, and The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, the value 1 is set in B5, the value 0 is set in B6, and the value 0 is set in B7.

In the error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command), a ball watching, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error are prepared, and in the ball watching, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), and the payout detection sensor is set. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG.
"Retry error" indicates that payout of game balls that do not consistently occur due to a retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

  For the frame state 2 command, “without ball” is prepared, and during the ball withdrawal, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, a change of the frame state, and at the time of an error release navigation, and an error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of the error release navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 125 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 125. FIG. 127 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then, the operation of an initial value updating type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not a big hit game state is generated, and whether or not a reach (reach loss) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated. Reach judgment random numbers to be used for determination and fluctuations to be used for determining a fluctuation display pattern of a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 shown in FIG. A display pattern random number, a jackpot symbol random number for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot Big hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining initial value of symbol random number, first special symbol display when generating small hit game state 404 and a random number for a small hit symbol for use in determining a small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol display 1406, an initial value for a small hit symbol for use in determining an initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol A random number for determination and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 should be opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination are used. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for jackpot determination is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a to a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 110, other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. I do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for symbol determination is usually updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. The counter counts up from the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and a checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum thereof is stored in the main control side power-off processing (when the power is turned off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, for example, when the value does not match the value of the checksum (sum value), the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination is usually set to the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Retrieves the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM, and updates the random number for the normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Et always performs initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived on the basis of the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated with the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the second security measure prevents the analysis from being performed by taking two steps of security measures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for a normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles the same, and obtains an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincides with the unauthorized acquisition, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is assigned, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is useless at all in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus the ID code is analyzed by being disassembled. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each obtained predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 99 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. In 2004, a game state in which game balls can be accepted cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a has a circuit configuration such that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. For example, it indicates an address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control program performs a main control-side power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs the initial value setting and the activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 154 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as a “built-in”) built in the main control MPU 1310a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. WDT control register ”). The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and a watch dock timer clear register ( If the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" below, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, when the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the clock by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clock. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the power failure clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 111 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. The comparison result indicates that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the power failure clear processing, first, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting its logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and changes the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, until the latch state is set. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. When the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been. The determination as to whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the logic thereof is set to HI. Is input to Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state where the logic is input to the preset terminal PR terminal as LOW is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game-side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. The main control program determines, based on the logical value of the operation signal, that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, does not indicate that the RAM is to be cleared, and operates the operation switch 954. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is to be cleared, and the operation switch 954 is determined to be operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system for controlling the rendering of the effect display device 1600 and the effect display device 1600 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is started (booted). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. If there is an input of a power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure notice signal continues. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  When the power failure notice signal is not input in the determination of step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the game information is deleted, and to the value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, a checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). For this setting, power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, a person who commits wrongdoing The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device is applied to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself, and thereafter return to the original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets the value of the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main-control-side power-off process described later is normally terminated, and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared as described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0) in step S32, that is, if the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control-side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control-side power-on operation control means). More specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Also, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates that the RAM is to be cleared and game information is to be erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When the processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter which updates the random number for the normal symbol hit determination based on the taken out ID code is taken out. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and sets this fixed value as a normal symbol per-judge initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol-per-test determination random number described above. I do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a later-described main control timer interrupt process is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to perform initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a testing machine of a gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) or the like when the power is turned on.

Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 154 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the random number for the jackpot determination used to determine whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state is updated in hardware by the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a. And the like, such that the random number is latched and acquired, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set in the hard random number setting register.
When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a predetermined high speed is determined based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131). The other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are rapidly extracted without duplication. Note that the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and performs main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as the random number for jackpot determination.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in (1) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control-side main processing is started, the main control program issues an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). The execution of the game control RAM clear processing triggered by the receipt is regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to convert the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 into the error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear processing is executed upon the input (the game control side power-on operation control means), and the execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted after the predetermined time has elapsed even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is treated as a release switch for releasing an error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which should have been originally used to cancel an error generated in the payout operation, is replaced with a game storing unit for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM serving as a payout storage unit described later) as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process, or after a predetermined time elapses, It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball payout operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit random number update processing, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining a large hit symbol initial value, random numbers for determining a small hit symbol initial value, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination, random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has not been input, the non-hit random number updating process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, a main control timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Accordingly, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program executes the starting port solenoid 2404, the special winning opening sensor 2405, the first special symbol display 1404, the second special symbol display 1406, and the first special reserve number display shown in FIG. The driving signals output to the device 1405, the second special reserved number display 1407, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1408, and the like are stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program performs setting for prohibiting RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. When the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset, the main control built-in WDT 1310af is forcibly reset. After that, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control-side power-off processing".

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a main control-side power-on process by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be described. First, regarding a problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing is advanced. Will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged electric charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the charged power is applied as +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the interruption. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the When the power is cut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time standby process in step S22, the system for performing the drawing control of the effect display device 1600 and the effect display device 1600 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When a standby time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) until the start (start) is started, and immediately before the standby time is reached, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, Although the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms. By setting the interrupt permission in step S52, the main control timer interrupt described later is performed. Management is performed, the contents of the main control internal RAM be updated, it may be impossible to complete the main control side power-off time of processing in the main control side power-on process. For this reason, the main control-side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the value of the calculated checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is determined to be the same. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like at the time of power restoration and the intention of the hall clerk or the like to clear the RAM is not displayed, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notification signal is input (that is, step S22). If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby processing in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Can not prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the stored value of the checksum calculation and storage of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notification signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notification signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the power supply 1 is cut off, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with power by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main processing is configured by the processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process at the time of power supply cut-off, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum in step S28 when it is restarted. Since the result and the calculation result of the checksum in the backup process (that is, the calculated value of the checksum calculated and stored in step S64) are determined to match, the instantaneous value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is determined. There is no initialization of game information immediately before a power outage or power outage occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af to thereby reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Can be restarted again without any update of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be reliably completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the power to the main control at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power outage or momentary power outage. Therefore, when the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “shortage of blackout or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. It is determined in step 24 immediately after whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S2. The determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the input of the power failure notice signal continues to be performed, so that the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12. By setting the clear setting value and clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and starting the time measurement again, the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. I have. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then, in step S52, The content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM can be prevented from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt process described later. The mechanism was adopted. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to the power outage or momentary power outage, a portion covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all, and a main control side power supply. The content of the main control built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is completely completed by the hardware so that the processing at the time of disconnection is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. For transmission, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The power-on main control return destination command includes, as described above, information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. Have been. Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the special winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where there is no command, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on by the power-on main control return destination command in step S50 will not be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen in the big hit game state (for example, the screen of the big hit game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the sensor 2405 is driven and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99 is opened by the opening / closing member, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 executes the main control in step S34. In the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, the gaming state is restored to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure occurs. Is started, and the special winning opening 2005 shifts from a state where it is closed by the opening / closing member to a state where it is opened.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power outage occurs, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the terminal, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state according to the probability and the time saving state. It is not possible to display at all which round. In other words, for example, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102, and the large winning opening 1 count display that conveys the number of balls of the game balls entering the special winning opening 2005 is displayed. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round in the big hit gaming state (ie, what round).

  In such a situation, for example, when ending the fourth round (the fourth round) of the jackpot game state, the main control board 1310 stops driving the special winning opening sensor 2405 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 2107. The main control board 1310 transmits a special winning opening 1 closing display command instructing that the state changes from the open state to the closed state (that is, the start of the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 during the round). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (the fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the main control board 1310 starts driving the special winning opening sensor 2405 to open the special winning opening 2005 by the opening / closing member 2107. A transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the fifth To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Also, for example, a screen (for example, a message indicating that the movable piece has been expanded) indicating that a game state in which a game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2404 to expand the screen when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, Based on the information, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure occurs, so that the driving of the starting port solenoid 2404 is started, and the pair of movable pieces are moved right and left from a state of standing substantially vertically. So that the transition to a state of being expanded to.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can return, it is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous for the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen to be conveyed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. There is also a case where the player has forgotten that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power restoration is returned to the game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. There is also a problem that the player does not know what game to play.

  As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power-on state command is issued). In step S50, in order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command and the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state, When an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs and power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the special winning opening sensor 2405 as a return destination, opening the special winning opening 2005 from a state in which the large winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. The peripheral control board 1510 can inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state of being played, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that the round is the big hit game state (that is, the number of the round). Screen) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is in a jackpot game state and the special winning opening sensor 2 05 is started and a screen notifying that the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 (for example, “Big hit. The special winning opening is open. A screen telling the player to enter the game to make the ball enter) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is returned to the large winning opening after the power is restored. In 2005, a game in which a game ball is allowed to enter can be instructed. For example, in the above-described example, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is provided, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. In this state, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the drive of the starting port solenoid 2404 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and a pair of movable bodies are started. A screen telling you that the piece has been expanded to the left and right (for example, "The movable piece is expanding. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower starting port." Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. It is possible to instruct the player to play the ball. Thus, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 to return to the peripheral control board 1510 in detail. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and that the pachinko machine has failed. Can be prevented.

  Next, in a main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of a production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described processing of steps S58 to S68 as a backup processing and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 122 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information. Is stored. These commands are such that a power-on state command is transmitted first, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 124 at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery in which power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated to perform the RAM clear operation, information indicating the fact is provided at power-on (in addition to power-on, power failure or instantaneous power failure causes power consumption). (Including the time of power recovery to recover.) And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) creates a so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What game specifications (for example, if the probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (a so-called ST machine or the like) is such that a probability variation occurs when the game is performed 30 times or 70 times).

  In the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line determines which of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, B, D, C, D, and F) is the main copyright for any of the works. It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing on the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). Thereby, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the plurality of works is mixed. With the mixture of 1310, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is used. In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thus, the worker of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited By watching the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the main control board 1310 determines which work is the copyright of the work. It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability fluctuation occurs. Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. The worker can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by looking at the inspection monitor, and separates the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the following main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control-side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control program switches the register bank on the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 127 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control-side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control-side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank of the above. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, the process of saving each register on the stack is not necessary.

Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) sends out various commands in addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal electric accessory control processing. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs that the ACK has been received normally is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed.
Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. More specifically, the main control program includes, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 shown in FIG. 102 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2001 or 201 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102 for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 102, and a game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 99 are detected. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 102 and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 102, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 102 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 99, and a magnet for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 for notifying that the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 102 has normally received the detection signal from the detection sensor 4024 and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. Each is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Also, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004 When each of the signals is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 102 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start-up sensor 3002, a start-up winning command corresponding thereto is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start-up sensor 2402. And the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001 or 2011, a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005. , A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 , And a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, when this switch input process is started, first is read as the first time, respectively, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the elapse, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for the first to third times and the reading twice for the second to fourth times, a total of two times of reading is performed, thereby causing an influence of chattering, noise, and the like. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401 are detected. Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), and therefore each time the counter is incremented, each time the hit random number updating process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 to the value each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit random number updating process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are set in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, but every time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of the present routine becomes uneven, and If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number update processing in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control-side main processing within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs award ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, the prize ball command shown in FIG. If the number of planned game balls reaches ten, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and the output is stored in the output information storage area as output information, The self-check command shown in FIG. 121 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99 and enters, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so the main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output to convey that effect, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is checked. A self-check command is generated and transmitted to the payout control board 633. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls to be paid out will be replaced by In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. Is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). On the payout control board 633, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 633 of that is output to the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release) classified into the status display in FIG. The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Note that the frame state 1 command here corresponds to a first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to a first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005) or the like. , A prize abnormal display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 102 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as the transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 102, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, whether the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance or not. (A determination as to whether or not a big hit game state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”)), and a value of a counter for updating the random number for the big hit symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. For example, it is determined whether or not the probability variation hit determination value is matched (determination of whether or not a probability change is generated). Here, the “probability variation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) that is set higher than at the normal time (a low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) at the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 at the high probability. ３32767 are set, and are read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches the jackpot determination value, a random number for a jackpot determination (that is, a random number value acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, and the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 2402. In some cases, various commands related to the special effect 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 is set so as to light the device 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information. I do. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is set, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1) classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 99 is opened and closed. When the output of the drive signal to the special winning opening sensor 2405 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times, The second round display lamp 1407a of the round display 1408 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the round display lamp 1407a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display 1408 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be turned on, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol hit described above is extracted and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. To memorize.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0-th section to a third section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0-th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is displayed such that the total number of the stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary symbol storage and display 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and a random number for a symbol hit determination is usually extracted from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened and closed is determined based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that a game state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands that are classified as related to the ordinary figure tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, and are transmitted as transmission information. While storing in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal symbol effect shown in FIG. Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2404 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for the normal symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol fluctuation based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 122 are created. In addition, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as the output information. To memorize.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program outputs, for example, a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information. Or a driving signal is output to a special winning opening sensor 2405 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the game is in the big hit gaming state, and is driven to a starting opening solenoid 2404 that performs an opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition to outputting a signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information related to the game (game information, such as a signal, And outputs the signal to the payout control board 633.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, and various kinds of special figure 2 tuning effect related shown in FIG. Commands and various commands classified into jackpot-related (for example, when a game ball that has entered a special winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 99) is detected based on a detection signal from a special winning opening sensor 2403 (see FIG. 102)). A special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the special winning opening count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as a general drawing synchronizing effect, various commands classified as a normal electric actor effect, Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) classified into the notification display shown in FIG. Min is the various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310aa built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 112 transmits at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea can be completed as main serial data. At the time of power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 122, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Which constitutes a power-on state command as main peripheral serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitutes a power-on main control return destination command, The mode is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the power-on processing at the main control side, and according to the game information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit) ) Is transmitted (error command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 124 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (The error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 633 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Unit)) (a door frame command sending means, a second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door close command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 1510 (production control). Unit), a door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted (door frame command transmitting means, second door frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door close command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 102 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, while the process can be completed. The power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 122 for instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and the special winning port sensor 2405, which are the electric driving source by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is peripherally controlled. The data can be output to the substrate 1510. In other words, the main control board 1310 sets the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 126, and sets the main control built-in RAM working area in step S34 in the same process. Based on the power-on information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power-on status command and a power-on main command classified as power-on shown in FIG. The control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is output as main peripheral serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, There are constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be effected and displayed. With this, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game and the power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or the power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. And the effect of the main control board 1310 on the display area of the effect display device 1600 can be displayed and notified of the return destination of the progress of the game, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a malfunction as seen by the player. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a failure.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In step S38 in the main control-side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are generated by creating a power-on main control return destination command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, a power-on state command is configured as main circumference serial data. The status of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value Send apparatus, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying the type among the max type, the middle type, and the sweet type indicating the model type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., and based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit. FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation detection sensor history creation process, and FIG. 133 is a sprocket. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the home position determination skipping process. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball bulging determination process. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball prize ball stock number addition process. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for a ball rental, and FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout monitoring process, and FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation setting process, FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, and FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing, and FIG. 144 is a timing chart showing signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending and processing (a) for confirming an input signal from the CR unit.

  First, the pay-out control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the pay-out control unit timer interrupt processing, ball release switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket home position determination skip processing, ball look determination processing, and award determination. Prize ball stock number addition processing for balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for lending balls, stock monitoring processing, payout ball movement operation setting processing, payout setting processing, ball movement operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, mismatch The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. It should be noted that the ball release switch operation determination processing, the rotation detection sensor history creation processing, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, the bulging judgment processing, the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls, the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball lending, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball judging operation setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the mismatch counter reset judging process, and the error canceling operation judging process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Performed as processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball projection determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, mismatch counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock for prize balls Addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball watching motion determination setting processing Priority in turn has been set.

[15-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633 executes the payout control program under the control of the payout control MPU 952a as shown in FIGS. Time processing. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 952a to set an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interrupts of the payout control MPU 952a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed with priority.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, if the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. An advance notice signal (payout blackout notice signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal (dispensing power failure notice signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure notice signal (discharge power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether the operation switch 954 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is determined that the instruction does not indicate that the RAM is to be cleared. While it is determined that the operation switch 954 is not operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is to be cleared, and the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) incorporated in the payout control MPU 952a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. (Operation control means at power-on on the payout control side). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The logic of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball information storage area, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area. This flag indicates whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the state is set is deleted. The value is set to 1 when the payout information is deleted, and to 0 when the payout information is not deleted. Is done. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be made, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control program determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is deleted, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not deleted.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM assuming that the payout information is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value has been stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in a power supply cutoff process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has the value 1 in step S528, that is, when the processing at the time of powering off the payout control unit is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The power recovery time information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize stored in the prize ball information storage area) are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information on payout of mismatch counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes not only a state where the power is turned on after the power is turned off, but also a state where the power is restored after the power failure or the momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value is 0) in S528, that is, if the payout control unit power-off process has not been completed normally, the payout control program clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Cleared (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control-side RAM clear processing upon detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (the payout control-side power-on operation control means). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interruption permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control program sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (dispensing power failure warning signal) is sent as the power failure warning to the main control board 1310. From the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is performed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  When the 2 ms lapse flag HT-FLG has the value 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal (discharge power failure notice signal) is input. Is determined.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1 at step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control program sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball commands and self-check commands shown in FIG. 121) have been normally received, and a payout motor 584. Various kinds of information such as drive information for controlling the drive to the player, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED display 860b are stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a payout motor is output. A drive signal is output to 584, and the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is awarded ball number information. (In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out ten game balls. Is provided with a prize ball number information signal output determination counter for outputting prize ball number information. The prize ball number information signal output determination counter is provided for the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The number of balls is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is calculated. It is stored and updated in a prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring. (Not shown) for monitoring the value of the prize ball information signal output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is performed by a port input process of step S550 described later. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown at 124, the payout motor 584 adds and updates the number of game balls actually paid out.In step S548, the prize ball is stored from the prize ball information storage area. The value of the number information signal output determination counter is read, and when the read value of the read prize ball information signal output determination counter exceeds the value 10, the prize ball information signal is output to the external terminal board 558, and The exceeded ball count is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter. ing. ), And outputs a display signal to the error LED display 860b.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 954, a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal, a BRDY signal from the CR unit 6, and a CR connection Signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing to be described later have been normally received, and stored in the input information storage area as input information. I do.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not a ball is in a swollen state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball is set as a determination condition. The time, the skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 are discharged. Time, a full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full of the stored game balls, and ball cut detection This is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the sensor 574. In addition to performing time management, such as a ball-out determination time, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body does not match the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591. When judging whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of game balls that do not match is repeated, the inconsistency counter reset judgment which is set as the judgment condition is performed. Perform time management of time. For example, when the sphere judging time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer updating process is performed, the sphere judging time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is obtained. When the value becomes 0, the ball judging determination time is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time the timer update process is performed, the ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time are decremented by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, whereby the ball is discarded. The unplugging judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the out-of-ball judgment time, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time are accurately measured.
These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Subsequent to step S552, the payout control program performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input. Is determined. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6.
In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of a signal is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or blackout. Thereby, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power outage, and the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. As a result, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or shortage. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 952a performs an instantaneous power failure or a power outage while paying out the game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage is restored. It is possible to continue from time to time, so that it can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 can be restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. The various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

  Further, various kinds of information stored in the CR communication information storage area are included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication processing, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read-out PRDY signal output setting information is set to, for example, the logical state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 952a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM and included in the payout backup information, for example, in a retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH based on the following formula. Is determined, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball watching operation determination process is performed. The setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6, The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit 6. As described above, for example, if the operation of paying out the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the instantaneous stop, the state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output to the CR unit 6 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It can be notified that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 580 is in an abnormal state. Thus, it is possible to prevent the CR unit 6 from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine is used. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869, a payout ball is paid out. In order to inform that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 86. When it is not electrically connected via the control signal, the state of the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal. The state of the logic of the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the filled game balls are full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 described above is determined by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 to be equal to or more than a predetermined number. Or not. For example, it is determined whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of the stored game balls by using a timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms and detecting the full state in the current full and full ball check processing. When the detection signal from the sensor 154 is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out of ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is When the state transits from OFF to ON, the timer for the above-described full tank determination time (504 ms) is started in the timer update processing in step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls, and the full tank information notifying the fact is described in the above-described state information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the state information storage area stores the full tank information notifying that the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full with the stored game balls in the state information storage area. I do.

  The determination of whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms in this full tank and ball exhaustion check processing. When the detection signal from the detection sensor 574 is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 574 is OFF in the last (2 ms before) full and ball exhaustion check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball interruption detection sensor 574 Transitions from OFF to ON, the timer updating process of step S552 starts measuring the above-mentioned ball out determination time (119 ms). Then, when the ball-out determination time reaches a value of 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full and ball-out determination processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball-out information that informs the state is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number. The information is stored in the state information storage area.

Subsequent to step S556, the payout control program performs a command receiving process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball commands and self-check commands shown in FIG. 121) are received.
When the various commands are normally received, payer ACK information notifying the fact is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be received normally, a connection error that indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an error has occurred in the various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs a command analysis process (step S560). In the command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, lending balls, removing balls, and watching balls are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored. I do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b of the payout control board 633 is created, and the above-described output information storage area is written as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, and based on the ball-out information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is less than a predetermined number, the corresponding display data ( In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (the number “1”) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission processing, various kinds of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. The main control board 1310 generates a command, a body frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command), an error clearing navigation command (corresponding to a first error clearing command), and a frame state 2 command. Send to For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, a frame state 1 command is generated when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not a predetermined number or more. And sends it to the main control board 1310. Further, in the command transmission process, when there is a change in the frame state, for example, when an error related to the payout operation of the game ball has occurred, the payout control program includes information (hereinafter, referred to as a location where the error occurred in the payout operation). A frame state 1 command (first error canceling command) including “error occurrence position information”) is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission processing, if the payout control program determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected, the above-described error is output. A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means). When the main frame opening detection signal is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the payout control program transmits a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) (main frame command transmission means, 1 body frame command transmission means). When the body frame closing detection signal is input from the body frame opening switch 619, the payout control program transmits a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) (body frame command sending means). , First body frame command sending means). In addition, when the door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618 (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means). The payout control program reads the error information including the error content from the status information storage area in the command transmission process (step S566), and sets the machine number information for identifying itself from another pachinko machine and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the hall computer receives the error information signal, the hall computer provides the unit number information and the error information to the wireless device owned by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk sends the pachinko machine of the unit number based on the unit number information. In the above, it is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S568, the flow returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether a power failure notice signal (discharge power failure notice signal) has been input. If it is determined that there is no input of the power failure notice signal (discharge power failure notice signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 In other words, when 2 ms have elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. , A port input process is performed in step S550, and in step S552, An image updating process is performed, a CR communication process is performed in step S554, a full or missing ball check process is performed in step S556, a command receiving process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, and a main process is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeatedly performed. . Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 952a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 952a preferentially outputs the payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a secures a processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure notice signal (discharge power failure notice signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of payout information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated as the sum of the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM except for the storage area of the value of the checksum calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thus, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 952a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the power-on processing of the payout control unit again under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “dispensing control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs the power-on processing of the payout control unit by restoring the power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S528, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing of the payout control unit has been completed normally. Has been inspected. As described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is double-checked to check whether or not the payout backup information has been stored due to fraud.

[15-2. Dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 128 to 129.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 disables the timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 131 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Then, the register is switched (evacuated) (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation processing]
Next, the rotation detection sensor history creation processing will be described. In the rotation detection sensor history creation processing, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

  When the rotation detection sensor history creation processing is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: the most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, the least significant bit B0, and "B" represent bits). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored as rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. When the input information includes the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout control program determines that the detection slit for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is the light of the rotation detection sensor 840. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in the state where the detection slit has transited the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S614). In the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the detection slit has transited the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). . In the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information in step S614, and reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 in the order of the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0. To shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  As described above, every time the rotation detection sensor history creation processing is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or 1 depending on the state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, a history of the detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket home position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket home position determination skip processing will be described. In the sprocket home position determination skip processing, the determination as to whether the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is at the home position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the payout device 580 is completed. Thus, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 can be reliably started in a state where the ball is not generated.

  When the sprocket home position determination skip processing is started, the payout control section 633a in the payout control board 633 executes the home position determination skip flag SKP-, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the value of FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. When the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), the value is 1, the payout rotation is performed. It is set to a value of 0 when performing body position determination (when not skipping).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program uses the rotation detection sensor history information in the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether the rotation detection sensor detection history information matches the home position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit described above continues for four timer interrupt cycles and the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor Means that the state has changed from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state. In the occurrence of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 124 is rotating by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 584. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation detection sensor 840 outputs a signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. The detection signal history, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation detection sensor history creation processing shown in FIG. 132, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST, This is performed based on a detection signal from the latest four timer interrupt periods. Thus, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotating body due to the backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotary body due to the backlash. Can be. Therefore, erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotator due to backlash can be prevented, so that the rotational position of the payout rotator can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 584. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt periods are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program: The value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thus, it is possible to set so that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (skipped). Note that the payout control MPU 952a sets the rotation position of the payout rotator in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotator.

  Subsequent to step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of the detection slits is the same as the number of the concave portions of the payout rotating body, and is formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection plate. In addition, the rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear as described above. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the respective detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (the payout rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 584 in 18 steps.

  The payout control program manages the rotation position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 584 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit detects rotation. A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as a “fixed position determination state”), and (3) the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. State (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 584, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four steps of rotation of the payout motor 584, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 584 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotational position of the payout rotating body, is managed by the rotation of a total of 18 steps.

  In the fixed position determination skip state (3), the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. It should be noted that the payout control MPU 952a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 is performed. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 3 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, are taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580, and are guided to the payout device 580. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the dispensing device 580 is in a file environment susceptible to noise. The payout device 580 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-described fixed position determination skip state (3), that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transition state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is improved. Note that, as described above, the cycle and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained in advance by calculation, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Spherical judgment processing]
Next, the bulging determination processing will be described. In the ball skew determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball skew state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted.

  When the ball skew determination process is started, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 detects the rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. The fixed position determination value is stored in the payout internal ROM as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper four bits are stored. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1.
In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program: This routine is terminated assuming that the detection slit has transited the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and no ball-filling state has occurred. I do.

  On the other hand, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value in step S642, the ball may not move. The value 1 is set to the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is swept by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 584 is performing the ball swiveling operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball skew determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When the ball watching determination time becomes effective, the ball watching determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. .

[15-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing for a prize ball and a prize ball stock number addition processing for a lending ball. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command described later. The prize ball stock number adding process for ball rental is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental will be described. In the present embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls is set to be performed with priority, and the prize ball stock number addition processing is performed in accordance with the prize ball stock number addition processing in the prize ball stock number addition processing. After the game balls are paid out by the payout device 580, it is set so that the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental is performed.

[15-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize ball is started, the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633 executes the prize ball command under the control of the payout control MPU 952a as shown in FIG. 135. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis processing of step S560 in the processing at the time of powering on the payout control section (main processing of the payout control section) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not the command is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while if the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program executes The corresponding award ball number PBV is read from the award ball number information table (step S652). As will be described later in detail, the award ball number information table is an information table stored in advance in the payout internal ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the winning ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 580, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in the present embodiment, has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). I have. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the award ball stock number PBS is read from the award ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the winning ball number PBV read in step S652 to the winning ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Prize Ball Stock Number Addition Processing for Rental Ball]
Next, a description will be given of the prize ball stock number addition processing for a ball rental. When the prize ball stock number addition process for ball-starting is started, in the pay-out control section 633a of the pay-out control board 633, the payout control program executes the ballparking request under the control of the payout control MPU 952a as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a signal (step S660). This determination is made based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball lending request signal.

  When there is no ball loan request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when there is a ball loan request signal in step S660, the payout control program executes The award ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), and the rent ball number RBV is added to the award ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine ends. The number RBV of loaned balls is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball lending request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball is prioritized (the prize ball and the lending ball are managed separately). And payout of the lending ball upon completion of the payout of the prize ball. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of the lent balls is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes zero.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues to play the game in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state) during the game. This is the processing to be performed.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The award ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read award ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  If the award ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the value of the caution flag CA-FLG to 1 (step S674), and ends this routine. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started to stock gaming balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of award ball stocks described above) has exceeded the caution threshold TH. This flag indicates that the value has reached, and is set to a value 1 when the value has reached the caution threshold TH or more, and a value 0 when the value has not reached the caution threshold TH.

  On the other hand, when the award ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the value of the caution flag CA-FLG to 0 (step S676), and ends this routine.

  When the gaming state is a big hit and the player relaxes and looks at the effect developed by the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 105, the player inadvertently pays as a prize ball for one round. In some cases, the released game balls are not removed from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, and the game balls accumulate in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270. When the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and exceeds the caution threshold value TH, and the caution effect is provided on the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, it is possible to inform, for example, the clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. Thereby, the clerk of the hall can inform the player that the game ball is to be pulled out from the lower plate 322, and the player fills the lower plate 322 (the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the caution threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one-fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by one byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall as early as possible to warn the player of the game.

[15-8. Dispensing ball watching motion determination setting process]
Next, the paying-out-ball-movement-movement determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball movement operation determination setting processing, the payout motor 584 pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, performs the ball movement, or does not perform such payout or discharge. Or one of these processes.

  When the payout ball movement determination setting process is started, the payout control program is executed by the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. The home position determination value is stored in the payout internal ROM as described above, and in the present embodiment, “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit).
) ", The upper four bits B7 to B4 have the value 0, and the lower four bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S682, the payout control program determines that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value. It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation to be described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and when the retry operation is not abnormal (retry When the operation is normal, the value is set to 0.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally operated, the payout control program determines whether or not the flag PBE-FLG during the ball is out of view. Is determined (step S686). This flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted causes the ball to be swept. The value is set to 1 when the operation is being performed, and to 0 when the ball is not moving.

  In step S686, when the ball in-flight flag PEB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when the ball is not performing the ball-moving operation, the payout control program stores the prize-ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The award ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether the read award ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 584.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is a number of unpaid balls, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of the stored gaming balls. Is determined (step S692). This determination is made based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out of ball check processing in step S556 in the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payment controller (payment controller main processing) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full information is read from this state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of the stored gaming balls.

  When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full with the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and ends this routine. In the payout setting process, a payout operation of paying out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 is performed.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped. If a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 584 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. 135. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (is 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. Thereby, the payout of the game ball is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the flag PBE-FLG is set to 1 in step S686, that is, if the ball is performing the ball-moving operation, the payout control program performs the ball-moving operation setting process described later (step S700). To end. In the ball movement setting processing, a ball movement is performed to eliminate the ball movement caused by the payout rotating body of the payout device 580.

  On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operated, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6 (When the logic of BRDY is LOW, that is, when falling), the logic of the PRDY signal is kept LOW, that is, the falling state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information. And stores it in the CR communication information storage area.
As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read-out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control section 633a to the CR via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Output to the unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The leveraged EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. . Note that “maintaining the state of the logic of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. When there is a certain (EXS signal is rising and held), the logic HI is maintained.

[15-8-1. Payment setting processing]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In the payout setting process, the payout motor 584 is driven to make settings for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. Reading is performed (step S710). The drive command number DRV is for instructing the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the award ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether the drive command number DRV is a value 0 (step S712). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 remains based on the drive command number DRV.

  When the number of drive commands DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (stop). ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal in the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S714, the payout control program reads the winning ball stock number PBS from the winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Although this count will be described in detail later, in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Is performed based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from the award ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read at step S718 from the winning ball stock number PBS read at step S716, to the winning ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720) The value 0 is set to the actual ball count PB (Step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the winning ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 is set to the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the number of drive commands DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the number of drive commands DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

  If there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program adds (increments) the value 1 to the actual ball count PB, and ends this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is counted up.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the number of drive commands DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination in step S728, When the actual ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball cannot be paid out because the game ball has not been received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Judge that Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the winning ball stock number PBS in the above-described step S720 in the drive command number DRV in order to pay out the ball that should be paid out once again. Accordingly, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. . By performing the retry operation, the possibility that unpaid game balls are not paid out to the player can be extremely reduced, and disadvantages of the player due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[15-8-2. Ball movement setting processing]
Next, the ball movement setting process will be described. In the ball movement setting process, a setting is made to eliminate the ball protrusion state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is transmitted.

  When the ball movement setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the operation has been performed (step S750). This determination is made based on the ball judging time subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the sphere determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball determination time has elapsed.

  If the ball-skipping determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Subsequent to step S752, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. The fixed position determination value is stored in the payout internal ROM as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)” In the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are stored. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program: The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set to perform the ball swinging operation (step S756), and this routine ends. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal in the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets the value PBE-FLG of the ball in-flight flag PBE-FLG to 0 as the end of the ball-feeding operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is swept by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 584 is performing the ball swiveling operation. When the operation is not performed (the end of the ball protruding operation), the value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball judging time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the communication with the CR unit 6 is not being performed (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is kept LOW, that is, the fall state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. I do. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read-out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transmitted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control section 633a to the CR via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869. Output to the unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The leveraged EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. . As described above, “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is rising and held) and the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets the value PBE-FLG of the ball in-flight flag PBE-FLG to 0 as the end of the ball-feeding operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring processing]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the game balls to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. The fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has the value 0, and the lower four bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program: The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). The inconsistency counter INCC indicates the number of game balls paid out and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. , And is usually a counter for calculating the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Therefore, the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 139, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and the actual payout detection The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not payout of inconsistent game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected by the sensor 591 is repeatedly performed. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the mismatch counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area.

Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value. At this time, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG.
Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

  When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts a value 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decremented, step S778). ).

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S776). S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that is not consistent due to the retry operation is paid out is about 1 / million. In the present embodiment, the mismatch threshold INCTH is used. Is set as the value 5.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 127, as described above, it is the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the power is restored. The information to be used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination in step S780, the monitoring of the payout operation (retry operation) of the game balls by the payout device 580, which was performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or the power outage, can be continued from the time of the power recovery. I have. For this reason, for example, immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device. It is determined that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in the normal state, and even at the time of the power recovery, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in the normal state in the determination of the step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormally performed, that is, the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is abnormal. Therefore, even at the time of power restoration, it can be determined that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is abnormal in the determination of step S780.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCH, the payout control program executes the “retry error Is set in the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 633, to set the retry error information for displaying the number "5", and the payout control built-in RAM described above. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying the fact that "prize ball stock is in progress", the payout control program sets the prize ball stock information for displaying the number "9" on the error LED display 860b, and sets the above-described payout control built-in. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to a mismatch counter INCC stored in the winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, Initialization is performed when this internal factor occurs. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the mismatch counter INCC is initialized when this external factor occurs. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 as a RAM clear signal. Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and sends the RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. 1510. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 998.

  Subsequent to step S784, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally performed. During normal operation), the value is set to 0.

  FIG. 127 shows the retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The retry error state command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), and the LED display data creation in step S564 in the process is performed. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored in the output information storage area as LED display information. A drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b based on the To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 1310 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits the main control program to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 issues a door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment) in FIG. Is output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. As described above, the clerk of the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to display the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 633. By visually checking that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. Accordingly, the clerk of the hall or the like checks the abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and poor contact of various connectors to investigate the cause of the occurrence. The operation can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED display 860b are not notified.

  Further, by intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect the paid out game balls received by the recesses of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating the game ball paid out by the retry operation by forcibly generating the retry operation described above is performed, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, Then, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that a clerk in the hall or the like runs to check the state of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the player who commits the wrongdoing has to stop so that the wrongdoing is not found, and cannot continuously obtain the illegal game ball due to the wrongdoing. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the cheating player is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 591 can be minimized.

  Further, as described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, as described above, Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor that has occurred. Thus, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when, for example, an external factor that the operation switch 954 is operated to cancel an error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is illegally remodeled so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized due to such illegal operation. Absent.

[15-10. Mismatch counter reset determination processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In the inconsistency counter reset processing, the number of game balls paid out and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for calculating the difference between.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 executes the inconsistency counter reset determination time under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (step S790). This determination is made based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours), which is the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). To end. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and the number of game balls paid out and received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591, Are equal, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation processing shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Therefore, by this retry operation, the ball of the game ball received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the payout of inconsistent game balls due to a mismatch between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeatedly performed. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that is not consistent due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the game board 5 and a frame such as the main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game is performed by exchanging the game board 5 (replacement of a new machine). Since the specifications can be changed, the payout control board 633 for controlling the payout device 580, and the power supply board 630 for generating the drive power supply for the payout device 580 and the control power supply for the payout control board 633 include a frame as a common function. Equipped on the body side. In the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, as described above, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC under the control of the payout control MPU 952a to determine whether the retry operation is repeatedly performed. The operation can be determined. In the process of turning off the power of the payout control unit in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit shown in FIG. 127, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before power-off is stored when the power is turned off. In the process of step S530 (setting when the power is restored in the RAM work area) in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit shown in 129, the process is restarted from the stored inconsistent counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 5 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is replaced with a game board 5 ′ of another game specification different from the game board 5 and the power is turned on, the payout control board is used. The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in 633 starts the processing again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5 'is mounted, the mismatch counter INCC of the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5 before mounting is replaced is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5 'is mounted, and by chance, the number of game balls that do not match is generated at a probability of 1 / million and the inconsistency counter INCC is generated. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCH described above, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the retry operation is an abnormal operation by the payout control MPU 952a in a short period of time after replacing the gaming board 5 with the gaming board 5 '. There is a risk. That is, in a period shortly after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ', an abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact of various connectors. Even though no defect or the like has occurred, the retry operation may be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation.

  As described above, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 'and the retry operation is determined as an abnormal operation in a short period of time, an impression that the replaced game board 5' is apt to break down despite being new is obtained. May give to players. The probability of one millionth of a ball that is inconsistent due to a retry operation being paid out is one millionth of a ball when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a hall and operated continuously for one week during the business hours of the hall. Since the probability that one game ball inconsistently due to the retry operation is paid out is the same as the probability of one ball being paid out, the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It is in a state where only the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, in one week, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 1, and in two weeks, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 2 and 3 In the week, the value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 3 in 4 weeks. In 4 weeks, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented in 1 and the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 4 in 5 weeks. The value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when five weeks have elapsed, since the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program executes the process of step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, the disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, the contact failure of various connectors. It is determined that an error has occurred, and in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141, the segment display mounted on the payout control board 633 to notify that a “retry error” has occurred. To display the number "5" on the error LED display 860b Set the over information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the dispensing control MPU 952a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the dispensing control MPU 952a repeatedly performs the inconsistency counter reset. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting the value, the above-described increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs at a probability of 1 / million is calculated. Disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and poor contact of various connectors. It is possible to prevent the retry error information indicating that the information is present from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Note that by intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect the paid out game balls received by the recesses of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. In the case where the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short period of time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, As described above, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light. Will be rushed to confirm. In this case, the player who commits the wrongdoing has to stop so that the wrongdoing is not found, and cannot continuously obtain the illegal game ball due to the wrongdoing. On the other hand, in the case where the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCH, the inconsistency counter INCC is set every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Is reset, during this time, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player who commits the injustice is, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 591 Even if it is intentionally inoperative repeatedly for a long time, the number of game balls that can be obtained by a player who commits an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[15-11. Error release operation determination processing]
Next, the error release operation determination processing will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 has been operated.

  When the error release operation determination processing is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the operation switch 954 releases the error as shown in FIG. 143 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Is determined (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process of step S550 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the instruction does not indicate that error cancellation is to be performed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. While the operation switch 954 is determined not to be operated, the operation switch 954 is operated when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, indicating that it is an instruction to perform error cancellation. It is determined that there is.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program executes the error flag state confirmation processing. Perform (step S802). In the error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the payout device 580 is confirmed. For example, the status of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is abnormal is checked.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Therefore, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Subsequent to step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this state information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the state information corresponding to the error flag is changed to the above-described state information. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 130, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area, and the read state A status command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal is a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, it is determined that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  The main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information transmits the main control program to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the control board 1510, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification processing, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” Is performed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, This is repeated from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 88 to notify a store clerk in the hall or the like. The clerk at the hall who heard the notification of the error notification of the retry operation notices an abnormality of the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. A defect or the like can be confirmed very quickly as compared with a case where an error notification announcement of a retry operation does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In the retry operation error notification processing, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

  Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs a release setting process (step S806). In the cancellation setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is corresponded to the error flag. The CR unit 6 informs the user that the contents displayed by the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 633, are forcibly stopped or the ball can be lent. In order to convey the above, the logic of the above-mentioned PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, a state in which the logic is started, and the renting device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball is connected from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control section 633a. And outputs it to the CR unit 6 via the external device. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormal is a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed the error. The retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is set to “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” that notifies that the “retry error” is present. Forcibly overwrite the displayed information with the graphic "-" indicating the effect. In order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It outputs to the CR unit 6 via the equal rental device connection terminal plate 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, the payout control program performs an error flag initialization process (step S808), and ends this routine. In this error flag initialization process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is reset. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read-out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. .

  As described above, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141, the internal cause of this retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined. Is generated, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the same process, while the operation switch 954 is operated. Upon occurrence of the occurrence, a value 0 is set in a retry error flag RTERR-FLG and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is initialized. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated in response to this operation, that is, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM to clear the error. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, the initialization is performed when this external factor occurs.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control-side main processing is executed from the time of turning on the power of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) which should have been originally used for canceling the error generated in the payout operation. Operating unit for exhibiting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until Function. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game balls after the lapse of the predetermined time. Here, even if the hall clerk is unfamiliar with the operation of the pachinko machine, as long as the position of the operation switch 954 on the back of the gaming machine is memorized, it is determined according to the timing at which the operation switch 954 is operated. If a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling the error that occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game ball is exhibited, and in accordance with the timing at which the operation switch 954 is operated, the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. If it is within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even when an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can efficiently deal with the switch operation at the time of handling the error and can appropriately cope with the switch operation without any hesitation. The game can be restarted before the player loses his / her willingness to play.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing at the time of the payout operation by ball lending will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money is performed twice) is set as the number of balls to be lent. The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are input information read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and are stored in the read input information. Confirms the logic states of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms that is the interrupt timer cycle.

[15-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read out PRDY signal output setting information pays out the lending ball. 144 is set to the state of the logic of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible. In order to convey this, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, it is started up and held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed by the player, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal is transmitted as the TDS shown in FIG. The value is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal board 869. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the CR unit 6, to which the TDS has been input, pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of balls to be lent. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the payout control MPU 952a to which the BRDY signal has been input determines that the loan request monitoring time HA (from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in this embodiment) from timing H1 as shown in FIG. The predetermined number of balls to be lent by a single payout operation from the CR unit 6 via the game ball renting device connection terminal plate 869 (in the present embodiment, the number of balls is 25) until the set time elapses. , Which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount.) It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

  The CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of balls to be rented. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal board 869 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). The BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the BRQ signal rises before the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the payout control MPU 952a performs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in the present embodiment, In order to notify that one payout operation has started before the elapse of 20 ms ± 1 ms), the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the EXS signal to HI, that is, keeps the activated state. And outputs it to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball rental terminal connection terminal board 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the CR unit 6 to which the EXS has been input is set to the lending instruction monitoring time HC (20 ms to 58 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing H3.
) Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the connection terminal board 869 for renting a game ball and the like, and the signal is lowered and held until the time elapses. (Timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (the ball payout time is set in this embodiment) from the timing H4. The payout is performed to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 by a predetermined number of balls to be lent, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the number of balls to be lent. When the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a with its logic being LOW, that is, being held in a falling state. , EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  The CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of balls to be rented. ), The BRQ is transmitted from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate before the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum request time is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. The signal is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  When the payout control MPU 952a similarly pays out the number of game balls of the remaining 100 yen to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the lending ball number using the method described above, as shown in FIG. The EXS signal which has been raised and held is output at an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while its logic is kept LOW, that is, held down, and EXS signal is connected to a rental terminal connection terminal such as a game ball as EXS. The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is dropped and held (timing H8).

  The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is measured in the timer update process of step S552 in the process at the time of powering on the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

  It should be noted that the payout control MPU 952a, when the ball has run out, the ball is out, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, or the like has occurred, is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (BRDY from the CR unit When the logic is LOW, that is, when the falling edge is held, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the PRDY signal which is started and held from the timing H1 is set to the logic LOW, that is, the falling state. And outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, during communication with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out (not shown). The signal is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 952a, and is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via a game ball etc. rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( When the EXS signal is rising and held), the logic HI is maintained.

As described above, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, and the payout control MPU 952a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount to 100 as the amount. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for two times, game balls with the number of lending balls of 50 are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322.
The clerk of the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 and, for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is set as the number of balls to be rented to the upper plate 321 or the like. In the case of setting to pay out to the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a single payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a money amount, and sets the number of game balls for 500 yen as a money amount as a lending ball number. In the case of setting to pay out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a money amount five times, and calculates the number of game balls of 1,000 yen as a money amount. When the number of balls to be loaned is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount ten times.

[15-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633 allows the CR unit 6 to transmit the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-mentioned rental request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Even if the signal is not output to the payout control board 633 and the signal is not activated, or even if the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects the BRDY to the lending device connection device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the terminal board 869 even if the signal is not dropped or the above-described next request confirmation timing HE elapses. It is output to the payout control board 633 via the ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869, and when the signal is not activated, or when the above-described CR unit is used. Even if the lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869, and its signal is not dropped. In this case, whether or not BRQ and BRDY are normal is confirmed using PRDY and EXS described above. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144 (e) and (f), when the payout control MPU 952a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), the payout control MPU 952a performs a predetermined period JA (in the present embodiment, from this timing J0). , 200 ms ± 1 ms). After the lapse of the time, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, while the falling state is maintained, the output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952 a of the payout control unit 633 a is performed. Then, as a PRDY, a signal is output to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while maintaining the fall state. And output it to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. That (timing J1).

  Subsequently, after a lapse of a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J1, the payout control MPU 952a drops the PRDY signal held from the timing J1 and sets the logic thereof to HI. In other words, while maintaining the booted state, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J2). ).

  Subsequently, after a lapse of a predetermined period JC (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J2, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal that has been started and held from the timing J2 to LOW. In other words, the state is maintained in a lowered state and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J3). ).

  Subsequently, after a lapse of a predetermined period JD (100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J3, the payout control MPU 952a drops the PRDY signal held from the timing J3 and sets the logic thereof to HI. In other words, while maintaining the activated state, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J4). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal, which has been raised and held from the timing J4 to the logic LOW, after a lapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J4. In other words, the state is kept down and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J5). ).

  Subsequently, after a lapse of a predetermined period JF (in the present embodiment, set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal that has been dropped from the timing J5 and held as HI. In other words, the state is maintained in the activated state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J6). ).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF is measured by the timer updating process of step S552 in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) illustrated in FIG. 127.

[16. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control section power-on processing, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control section V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 147 is an example of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the LOCKN signal history generation processing. FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection abnormality determination process, FIG. 152 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process, and FIG. 153 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection abnormality determination process. The timing for outputting the connection confirmation signal It is a timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process, and the LOCKN signal. The history creation processing, connection abnormality determination processing, and connection recovery processing will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The connection abnormality determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit described later is turned on. The process is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the process, and the connection recovery process is executed following the connection abnormality determination process. In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 145. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 102. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of the game effect and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in the bank, is compared, and the effect backup information, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). 1 ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. While the effect backup information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) for Bank0 (1 ms), are copied back to a hot start, and compared. When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information, which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db also in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM). When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Following such a hot start or a cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in (1), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and displays the effect so that the brightness of the LED included in the obtained brightness setting information becomes the brightness. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the device 1600 to turn on the light is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes, as described above, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. And the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the backlight is turned on, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is used. When the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 80%, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the use time of the effect display device 1600 is not performed. Has become. This is because the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the luminance correction program, so that each time the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed, the luminance of the LED is corrected toward 100%. This is to prevent that.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the production control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. I have.

Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the flow returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1.
By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when executing the peripheral control unit steady processing, the value 1 is first set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa of the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the data in the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp driving board side. The first one byte of the game board side emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmission buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK by 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The transmission of the data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board (in the present embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board) every time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board occurs. The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. When there is no such data, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transferred one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of one byte of data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of one byte of data is started one bit at a time.

  Whenever a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers this (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The one-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the one-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the buffer becomes empty.), And the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Is not using a bus, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad by one byte at a time. , And frame decoration via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer, start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 and the like based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is determined as appropriate whether or not to reflect this.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data of one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 107 by the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Output to effect display device 1600. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the effect display device 1600. Note that, in the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the effect display device 1600 is canceled. It has become. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but a so-called dropping of frames occurs. However, the lamp data output processing in step S1012 causes the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The effects by the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later are used to produce various effects from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by the combined music and sound effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs serialized audio data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, The sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the music and sound effects are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a positive signal and a negative signal are used. In addition to the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, music and sound effects matched to various effects are reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the luminescence data arranged in time series that constitute the luminescence mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of luminescence data starting from the first luminescence data is changed to the luminescence of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  In the scheduler updating process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in time series and constituting the electric drive source schedule data includes a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid driving process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the driving data indicated by the pointer, and the next driving specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily specified for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis processing, the effect control program is configured to transmit information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and various information transmitted from the main control substrate 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. I do. In the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing includes, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, and the number of ordinary symbols held. Normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of pending start changes, and a special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (a special winning opening count command) output every time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command indicating the full state shown in FIG. 102 (a second error occurrence command, It is analyzed whether the command is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means), and it is recognized which game state is currently in play. Also, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main frame opening command, a main frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands are various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified into big hit related, and power-on shown in FIG. Various commands, various commands classified for ordinary drawing synchronizing production, various commands classified for normal electric production, various commands classified for notification display shown in FIG. 102, and a door frame opening command described above. , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command), and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error generating command). There are various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to a test, and various commands to be classified into others.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormal display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into the status display shown in FIG. For example, when the command is an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from a normal style of performance accompanying the performance operation, so that, for example, an effect display device. 1600 A visual warning is given to the outside using a (production device), a (production device), and a lamp (production device), or an audible warning is issued to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 even in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, illegal acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 in the calendar information storage unit, which is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer is designated by the pointer of the time-series light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. On the basis of the emission data, the game board side emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various devices provided on the door frame 3. The door-side light-emitting data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board is stored in various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. , And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and displays the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. From the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and outputs the extracted data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the effect display device 1600. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 127 is activated every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 levels from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, the volume is set to mute for substrate volume 0, and set to the maximum volume for substrate volume 6, and Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6.
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as the audio data obtained by serializing the audio data in the audio data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk of a hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 decreases. However, when an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming unaware of the occurrence of an abnormality or the misconduct of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while That the screen played on the effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, or that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also do.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to be backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1) in the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as a request factor of the MA controller 1511ac to copy to the Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the head address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). , And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the copy to the backup second area 1511cc of Bank4 (1fr). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is subject to backup every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular process is executed. The effect control information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), is used as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of the Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511a Specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the contents at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM). From the contents to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), all are copied in order from the head address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the content stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. And the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in the backup second area 1511dc. Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and then sets 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value of 0 is set in the regular processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing. To complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 has been input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed at the moment will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 145 is being executed. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the flag SP-FLG during steady-state processing is equal to 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is to be executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit routine is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 of the time process (peripheral control unit regular process), the value of the steady process flag SP-FLG is set to 1 to indicate that the peripheral control unit regular process is being executed. In addition to transmitting the signal to the signal interruption process, the peripheral control unit performs the regular process by setting the value SP-FLG to 0 in the regular process flag SP-FLG in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process) in FIG. The completion is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, and the routine processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. Or not, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. . In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and the processing is aborted.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process that has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit regular processing has failed, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 145 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed at about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the number of executions of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, if the 1st timer interrupt of the 33rd time occurs and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 145. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are arranged in chronological order. Among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the motor driving board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When serial transmission of the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is stored. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the staging operation unit 400 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series to constitute. The motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral controller 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. A Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for flops substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first one byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor driving clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. The transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The one-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the one-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the buffer becomes empty.), And the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller by one byte. 1511ad, and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port and writing the data, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data designated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the like is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. Peripheral control RAM 15 shown in 127 Set to 1c of the motor driving the substrate side transmission data storage area 1511Cag. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first one byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial drive I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started one bit at a time.

  Each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in effect operation unit 400 are input, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai.

Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110).
In this drawing state information acquisition processing, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 and the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , Ie, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the drawing state is obtained by obtaining the frequency of abnormalities and the state of occurrence of abnormalities between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time it is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, as the effect backup information (1 ms), Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in (1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is peripheral-controlled. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated as a request factor of the MA controller 1511ac to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1ms), and the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1ms) is designated as Bank0 (1ms). The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the bank 3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and Bank0 (1ms). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank4 (1ms). I From the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred in units of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600. Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated in response to this, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 127 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on or the like.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main serial data, and the third byte of the main serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data, and When the sum value, which is the byte, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. Under file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310 is determined. Has been determined. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are defined by the reception command storage area. 1511 cac is stored in the peripheral controller reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second status of the main serial data when storing the data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored value is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the one-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 can be received. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal executed when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 first starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and outputs a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has not been input in this determination, this routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the flow returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input for two microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure notice signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308).
In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the transmitted command at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, backup processing of the command is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 are copied to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified to be copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU. The core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Is specified in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to this point are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc are successively copied in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has been input (step S1312). If a power failure notice signal is input in this determination, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.
When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 is restarted.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically returning from reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, a LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process illustrated in FIG. 147 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the signal is output to convey the fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores one byte (8 bits: the most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, the least significant bit B0, and "B" represent bits). It has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. A request is made to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data) A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is not requested. Is determined.

If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504).
In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, if there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1500 is converted to the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 <-B4, B4 <-B3, B3 <-B2, B2 <-B1, B1 <-Least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read out in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 such as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least bit B0. From the first bit to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

  As described above, each time the LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection error determination process]
Next, a connection abnormality determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 145 will be described.
In this connection abnormality determination processing, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection abnormality determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 105, as illustrated in FIG. 132, stores the peripheral control MPU 1511a illustrated in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the determination is made, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 105, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit. Has the value 0, and the lower four bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no abnormality between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 This is a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined, and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state every time this routine is executed. (Count the cumulative number). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset. On the other hand, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset by an instantaneous power failure or power failure. At this time, the value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative count determined to be in a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an abnormality is the cumulative count. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (greater) than the upper limit value of the cumulative number CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an abnormality. If the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be in an abnormal state has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver This flag indicates whether an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Value 1 indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. An error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset. At this time, the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a description will be given of the connection restoration process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 145. This connection recovery processing is executed subsequent to the connection abnormality determination processing shown in FIG. 151, and is performed by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection restoration process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along with the screen generation schedule data, so that it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is being activated. When the effect has been completed along with the data and the updating of the pointer has been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. Note that in this determination, it is determined whether or not a period during which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a period during which the effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and is performing the demonstration. Can be determined based on the screen generation schedule data, the period during which the start-up screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the waiting state for a customer. During the period in which the demonstration using the effect display device 1600 is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the customer wait state It is not during the period when the demonstration with the effect display device 1600 is performed The (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is terminated as it is, and in step S1540, the routine is executed according to the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and pointer updating has been completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, every time the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 132 is performed, the communication check counter CC-CNT determines whether the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process. The number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state, is counted up. (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an abnormality has occurred once.

  If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is equal to 0 in step S1542, that is, if the number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be in an abnormal state is not found once, this value remains unchanged. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state, the number of times that the routine is ended is one. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be in an abnormal state has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT and the This flag indicates whether an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Value 1 indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is set to 0 when the cumulative number determined to be in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the connection does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is equal to 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state is the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby outputting the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is restored.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred, the communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine ends.
In this communication error display processing, in order to surely notify that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, drawing is performed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Perform processing. For example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a message is displayed, stating "An error has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, during a period in which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer and performs a demonstration. An abnormality has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not the LOCKN signal is output, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal Peripheral control of LOCKN signal from When the LOCKN signal is not input to the PU 1511a, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. , “An error has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.”) To perform processing for displaying in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a notification sound (for example, “the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device”). Is abnormally occurring. ") Is repeatedly performed from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, a process of lighting all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 may be performed.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 107 will be described using the timing chart of FIG. 153.

  First, a brief description will be given of a decorative pattern which is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8. The peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. The variation display of the decorative symbol is executed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102, the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 126, and the like. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 127 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery selected by accepting the game balls to the game is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is completed, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls is paid out every time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the effect display 1600, the central decorative pattern is in the center, and the right side. Is displayed on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. At this time, the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol table of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed in vessel 1406 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in a semi-transparent mode so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left to the lower left of the area, the center decorative pattern rotates from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in a fluctuating manner as if they are, it corresponds to the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern have an opaque mode so that the background image at the position is difficult to visually recognize. In this manner, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is started and stopped and displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120, The left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the first special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, and as shown in FIG. 153, the effect display device shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of 1600 (timing K0), a step in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of S1020, the schedule data storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In order to indicate the number of screen data from the top screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in e, a pointer is set. When the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, that is, when the effect is progressing along with the screen generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data is being activated. While the data is being activated, that is, during the period from when the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started until the variable display is stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 is performed. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is changed to a value between the time when the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the receiver). Even if the number of times that it is determined that the abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed. The connection recovery process is not performed, and the steps in the connection recovery process The 1548 communication error display process is not performed, and, for example, a message such as "A problem has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk" is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, while invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is An image is displayed based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process, the effect is completed along with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the process has been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data has not been activated and the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Warning of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing When the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152 executed as one of the processes proceeds to the process in step S1542 in the same process, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, when the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that the connection with the receiver is in an abnormal state is not found once, the routine is immediately terminated, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, ie, the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the communication and the receiver is at least one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0. Indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the accumulated number of times does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and ends the routine, while the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is terminated. Is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-described communication error display process is performed. Then, the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 are connected. It is determined that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver at least once, and that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the transmitter Performs the process of restoring the connection between the receiver and the When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the connection between has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the abnormality has surely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver). ), The communication error display processing must be performed, and for example, the message “An error has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device in the display area of the effect display device 1600.
Please call a clerk. Is displayed and notified, and a LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  The variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again. Since the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the interval period until the door frame side effect transmitter, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side staging receiver ICSDIC0 for notifying that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data is enabled, and the connection between the door frame-side staging transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, once the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an error, In some cases, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an abnormality has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. As a result, while processing for restoring the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state where the error has occurred has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred), the communication is performed. By always performing the error display processing, for example, the display area of the effect display Ordinary has occurred. Please call your clerk. "Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the like. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed. The processing for restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display processing in step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, “upper plate” is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The message "A problem has occurred in the side liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk." Is displayed, so that the drawing data received from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, an image is displayed based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

  As described above, the variation display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the variation of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is changed again. In the interval period until the display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 for notifying that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is validated. The drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the stop display. From the door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that KN signal is adapted to be disabled. In this case, the combination of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is the information of most interest to the player, and the player is given a profit. Since the player can determine whether or not a big hit game state occurs, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Until the symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, even if the effect image drawn in the display area is disturbed due to noise or the like and cannot be drawn correctly, the effect is not completed. Rather than performing a process of restoring to a state where it can be drawn correctly, the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By indicated, we are most interested with information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the effect display device 1600, or enters a waiting state for a customer. This is significantly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the display device 1600 is performing the demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is output during the period when the start-up screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 or during the period when the effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer and performs a demonstration. Transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, between the connection between the transmitter IC1512d for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the transmitter This is transmitted as an operation check request to check whether an error has occurred in the connection with the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, The two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. The two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to the control MPU 1511a. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450. And outputs a notification image (for example, “An abnormality has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.”) To the effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. And a notification sound to that effect (for example, "The upper LCD Has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is the serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receiving the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effector receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred even though the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not occurred. On the other hand, when the LOCKN signal has not been input, Transmission Abnormally and that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the motor and the receiver can be determined to have occurred. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that an abnormality has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute a communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 131 as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds an abnormality, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the hall clerk or the like by executing a notification process. Before the player plays the game, it is possible to extremely easily check whether or not an abnormality has occurred, and the check is not troublesome. Therefore, abnormalities can be found without trouble.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450 Since this signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. The receiver IC SDIC0 is a door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. If the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication error occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is started. By outputting the image data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate the communication abnormality between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect an abnormality due to a communication abnormality between image communications at an early stage and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the abnormality. Therefore, by detecting and eliminating the abnormality, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Further, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives and outputs an image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is used when the image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received. A LOCKN signal, which is a communication abnormality occurrence signal for notifying that a communication abnormality has occurred between image communication between the side effector receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d, in the vicinity of the peripheral control unit 1511 as an effect control microprocessor The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 because the output can be output to the control MPU 1511a. The upper plate side LCD display Location error has occurred. Please call your clerk. "That generates a message, so that it is possible to inform by displaying the generated image on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an abnormality due to communication abnormality between image communications at an early stage, notifies the fact to a player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1, and notifies the player of the hall clerk or the like. To the pachinko machine 1 or to inform the staff directly at the hall that happened to pass by in front of the pachinko machine 1. Work can be started. Therefore, by detecting and eliminating the abnormality at an early stage, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an error even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an error. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication abnormality between image communications. From the door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side It is possible to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal to the output receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. I have. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. The connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, so that the communication abnormality can be eliminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. This is the case where the connection between the effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred once or more, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication abnormality between the image communications is provided. Door frame side effect from transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect When the connection confirmation signal notifying the start of transmission to the receiver receiver IC SDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the main control board When the main control MPU 1310a of 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 and starts executing the game again, the connection confirmation signal is output. When the output is stopped, and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d renders a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) on the door frame side effect. Transmission to the receiver IC SDIC0 is stopped, and the liquid crystal display controller 15 is stopped. The image 2 of the sound source built VDP1512a generated and is capable of outputting to the door frame side effect for receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is the abnormality elimination signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move in the direction in which the communication abnormality is eliminated. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. When the connection confirmation signal is continuously output only during a period in which the progress of the game is not executed, the main control board 131 Even if the main control MPU 1310a starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 and starts executing the game again, the display screen of The effect distortion (image disorder) progresses in every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to execute the game again and ends (each time period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period)). Then, it can be directed in the direction of cancellation.

  According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 in FIG. 102 and the payout control board 633 in FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port, which is a starting area in which a game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 is provided in the game area 5a toward a game area 5a defined and formed on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 102, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 633 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 580 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 124 payout control MPUs 952a are mounted.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is turned off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG.
When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 125 is performed after the power is turned on, the game-related information stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 110 to perform the operation within the period during which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power on process of FIG. When this is done, a RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information on payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; From the time of power-on processing of the main control side in FIG. If the operation is performed after a period in which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or a period in which the determination process of step S512 in the process of powering on the payout control unit in FIG. 128 is performed after the power is turned on), the payout device 580 An error canceling function of outputting the RWMLR signal of FIG. 136 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. It has both functions.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is performed. The RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 110 for erasing the information related to FIG. 110 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination process in step S512 in the payout control unit power on process shown in FIG. When operated within this period, the RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor is used as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and power-on If the operation is performed after a lapse of a period during which the determination process of step S16 in the time process is performed (or a period during which the determination process of step S512 in the process of powering on the payout control unit in FIG. 128 is performed after the power is turned on), the payout is performed. An error clearing function for outputting the RWMLCR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Therefore, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clearing function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1 by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error canceling function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 3031]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 3031 is provided with various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a big winning port sensor 2403, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first starting port. The sensor 3002 is connected to a magnetic sensor 3003 (to be described later, a magnetic detection sensor 4024). Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. I do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired to obtain an unfair advantage. Unauthorized gaming continues.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and to suppress the illegal action by a light emitting unit, a sound warning, or the like. I have.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine.
The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 3031. As shown in the drawing, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with a voltage of +5 V generated by a +5 V generation circuit 1310 g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when detecting no more than a predetermined value of magnetism, and outputs a voltage when detecting no more than a predetermined value of magnetism. (0 V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 3031 via a connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is off, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. Further, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off when the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the flow of current from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is off, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected not only to the pull-up resistor IR2 but also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 at the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b includes a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 at the previous stage of the panel relay board 3031 via a connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR1 in the preceding stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the magnetic sensor 4024 corresponds to the detection sensor unit, and the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied corresponds to the voltage output unit 4163 connected to the magnetic sensor 4024. The detection circuit section 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and is configured by a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

  In addition, at a stage preceding the detection circuit unit 4164, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit including the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the sensor signal input section 4162 and the detection circuit section 4164 are provided on the panel relay board 3031.

[Detection operation]
In a non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also increased to +12 V (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  FIG. 159 shows the operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above in a table format. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 3031, similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, if the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion, contact resistance is generated. The connector member has a pin contact type and a bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member. The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust and the like easily enter from this portion.

  Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance similarly occurs. For example, when a right-handed game is played, when a small sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific portion of a game area in which a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down is applied to a connector member. However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in a connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 155, when a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. Note that the magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that of a case where the contact of the connector is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which no magnetism is detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, and the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 155, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 provided on the panel relay board 3031, when the contact resistance RR occurs, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 156 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  It should be noted that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is provided at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, near the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the big winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, and the like. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of the present embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that a non-detection state in which the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism (second detection state) is provided between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164. State), a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side. An avoidance unit 4166 that avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 at the stage before the connection. It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged at the subsequent stage. Further, +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR0 is connected to the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Connected to base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the avoidance section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
In a non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state exists, in the above example, when it determines that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a sets the peripheral An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and a process of outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the effect display device 1600, an alarm lamp, a sound, or the like to notify the abnormality.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
In a non-detection state (second state) in which the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. The transistor STR turns on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  In other words, when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the Zener This is applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off. That is, the avoidance section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164.

  The operations of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b at the subsequent stage are the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), and when a contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member or the like, a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is generated. False detection can be prevented.

  Note that, similarly to the related art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command. Is notified by a gaming board-side effect display device 1600, a door frame-side effect display device, a warning display, a voice, or the like, that an illegal game action using the game is performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected. . Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 157 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine according to the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the second embodiment includes main control of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 includes a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, and a second resistor having one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and the other end grounded. And the resistor IR3. 155. When comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 155, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is disposed after the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to a connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured by the resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied and drops.

  Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 at a stage before the connection. ing.

  Further, in the detection circuit unit 4164, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the avoidance section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
In a non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage reduced to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which the magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3 of the avoidance unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoidance unit 4166 are used. Current flows to ground via IR1 and second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
In a non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 157, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and 1 will be applied to one end of the resistor. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1 and further flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3.
That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is substantially grounded. As a result, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 at the subsequent stage of the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operations of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b at the subsequent stage are the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), and when a contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member or the like, a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is generated. False detection can be prevented.

[Embodiment 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 158 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine according to the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than the second voltage and higher than a predetermined voltage lower than the first voltage, and a resistor. It is configured to include IR1, IR4 and IR5. In comparison with the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, the resistors IR4 and IR5 connected in series are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured by the resistances IR4 and IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied and drop.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0. Further, one end of a resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the following transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied to the other end, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
In a non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off, and the transistor ITR2 also turns off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which the magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is increased to + 12V.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit including the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5 of the avoiding unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistors IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR4 of the avoiding unit 4166. Current flows to ground via IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0. As a result, the preceding transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the subsequent stage. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

  When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the latter transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the subsequent stage is reduced to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
In a non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased. Is lifted. In FIG. 158, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  In other words, a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, and a voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage. Is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and the current flows to the ground through the resistors IR4 and IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to ground, and almost no current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Does not flow. Therefore, the preceding transistor ITR0 is not turned on. Also, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on.
As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operations of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b at the subsequent stage are the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), and when a contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member or the like, a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is generated. False detection can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 160, a plurality of open-collector-type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 turns off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on, and the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the provided voltage output unit 4163 is connected to a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercially available, TOSHIBA Corporation). Manufactured).

  Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 3031 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member Any of various sensors, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detecting sensor, A sensor or the like can be applied.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the first to third embodiments. The locations of the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 on the board can be selectively changed and arranged as necessary. Below, several variations of the arrangement example are shown.

[Example 4]
FIG. 161 shows an example in which the detection circuit section 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031. The basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the operation and effect of the avoiding unit 4166 are not different from the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the collector terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the panel relay board 3031, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit section 4164 of the main control board 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 are connected to the connector CON2. Are electrically connected by the

[Example 5]
FIG. 162 shows another example in which the detection circuit section 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is disposed on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output section 4163 and the avoidance section 4166 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 is moved to the main control board 1310, and is provided in front of the detection circuit section 4164. I have. Also in the fifth embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the operation and effect of the avoiding unit 4166 are not different from the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 constituting the avoiding portion 4166 of the panel relay board 3031 and the base terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected by the connector CON2. What is connected.

  In the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 161 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 162, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 have harnesses provided with connector members at both ends (in FIG. 157, they are simply denoted as CON2). ) For electrical connection. For this reason, there is a possibility that contact resistance is generated even in the connector connection portion. In order to avoid erroneous detection of a signal due to the contact resistance, as a modified example of the fourth embodiment, a circuit is provided after the connector member CON2, that is, other than the bull-up resistor NR1 in which +12 V is applied to one end. Another avoiding portion may be provided between the connection point between the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, similarly to the avoiding portion 4166. According to this, erroneous signal detection can be further reduced, and the reliability of signal detection is increased.

  In the present invention, a description is given using an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 is configured by the pull-up resistor IR2 applied to one end and the transistor ITR1 in the fourth and fifth embodiments. This means that, in essence, the one that is more advantageous in control is selected by the difference in the logic (HI level active or LOW level active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected in the subsequent stage. For this purpose, a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit section 4164, and this circuit is provided before the main control input circuit 1310a.

  However, the other end of the bull-up resistor NR1 to which +12 V is applied at one end is connected to the signal line, and the base terminal is connected via the resistor NR2 at the subsequent stage of the signal line, the emitter terminal is grounded, and A circuit in which the main control input circuit 1310a itself in which the collector terminal is connected to an input port (not shown) substitutes for the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, a circuit which functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, that is, the main circuit). However, since the detection can be performed by the control input circuit 1310a), the present invention is sufficiently realized.

[Example 6]
FIG. 163 shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. Note that the signal relay transistor ITR0 has also been moved to the main control board 1310, and is provided in a stage preceding the detection circuit unit 4164. Also in the sixth embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the operation and effect of the avoiding unit 4166 are not different from the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 163, a signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 3031 is connected, and an avoidance section 4166 of the main control board 1310 are formed. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by a connector CON2.

  When the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are configured as circuits as in the above-described fourth to sixth embodiments, the panel relay board 3031 is a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. Irrespective of the type), there is an advantage that it can be shared.

In addition, from the standpoint of assemblability, it is desirable to use a relay board. Even if it is missing, it may be better to connect directly to the main control board 1310 by a connector without providing a circuit element on the relay board from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.
In such a case, the configuration of the seventh embodiment functions suitably.

[Example 7]
FIG. 164 shows an example in which the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. Also in this example, the location of the transistor ITR0 for signal relay is moved to the main control board 1310, and is provided in a stage preceding the detection circuit unit 4164. Also in the seventh embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the operation and effect of the avoiding unit 4166 are not different from the circuit shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 164, the panel relay board 3031 is formed only with a signal line (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relays a signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024.
The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to the connector on the panel relay board 3031. In other words, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control board 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the built-in magnetic detection sensor 4024 is provided at the previous stage of the connection via the connector CON1 and the panel relay board 3031. Of the transistor STR.

  Although FIG. 164 uses the relay board provided with only the connectors (CON3 and CON4), the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using the relay board. You can also.

  Also in the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided, it does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 (because there is no voltage change), so that the connector member When contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding abrasion or the like, erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance can be prevented.

  In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 through a connector CON3 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided on the panel relay board 3031. Are electrically connected to a connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through a connector CON4 provided in the main control board 1310 (represented by a square in the figure). Therefore, there is a possibility that the contact resistance is generated at three places of the connector CON3, the connector CON4 and the connector CON1.

  In consideration of this, the voltage caused by the current flowing through the contact resistance caused by the looseness of the connection portion of the panel relay board 3031 (CON3 and CON4 indicated by squares in the figure) and the contact resistance RR of the connector CON1 portion. Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state, the avoidance unit (the added amount of the voltage due to the contact resistance generated at each of the three connector connection portions described above) is added. 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164. This prevents the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 from being affected, thereby preventing erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of each connector member or the like. Can be.

  Further, in the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], the avoidance unit 4166 is described using the Zener diode ZD0, but the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the Zener diode ZD0 and is described above. The avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 157 (second embodiment) or the avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 158 (third embodiment) can be used.

  Since the panel relay board 3031 according to the seventh embodiment includes only signal lines (for example, printed wiring) that simply relay signals from the detection sensor units, signals from a plurality of detection sensor units are transmitted. There is an advantage that the printed wiring is formed so as to be independently integrated on the panel relay board 3031 and integrated into one connector member, and the main control board 1310 is connected to the connector.

[Electrical connection of detection sensor unit, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, the electrical connection between the detection sensor unit 4000, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 165 is a block diagram mainly showing a basic configuration of electrical connection between the detection sensor unit, the panel relay board, and the main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 is a generic name for various detection sensors arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 3002, and the like. The start-up opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (reference numeral 3003 in FIG. 102), and the like correspond thereto.

  The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which a main control MPU 1310 serving as a control main body is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 is a board that relays a detection signal of the detection sensor unit 4000 to the main control board 1310.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are different from each other in that a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 have a harness provided with connection connectors at both ends. Are electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector members 4501 and 4502 included in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board. A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Positioning positions of panel relay board 3031 and main control board 1310 in a gaming machine]
FIG. 166 is a front view schematically illustrating each example of the arrangement position of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the pachinko machine 1. In FIG. 166 (A) to FIG. 166 (D), the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are the rear part of the game board 5 at a position that is not visible to the player, and are basically an effect display device (for example, , Liquid crystal display device) 1600 (see FIG. 100, not shown in the figure). Reference numeral 180 denotes a handle unit provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like and operated by the player, and reference numeral 303 denotes a handle unit provided in the lower center of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The pressing operation section is pressed by a player for an effect.

  FIG. 166 (A) shows a main control board 1310 disposed in the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and a panel relay board 3031 at the lower rear part of the game board 5 and to the right of the main control board 1310 in front view. 4 shows an arrangement pattern that is arranged. In FIGS. 166 (A) to 165 (D), specifically, a box attached to the rear surface of a plate-shaped transparent game panel 1100 (see FIGS. 100 and 101) that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 having a rectangular shape.

  In FIG. 166 (B), a panel relay board 3031 is arranged in the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is located at the rear lower part of the game board 5 and to the right of the panel relay board 3031 in front view. 4 shows an arrangement pattern that is arranged. FIG. 166 (C) shows a main control board 1310 disposed in the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5, and a panel relay board 3031 at the rear lower part of the game board 5 and to the left of the main control board 1310 in front view. 4 shows an arrangement pattern that is arranged.

  In FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (C), the positional relationship of the panel relay board 3031 with respect to the main control board 1310 in the front-rear direction is the same as the main control board 1310 or in front of the main control board 1310. 3031 is located.

  FIG. 166 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 3031 are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front-rear direction at the center of the lower rear portion of the game board 5. In FIG. 166 (D), a panel relay board 3031 is provided in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D) described above, the layout of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 is determined based on various conditions.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are different from each other in that a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 have a harness provided with connection connectors at both ends. Are electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector members 4501 and 4502 included in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board. A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, the embodiments described below are made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of an arrangement positional relationship between a vibration source and a control board.

[Example of arrangement of avoidance unit]
167 (A) to 167 (C) are diagrams illustrating an example of the arrangement of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. Note that the avoidance unit 4510 has a circuit configuration including an avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoiding portion 4166 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158. In the circuit portion disposed before the avoiding portion 4166, the connection state of the connector member is loosened, and contact resistance is generated in this portion. By doing so, even if the voltage is added due to the contact resistance, the effect of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit disposed downstream of the avoidance unit 4166 is avoided.

  As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 increases due to contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D), the layout of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the game board 5 is usually determined from various conditions. At that time, it is often not taken into consideration to arrange the respective substrates so as to avoid being affected by the vibration. On the other hand, as the influence of the vibration source, in addition to the above-mentioned right collision of the game ball and the collision between the game ball and the game ball arranged in the right area of the game area 5a, for example, an effect button (operation button) , A hitting operation of a hitting hammer of a ball launching device, a sound from a high-output speaker, and the like.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and a contact resistance is generated by loosening of a connector member, and an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to the contact resistance. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4510 is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 or the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source.

  FIG. 167 (A) illustrates an example in which an avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay board 3031. The connector is provided by applying vibration to a connector member 4501 that electrically connects the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 3031. Even if the member 4501 is loosened and the contact resistance is generated by the loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the addition operation of the voltage due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor 4000. It is.

  FIG. 167 (B) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the main control board 1310, and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310. The connector member 4502 or 4503 is loosened by the addition, and even if a contact resistance occurs due to the loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage adding action by the contact resistance, so that the connector member 4502 or 4503 is relayed from the panel relay board 3031. This is to avoid erroneous detection of the output signal.

  FIG. 167 (C) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on each of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor 4000 to the panel relay board 3031. Vibration is applied to the member 4501, and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310, whereby the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502, or the connector is provided. Even if the member 4503 is loosened and a contact resistance is generated due to the looseness, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids a voltage adding action due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. And a signal relayed and output from the panel relay board 3031. It is to avoid erroneous detection of.

[Specific example of vibration source and arrangement example of avoidance unit 4510]
FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (F) are diagrams showing specific examples of the vibration source in the pachinko machine 1 and arrangement examples of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. In each of the drawings, a member serving as a vibration source is indicated by hatching. FIG. 168 (A) to FIG. 168 (C) show a game in which, when a right-handed game is played, a large number of right-handed game balls continuously concentrate and flow down in the right area of the game area 5a. An example is shown in which a ball guiding path unit 4200 is provided, and when fine sliding wear occurs due to vibration from the game ball guiding path unit 4200 being applied to the connector member, there is a possibility that contact resistance may be generated. I have.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (A), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handing, the game ball guiding path unit 4200 serving as the vibration source is controlled by a panel. Since the relay board 3031 is arranged close to the relay board 3031, the connector member [the connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 167 (A)] of the panel relay board 3031 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (B), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handing, the game ball guiding path unit 4200 serving as the vibration source is mainly Since the control board 1310 is arranged close to the control board 1310, the connector member [the connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167 (B)] of the main control board 1310 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (C), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handing, the game ball guiding path unit 4200 serving as the vibration source is mainly Considering that both the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are arranged close to each other, both of the connector members [the connector members 4501, 4502, and 4503 shown in FIG. 167 (C)] vibrate. Susceptible to. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on each of the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (C)].

  FIG. 168 (D) illustrates a case where the vibration source is the pressing operation unit 303. For example, when the player concentrates on the game and performs a beating operation by pressing the pressing operation unit 303, or a message of “continuous hit” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during a specific effect, and the player recognizes the message. Thus, when the vibration source is the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 for the effect, such as when the player continuously hits the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 becomes the vibration generation source. A case is assumed. In FIG. 168 (D), since the main control board 1310 is arranged close to the pressing operation unit 303 serving as a vibration source, the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. The connector member 4503] shown in (B) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (B) to 168 (D), the invention is not limited to the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (D). The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 168 (E) shows a case where the vibration source is the ball hitting hammer 543 of the ball firing device 540 (see FIG. 10 for the specific arrangement position). For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the hitting force (elasticity) of the game ball fired by the hitting hammer 543 of the ball firing device 540 increases, and the impact at this time becomes a vibration source. In FIG. 168 (E), since the panel relay board 3031 is arranged close to the hitting hammer 543 serving as a vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. A) The connector member 4501] shown in FIG. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  167 (A) is not limited to the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (E), but may be the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (B) to 168 (D). Alternatively, the arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 168 (F) shows a case where the vibration source is a main body frame speaker 622 for sound output (refer to FIG. 79 for a specific arrangement position). For example, a loud sound effect is output from the main frame speaker 622 to excite the gaming state at the time of a specific effect, and it is assumed that the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In such a case, in FIG. 168 (F), since the panel relay board 3031 is arranged close to the main body frame speaker 622 which is a vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501] shown in (A) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

  The invention is not limited to the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (F), and may be the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (A), 168 (B), and 168 (D). 167 (A) to 167 (C) can be adopted.

  The member serving as the vibration source described above is not limited to one in the pachinko machine 1. For example, a member that becomes a vibration source according to a game state, such as a device including a game ball guideway unit 4200 and a hitting hammer 543, and a device including a game ball guideway unit 4200 and a pressing operation unit 303. Is also expected to change. That is, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of members serving as vibration sources is assumed. Even in that case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) can be adopted.

  As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 or the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. In addition, by properly arranging the avoiding unit 4510, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member serving as a vibration source, thereby causing a contact resistance, the detection sensor unit based on the contact resistance can be used. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the 4000 or the panel relay board 3031.

  As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance similarly occurs. For example, when a right-handed game is played or the like, when vibrations from a specific portion of the game area in which a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down are applied to the connector member, this causes contact resistance. There is a fear.

  When a current flows through the contact resistance generated as a result of this, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance rises, and an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit unit. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor is erroneously detected.

Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance.
As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor increases. However, usually, the layout of the panel relay board and the main control board in the game board is determined from various conditions. At that time, it is often not taken into consideration to arrange the respective substrates so as to avoid being affected by the vibration. On the other hand, as the influence of the vibration source, besides the above-mentioned collision between the game board and the game ball by right-handing, for example, by the hitting operation of the effect button, the hitting operation of the hitting hammer of the ball launching device, A loud sound by an output speaker may be used.

  Therefore, the embodiments described below are made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of a positional relationship with a vibration source.

  The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1]
A device provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on a game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of a game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In order to solve the above-mentioned problem,
In the right area of the game area into which the game ball is driven, a game ball guide path unit is provided in which the game ball continuously right-handed by the right hit of the game ball flows down,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the game ball guiding path unit, and one of the main control board and the panel relay board is provided with a contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit for avoiding the voltage adding action is provided.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 1], the avoidance unit is suitably applied to one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the game ball guiding path unit serving as a vibration source. Can be arranged. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member serving as a vibration source, thereby causing a contact resistance, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 2] includes a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on a game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of a game, and relays a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In a gaming machine provided with a panel relay board,
It has an operation button that allows a predetermined operation for production by a player,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is arranged in proximity to the operation button, and a voltage is added to one of the main control board and the panel relay board by a contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoiding unit for avoiding the action is provided,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of [Means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button serving as the vibration source. be able to. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member serving as a vibration source, thereby causing a contact resistance, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 3]
A game comprising: a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on a game board; a main control board for controlling the progress of the game; and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. On the machine,
A ball launching device that launches a game ball toward the inside of the game area in response to an operation on the hitting handle, and at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is disposed in proximity to a hitting hammer of the ball launching device, and a contact resistance generated in the connector member is provided on one of the main control board and the panel relay board. An avoiding unit for avoiding the voltage adding action by
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of [Means 3], the avoidance unit is mounted on one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship between the ball launching apparatus serving as the vibration source and the hitting hammer. Can be placed properly. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member serving as a vibration source, thereby causing a contact resistance, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 4]
A game comprising: a detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on a game board; a main control board for controlling the progress of the game; and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. On the machine,
It has a speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the speaker, and a voltage adding action to one of the main control board and the panel relay board due to a contact resistance generated in the connector member. Is provided with an avoidance unit for avoiding
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of [Means 4], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high-output speaker as the vibration source. can do. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member serving as a vibration source, thereby causing a contact resistance, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

  According to the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, it is possible to appropriately dispose the avoiding unit on one of the panel relay board and the main control board, in consideration of the positional relationship of the game member serving as the vibration source. it can. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member serving as a vibration source, thereby causing a contact resistance, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the panel relay board.

  Not limited to the above-described circumstances, in recent gaming machines, generally, a plurality of movable effectors (movable auditors) electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid used for effecting are provided. . At present, the volume and operating range of these movable characters tend to increase, and the operating speed and, depending on the operating range, the operating speed, also tend to increase, and the moving method is becoming complicated at present. Therefore, it is conceivable that the movable role itself becomes a vibration generation source, and the connector member is loosened, thereby causing a contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance.

  By the way, when a plurality of movable characters are not at the initial position, there is a possibility that a predetermined effect cannot be started normally.

  Therefore, in order to reliably grasp the initial position of the movable effector, an origin position detection sensor (a photosensor comprising a pair of a light emitting type and a light receiving type is often used) is used. In the model, these detection signals are fed back to the control subject and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the control board for production and the drive board is also realized by the connector members and the harnesses connecting them.

  Although illustration is omitted since many concrete illustrations have already been carried out, the arrangement positions of the movable staging objects on the game board surface are, for example, behind the upper part (initial position) of the game area 5a and behind the left side of the game area 5a. (Initial position), an effect movable body divided into right and left at the center of the game area 5a is united at the center of the game panel, or an initial position at the lower center of the game area 5a (behind the special winning opening unit, etc.). Depending on the type and version of the game machine, the location of the game machine may be changed in various ways in order to promote the special characteristics of the gaming machine, such as when the object moves upward.

  By the way, if the transmission of the drive data and the signals for operating the drive data and the origin detection signal cannot be transmitted and received correctly, it is assumed that not only the error detection may not be performed but also the erroneous transmission may occur. . Here, it is considered that the above-described avoiding unit 4166 is provided on the drive board at the subsequent stage in the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor, or provided on the signal input side of the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) on the control side. You.

  As described above, even in the case of performing an effect in which at least two movable members are rapidly combined, it is expected that the vibration due to the collision at that time may be transmitted intensely. In this case, it is necessary to take appropriate measures. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), when performing a hot heat effect in which the left and right movable members indicated by hatching unite at the center of the game board 5, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board and the left and right It is necessary to consider the location of the sensor for detecting the origin position of the effect movable body.

[Electrical connection of origin point detection sensor unit, drive board and peripheral control board that controls it]
FIG. 169 (A) shows a basic configuration of mainly electrical connection of a peripheral control board 1510, a panel relay board 3031 (drive board), an origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting an origin position of a driving means and a movable effector. FIG.

  The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect, and is a substrate on which a peripheral control unit 1511 serving as an effect control main body is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 (drive board) is also a board that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor unit 4000 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In FIG. 169, a peripheral control board 1510 performs a control main body for an effect, and a panel relay board 3031 (drive board) outputs drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to a drive source and at least a movable effector. The information of the initial position (origin position detection sensor) is input, and the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on the information. The panel relay board 3031 (drive board) is for supplying a drive current corresponding to the drive signal to the drive means, and is also an origin for detecting an initial position for supplying a drive current corresponding to the movable effector. The position detection is transferred to the panel relay board 3031 (drive board). As shown in FIG. 169 (A), transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by connector members 4504, 4505, and 4506.

  The positional relationship of the movable member for producing the vibration source and the positional relationship of the connector member connecting the peripheral control board 1510 or the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) and the origin position detection sensor are various. The avoidance unit 4150 is arranged in consideration of an appropriate effect of whether the connector connection is loosened due to the vibration. As shown in FIG. 169 (A) or FIG. 169 (B), they can be provided as appropriate. As a result, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member serving as a vibration generation source and a contact resistance is generated due to the vibration, a signal error from the origin position detection sensor 4000 or the drive board due to the contact resistance is caused. It is possible to avoid detection.

  When operating the movable role, the loose connection of the connector in the drive means, the origin position detection sensor unit, the drive board, and the peripheral control board, which were connected by the connector, was regarded as a problem. , A ball launching device, and a speaker are also considered as vibration sources.

[Grouping of multiple movable characters for staging]
As described above, a gaming machine is generally provided with a plurality of movable effectors (movable roles) electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid used for effecting. The volume and operating range of these movable members tend to increase, and the operating speed and, depending on the operating range, also tend to increase, and the moving methods are becoming more complicated. Furthermore, the movable ranges of different movable roles may intersect.

  For example, when an abnormality occurs in one of the plurality of movable auditoriums, for example, not returning to the respective initial positions where the operation starts when the production starts, the operation state of the other movable auditoriums is almost considered. It is not at present. If the return operation is performed only by the movable movable object in which the abnormality has occurred without considering the other movable movable objects, there is a possibility that the movable movable object may interfere with the other movable movable objects. In such a case, there is a possibility that the player may have a feeling of anxiety and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  Here, in order to use the movable auditorium for the effect, it is necessary to restore all the movable auditoriums to the initial position. In addition, when the role is unintentionally stopped at a location other than the initial position for some reason, the operation of restoring the movable role to the initial position is performed. If the movable range of movable movable objects does not intersect as in the above, when performing a recovery operation, all movable movable objects are restored to the initial position by physically interfering with other movable active materials. May not be able to do so. In such a case, large vibrations and the like that are different from normal may occur due to physical interference of the movable role. However, since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided as described above, In the substrate 1510, erroneous detection of the detection signal of the sensor can be avoided.

  Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to surely restore a plurality of characters to their initial positions, movable characters whose operating ranges physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group. The movable characters in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the operation of restoring the movable characters in the group to their respective initial positions, which are the positions where the operations for starting the production start. By performing the return operation in a predetermined operation sequence as described above, it is possible to surely perform recovery from a position other than the initial position.

  In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable characters is movable within an operation range from an initial position at which the operation for the effect starts to an operation position until the operation for the effect ends. In the peripheral control board 1510, each of the plurality of movable characters is divided into a plurality of groups in which the operation ranges of the respective movable characters do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, the operation ranges are mutually different. Includes a number of movable objects that interfere.

In addition, each of the plurality of movable characters is provided with an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting at least an initial position set in advance for each of the movable characters. In addition, in addition to the initial position detection sensor that can detect the operation start position for the effect, the position detection sensor may further include a position detection sensor that detects the middle position of the operation range or the end point position of the operation range. Good.
Peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined position as described above (initial position, intermediate position, or end position) even for one of a plurality of movable characters in a group including a plurality of movable characters whose operation ranges interfere with each other. When there is an abnormality that is not detected, the movable auditors do not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the initial position where each movable auditorium becomes the start position of the operation for the production start. In this manner, all movable characters in the group are restored to their initial positions in accordance with a predetermined operation sequence.

  FIG. 170 is a front view conceptually showing, for example, a plurality of movable auditoriums for presentation arranged in the back effect unit 3100 and grouping of the plurality of movable auditors. As shown in FIG. 170, an accessory group 01 (reference numeral 5000) is provided at the center of the pachinko machine 1, and an accessory group 02 (reference numeral 5002) is provided at the right side of the pachinko machine 1. An accessory group 03 (reference numeral 5004) is provided on the left side of the machine 1, an accessory group 04 (reference number 5006) is provided substantially at the upper center of the pachinko machine 1, and at a lower center of the pachinko machine 1. Is provided with an accessory group 05 (reference numeral 5008). That is, the pachinko machine 1 has five accessory groups.

  The five accessory groups 01 to 05 do not physically interfere with each other within the operation range. More specifically, the character group 01 is composed of a mask character, a body deformation left character, a body deformation right character, a body storage-appearing character, an upper liquid crystal driving character, and a lower liquid crystal driving character. I have. The role group 02 is composed only of the right shoulder role, the role group 03 is composed only of the left shoulder role, the role group 04 is composed only of the face role, and the role group 05 is composed only of the pop-up role. Have been.

  Accordingly, movable objects that physically interfere with each other in the operation range for the effect are in the same group. In the above example, the masked mask belonging to the character group 01, the torso deformed left character, the torso deformed right character, the torso storage-appearing character, the upper liquid crystal driving character, and the lower liquid crystal driving character are different from each other in the operation range. Are considered to interfere with each other.

[Operation of restoring movable accessory to initial position (referred to as accessory correction operation)]
If even one of the movable characters in the character group has an abnormality, all the movable characters in the group are operated in a predetermined operation sequence and restored to the initial position. For example, at the time of a change in the state or at the start of the change, the state of the photo of all the motors is checked. The accessory is restored to the correct position using the motor sequence data for performing the correction operation for all the accessories.

  In this embodiment, as for the accessory groups 02 to 05, only one movable accessory belongs to each accessory group. Does not physically interfere with each other, and the accessory correction operation may be performed in parallel for each accessory group. As for the accessory group 01, the number of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01 is six. Therefore, it is determined in advance that the movable accessories in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the initial position. Must be performed in the specified operation sequence.

  In the following, an example of the accessory correction operation in the accessory group 01 will be described. In this example, when there is an abnormality in which the initial position is not detected even in one of the plurality of movable characters belonging to the character group 01, the peripheral control board 1510 physically operates during the restoration operation to the initial position. All movable members in the group are operated according to a predetermined operation sequence so as not to interfere with each other, and are restored to their initial positions.

  More specifically, when it is determined that at least one movable accessory in the accessory group 01 is a photo abnormality, all the accessories in the group stop operating. In addition, the photo abnormality means that the movable accessory has not returned to a predetermined initial position. The accessory correction operation in the group is performed not only by using the movable accessory located at the location where the problem occurs, but also by using predetermined accessory correction motor sequence data, and by using all the movable roles in the group to which the movable accessory having the problem belongs. By restoring the objects to their initial positions, the problematic movable object is restored to the correct initial position.

  The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the drive sequence of the driven motors and their operation times (in other words, the drive start timing and the drive end timing). The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 Is stored in In the case of the above-mentioned character group 01, there are six movable characters, and the motors as drive sources for driving these six movable characters are motor A (masked member) and motor B (body deformation). Left character), motor C (body deformed right character), motor D (body storage-appearing character), motor E (upper liquid crystal driving character), motor F (lower liquid crystal driving character) I do.

  When performing the restoration operation to the initial position irrespective of the role group, the motors to be driven may be driven one by one in sequence, but this is not a limitation. If no mechanical interference can occur, a plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the driving may be performed together with the driving start timing shifted, or a plurality of driving may be performed simultaneously.

  For example, assume that a photo abnormality has been detected for the trunk storage-appearing accessory (motor D). FIG. 171 is a timing chart in the case of performing a recovery operation to the initial position performed at this time as an example. In FIG. 171, the restoration operation to the initial position has been started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is driven first, and at time t1, the driving of the motor A is stopped.

  At the same time, that is, at the time t1, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven. Thereafter, at time t2, the motors E and F are simultaneously driven. Thereafter, at time t3, the motors B and C are simultaneously stopped. Thereafter, at time t4, the motors E and F are simultaneously stopped. At the same time t4, the motor D is driven. Then, at the time t5, the driving of the motor D is stopped. That is, the restoration operation to the initial position has been completed at time t5. The stop of the driving of each motor is conditioned on the photo detection being normal.

  When two or more character groups are performing an operation of restoring to the initial position (referred to as a character correction operation), different groups may physically interfere with each other in the movable range of the movable character. In the case where there is no, the accessory correction operation may be performed on two accessory groups in parallel.

  Also, when one accessory group is performing an operation of restoring to the initial position (referred to as an accessory correction operation), for other accessory groups that do not interfere with each other, the accessory group performing the accessory correction operation Irrespective of this, the operation for the effect may be performed to continue the effect. By doing in this way, it is not necessary to interrupt the effect using the movable role as a gaming machine, and it is possible to continue the effect.

  Furthermore, it is necessary to perform the accessory correction operation in this accessory group due to an abnormality in one of the accessory groups. The effect may not be performed, but the effect may be performed only by the movable characters of other character groups. Then, after the effect of only the movable role of the other role group is completed, the role correction operation of the role group determined to need to perform the role correction operation is performed. Also in this case, the effect using the movable role as the gaming machine does not need to be interrupted, and the effect can be continued.

[Start timing for performing the restoration operation to the initial position]
The start timing of the restoration operation of the accessory to the initial position is when the power is turned on, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation ends, the big hit opening, the big hit ending, the demonstration starts, the demonstration ends, the door opens, the door closes, etc. Conceivable.

  When the power is turned on, it is necessary to always perform the property correction operation of all the property groups. For this reason, until the accessory correction operation at the time of turning on the power is completed, a notice effect at the time of the change and an accessory effect operation related to the effect are not performed. The start timing of the accessory correction operation related to the notice and the effect at the time of the change is valid from the next change when the accessory correction operation at the time of turning on the power is completed. Also, the accessory correction operation at power-on is always executed for all the accessories, regardless of whether each of the accessories is at each origin.

  When the power is turned on, the accessory correction operation includes, for example, (1) performing a minimum operation of the accessory on the side opposite to the initial position and removing the photo. (2) Next, the accessory is moved to the initial position to detect a photo. (1) and (2) are executed for all the characters. According to this, it is possible to surely execute the rendering operation by the movable auditorium during the game after the game is started.

  Also, regarding the point at which the start timing of the accessory correction operation of the accessory group is the big hit ending, in the case where there are six movable accessories like the accessory group 001, the change of the accessory group 001 during the big hit game is performed. Although it takes some time to perform the accessory correction operation, since the big hit game itself has been completed, the player can be reassured that the accessory correction operation of the accessory group 001 is not involved in the game.

[Retry during character correction operation]
At the time of performing a role effect, performing an initial operation at power-on, or performing a position correction operation to move the position to the origin (photo side), the photo cannot be detected. For example, movable movable objects may collide with each other. If it does not work, it counts 1 and, when the count reaches a predetermined number of times consecutively, for example, a total of 5 counts, until the next power supply is turned on again, the role that includes the photo-abnormality role and the role The entire object group is immovable. Regarding the count of five times, the count becomes five consecutive times, so that even if the photo detection becomes normal (detected) even once, the count number returns to “0”.

  When the retry operation of the above-mentioned accessory correction operation is performed and a photo is detected, the state is restored to a state where a normal effect is performed. If it cannot be detected, the movable object of another character group that can perform the production operation normally is not performed, without performing the characteristic correction operation of the character group determined to need to perform the character correction operation. The production may be performed by proxy.

In addition, when performing the accessory correction operation, if the number of times the photo cannot be detected even if the operation of moving the movable accessory to the origin (photo side) continues to reach a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the photo is abnormal. In the above example, the abnormal character and the entire character group including the character are unmovable. You may comprise so that a clerk can change to arbitrary times.
This makes it possible to set an appropriate number of retries on the hall side when an abnormality occurs in the accessory due to the discovery of a defect after shipment or deterioration over time, and the like, and it becomes necessary to deal with the abnormality. For example, in the case where photo abnormalities occur frequently, by setting the number of retries to be less than the standard number, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a complicated retry operation is observed by the player and the interest of the player is reduced. It becomes possible.

Whether or not the retry operation is required to be performed for movable movable objects in the accessory group may be set for each type of the accessory group. In this case, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the main control board 1310 performs not only the production by the movable role unrelated to the main game (game contents directly related to the game) but also the main game (the auxiliary There is a type that performs an effect by a movable role related to (game contents related to). When a failure that cannot be restored to the origin position occurs in any of a plurality of movable characters in the character group, a retry operation is performed for a movable character in the character group that does not significantly hinder the game. It may not be necessary. On the other hand, an effect by a movable role related to the main game (game contents related to the hitting) is notified in advance by an effect that a big hit is likely to be made, or an effect that is likely to be changed is notified in advance by an effect. In the case of an accessory group including a movable accessory, a retry operation is performed when a failure that cannot be restored to the origin position occurs in any of the movable accessories in this accessory group.
By doing so, it is expected that the player can be relieved, and the effect of suppressing the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  Alternatively, whether to perform the retry operation may be set depending on the type of effect to be performed. For example, in the case of using a movable role for production with the aim of enhancing the interest of the game by directing a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as during a big hit game, etc., for the role group to which the movable role used belongs, Perform a retry operation. On the other hand, in the case of a normal gaming state or a reach state with a low degree of expectation, it is also possible not to perform a retry operation for movable movable objects which are not related to the main game (game contents directly related to a hit). It is.

[Notification of anomalous movement of movable accessory when photo abnormality is detected]
It is conceivable to perform some kind of notification when the movable accessory breaks down (including when the wiring connected to control the accessory is disconnected). When the movable accessory breaks down, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, "It is a failure of the accessory" in a belt shape. The notification is started when the movable accessory is in the accessory stopping process (counting 5 times) when the photo is abnormal.

  In addition, regarding the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, in addition to the display, the notification may be performed by sound. In the notification of the failure, a method of combining the sound and the display according to the type of the failure, etc. May be changed.

  In addition, when not only a plurality of movable roles or the board surface, but also, for example, a movable body provided in a frame fails, the movable role or the movable body may be individually notified, The notification may be made collectively. At this time, in the case of individually notifying, the staging display device may display them side by side so that the fault location can be specified. May be notified that the device has failed.

  In addition to the failure of the movable role and movable body, for example, when the RAM is initialized, the RAM clear notification sound is made to sound for a predetermined period, but this is different from the notification related to the effect. When the situations to be notified overlap, it is preferable to give priority to the RAM clear notification as a situation in which it is necessary to give priority to sound, especially for voice. At this time, after the RAM clear notification sound is emitted for a predetermined period, the accessory failure is notified.

[Another response when detecting photo abnormalities]
As described above, as a response to a movable movable object breakdown, even if a local object correcting operation, which is an operation of restoring to the initial position, or an operation of performing the local object correcting operation and moving to the origin is performed, When detection is not possible, the retry operation is performed with the predetermined number of times as the upper limit, but if the photo still cannot be returned to the origin and photo detection is not possible even after retrying the predetermined number of times, the property of the malfunctioning property group has failed. An example will be described in which a character is left as it is in a failure state, and for a character in a character group in which no failure has occurred, the effect operation of the character is continued.

  As already described in the block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 102, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5. And a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and the respective controls are shared. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on a command from the main control board 1310, and controls each effect device based on a command from the peripheral control unit 1511. Is performed. Although not shown in detail, a peripheral control unit 1511 for performing effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5. A game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or For transmitting a drive signal to the drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the like. Door-side drive light emission comprising side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is effected from the serial I / O port for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512 and outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front presentation unit 2600 and the back presentation unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. The detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Accordingly, in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, whether or not all of the characters constituting the character groups 01 to 05 are at the reference position, that is, an abnormality occurs in the characters constituting the character groups 01 to 05. Determine if it has occurred.
Then, when it is determined that all the characters constituting the character groups 01 to 05 are at the reference position and no abnormality has occurred in any of them, the control of the normal character is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 162, for example, in the role group 01, a mask role, a body deformation left role, a body deformation right role, a body storage-first appearance role, an upper liquid crystal drive role, a lower shape It is composed of a liquid crystal driving accessory and the like. For example, depending on the location of the abnormality when an abnormality has occurred in the torso deformed left character, the stop position of the torso deformed left character hinders the restoration operation of the torso deformed right character to the origin position, Even if the retries are repeated many times, all the characters cannot be returned to the home position, which may be an obstacle that cannot be returned. At this time, a flag indicating that it is in a non-recoverable state is provided for each character group in a RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511, and 0 is stored when the pachinko machine 1 is started. Is set to 1 in the flag corresponding to the non-recoverable accessory group.

Here, as described above, the respective accessory groups are grouped so as not to physically interfere with each other. Therefore, even if one of the accessory groups is in the non-returnable state, it is possible to continue driving the other accessory groups.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the role group in the non-returnable state is left as it is, and the role production is continued using the role belonging to the other role groups.

  Specifically, a flag indicating a non-recoverable state is read from a RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511. If the flag corresponding to any of the character groups is 0, it is determined that no irreversible failure has occurred in any of the character groups, and the origin return operation is performed. Continue with the character production.

  When 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to any of the accessory groups, it is determined that an irrecoverable failure has occurred in the accessory group. In this case, the process of stopping the continuation of the return operation and stopping the operation is performed for the belongings belonging to the combination group in which the flag is set to 1 and an unrecoverable failure has occurred. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary consumption of power due to improper operation of the motor and failure of the accessory by repeatedly performing the return operation despite the inability to return.

  Here, the accessory may be an accessory that performs a staging operation by operating a member, but in addition to the operation of the member, in addition to the operation, a light emitting member is provided on the member of the accessory. It is also possible to perform an effect by emitting light, or to form the accessory itself with a translucent member, and to perform an effect of causing the accessory itself to emit light by a light emitting member such as an LED provided inside the accessory. is there.

  Here, when the drive signal for driving the accessory and the light emission signal for emitting an LED for decorating the accessory are provided as separate systems, and both can be independently controlled, an irrecoverable failure has occurred. For the belongings belonging to the role group, the continuation of the return operation is stopped and the operation is stopped, but even if the operation of the role is stopped, the light emitting member provided in the role or the role The light emission control for emitting the light itself can be performed without affecting the operation of the accessory and the like, and thus can be continuously performed. At this time, the effect control which should be performed may be performed. Thus, it is possible to continuously perform a certain level of effect by continuing the light emission control even in the accessory belonging to the accessory group in which an unrecoverable failure has occurred.

  Further, as another method, for a role belonging to the role group in which an irreversible failure has occurred, the operation of the role is stopped and the light emitting member provided in the role or the role itself is made to emit light. In the light emission control, instead of the effect control that should be performed, the light emission control may be performed according to the location of the failure that cannot be recovered and the type of the failure. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the location where the failure has occurred and the type of the failure, based on the light emission mode of the stopped accessory.

  Then, with respect to the role group whose flag is 0, that is, the role group belonging to the role group in which an irreversible failure has not occurred, the normal role operation control is performed. If a failure occurs in some of the characters and the entire character operation control is stopped, the operation of the character will be completely stopped and the interest of the player may be reduced. By leaving the property belonging to the failed property group as it is and driving the property group of the property group that does not physically interfere with the property of the unrecoverable property group, As compared with the case where the operation of the accessory is completely stopped, it is possible to perform the accessory operation control that enhances the interest of the player.

  As described above, regarding the notification of the abnormal operation of the movable auditorium, when the movable auditorium fails (not only the failure of the movable auditorium itself, but also the wiring connected to control the movable auditorium is broken. It is conceivable that some kind of notification is performed. As an example of the notification when the movable accessory breaks down, there is a method in which the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, “It is a failure of the accessory” in a belt shape. In addition, when a plurality of abnormalities are detected, such as an abnormality of the connector and an abnormal operation of the movable accessory as described later, each of the plurality of detected abnormalities can be displayed. It is also possible to display the abnormalities in descending order of importance.

The detection that the movable character has failed and cannot be returned is counted when the photo cannot be detected even after performing the character correction operation and moving to the origin, and then retrying several times Do. If photo detection is still not possible even after the predetermined number of times (five times as an example) of the accessory property correction operation, it is determined that the state cannot be restored, and the notification is started when the state becomes unrecoverable.
Further, in the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, not only the notification by the display on the effect display device 1600 but also the notification by sound may be performed. In addition, as a method of notification, notification by display, notification by sound, and notification by a combination of both may be mixed, and as a method of selecting the notification method, a method of combining sound and display according to the type of failure. Etc. may be changed. Further, the notification by vibration may be performed using a vibration speaker described later. For example, when a plurality of abnormalities are detected, a setting can be made such that abnormalities with a high degree of importance are notified by display on the effect display device 1600, and abnormalities with a low degree of importance are notified by sound.

In such an embodiment, it is not preferable that notification by display or notification by sound is performed more than necessary during the game in which the game is being played. Therefore, it is preferable that the notification of the failure of the movable auditorium be performed only by display during the game, or that the volume be reduced even if the notification is by sound.
Also, in this case, it is not necessary to consider surrounding players or the like before the start of the hall business that is not being played. Therefore, for the purpose of notifying the persons involved in the hall, programming and setting in advance to check the operation of movable movable objects at power-on are performed, and in this case, both display and sound are used to make it easy to understand The person in charge of the hall may be notified. As described above, the notification mode may be set for the period.

There are various types of halls, such as large stores where hundreds of tables are installed, and small stores with a small number of tables. In particular, when the number of persons involved in the hall is small in a large store with a large number of units, it may not be possible to confirm the accessory correction operation for all units one by one. Even in such a case, the occurrence of a failure can be reported in a more easily understandable manner by setting the display and sound to inform the person in charge of the hall in an easy-to-understand manner as described above. Then, when it is determined that a failure has occurred in the movable auditorium, it is possible to provide a repair for the failure by re-turning on the power or repairing the power again by a person involved in the hall. .

Further, similar to the above-described inspection (operation check) of the vibrating speaker during the RAM clear notification period, it is also possible to execute the accessory correction operation upon receiving the RAM clear processing and the RAM clear notification command. It is.

  In addition, an abnormality such as not returning to the origin due to, for example, a movable accessory provided at the lower part of the gaming machine (for example, a popup accessory of the accessory group 05) sandwiching a foreign object such as a game ball B or dust. Is detected by the vibrating speaker 354, the vibration may be transmitted to the movable accessory, and the control unit may execute an origin position restoring process for prompting the movable accessory to return to the origin position. Good.

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, in the sound data creation processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 16 ms), description will be given later regarding automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly described.

  2. Description of the Related Art In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from speakers in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, thereby realizing an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, there are some reach that should improve the player's expectation, and others that output various sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is assigned to a corresponding predetermined default. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be able to be allocated to the vacant channel due to the channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound effects because it was not possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing the available channels and increasing the interest of the player is to make the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 a pair of top central speakers 462. Each channel is dynamically allocated and managed for each sound to be output from the top side speaker 464 and the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, while the number of sound combinations to be output is determined by each channel. When the maximum number of channels exceeds 16 (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified), each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority order. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output through each dynamically allocated channel within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 172 (A) and 172 (B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison object with the present embodiment. FIG. 172 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. It should be noted that the “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 172 (B) shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned to each reproduction channel to be used in advance. Here, as to the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

  In the illustrated “notification sound 1” to “button press sound”, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has started must not be silenced in the middle of the reproduction until the end of the reproduction. As a channel assignment method, a pair of a reproduction channel and a sound is exclusively assigned to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted. As a channel assignment method, assignment is made to the same channel so as to minimize the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the output sound is muted and a new sound is output. For a sound that would cause a problem when overwritten, an independent channel is assigned, or a sound whose playback timing does not overlap is assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 173 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of the reproduction channel number, the left and right pan initial value, the upper and lower pan initial value, the volume initial value, the sound number, the reproduction type setting, and the output type setting are managed for each sound division and sound name. I have. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the description is omitted. When a sensor such as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects an abnormality due to a connector abnormality or the like, sound control of the section “abnormality notification sound” and the sound name “sensor abnormality detection” is performed.

In addition, when the abnormality of the initial position detection sensor (photo sensor) for detecting the initial position (origin position) of the movable character is detected, that is, when the operation abnormality of the movable character is detected, the classification “abnormal alarm sound” is also performed. ”And the sound name“ sensor abnormality detected ”.
When it is desired to distinguish between an abnormality of the connector and the operation abnormality of the movable accessory, for example, in FIG. 173, ch02 is currently assigned as the sound name “sensor abnormality detection”. A dedicated channel may be provided as a fixed channel, for example, by additionally assigning ch03 for detecting an abnormality of the initial position detection sensor when an operation abnormality is detected. At this time, it is preferable to assign the abnormality detection to the fixed channel in the case where the fixed channel and the automatic channel are used together in order to surely notify the abnormality detection.

  Further, when different types of abnormalities are overlapped in the case where the types of the abnormalities are distinguished from each other, the importance of the type of the abnormalities may be determined in advance. For example, if the priorities are set so that the priority becomes lower in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory failure, if these abnormalities occur repeatedly, the priority is higher and the priority is given to the user. A notification sound (“RAM has been cleared”) that specifies the RAM clear to be performed may be provided.

In this case, of the duplicated abnormalities, the higher the importance of the abnormality, the higher the importance of the notification than the lower importance of the abnormality. Therefore, the abnormality of the lower importance is not immediately notified. After the occurrence of the abnormality is stored, after the high-priority abnormality is resolved, or after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the notification of the high-priority abnormality, the stored low-priority abnormality is stored. The notification sound (“magnetism detected” or “accessory failure”) for identifying the error may be notified until the abnormality is resolved or for a predetermined period.

When anomalies occur in duplicate and are notified sequentially, the notification is performed in the descending order of the importance, and after the notification of the abnormality with the highest importance is finished, the notification of the abnormality with the next highest importance is performed. The notification may be sequentially performed as described above, but the notification period of the notification sound of the abnormality with low importance is set long, and the notification sound of low importance is specified together with the notification sound that specifies the abnormality with high importance from when the abnormality occurred. Set the volume of the high-priority notification sound to be high and the low-priority notification sound to low so that the high-priority notification sound can be heard better at first while reporting the abnormal notification sound. In addition, at the end of the notification period of the high-priority abnormality, the volume is increased so that the notification sound for identifying the low-priority abnormality can be heard well, and until the abnormality is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time. The period can be notified.

Further, when the timing of occurrence of the abnormality is different, for example, the magnetism is detected while the failure of the accessory is being notified (“failure of the accessory”) due to the failure of the accessory. In order to notify the fact that the magnetism has been detected (“magnetism has been detected”), the order of notification is changed based on the type of abnormality as described above.
In this case, the mode of the notification is switched from "an abnormality of the accessory" to "magnetism detected". Then, when the abnormality caused by the magnetism is resolved, the failure of the accessory is notified again.

As to the type of abnormality, the importance is set to be lower in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory abnormality according to the importance. For other abnormalities, the order of importance can be appropriately set according to the respective abnormalities.
As for the mode of the notification, the notification may be performed in any mode by sound, display, or a combination of the sound and the display. For example, in the above-described example, during the notification by voice, the display device displays "Trouble in the accessory", and when the abnormality caused by the magnetism is eliminated, the display is erased and the display of the accessory again is performed. Notify the failure by voice. A speaker or a display device used for the effect is used, such as sound, sound and display, and the mode of notification is switched according to the situation. In particular, for display devices, in recent years, a plurality of small liquid crystals have been used as an accessory device for production.However, an abnormal situation is displayed on the small display device, and the main display device that displays a lottery pattern has an abnormal situation. It is advisable not to display them so as not to disturb the game as much as possible.

  The left and right pan initial values are sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). Is represented. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output separately from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker, and the sound image is localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. Can be done. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the left speaker of the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464. For example, when “0x80” is set, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are output. , The sound volume difference output individually from each other becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, if "0xff" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the right speaker.

  The upper and lower pan initial values represent, for example, a sound image localization initial position of sound from the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the one body frame speaker 622. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output only from a pair of upper speakers, and when it is set to, for example, “0x80”, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these is It becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if “0xff” is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the main frame speaker 622 that is the lower speaker.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of the reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xff”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 174 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the game state, and the game state is, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “medium symbol stop”, and “big hit middle”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 175 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 175 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 175 (C) shows that each sound cannot be reproduced when trying to reproduce it. An example of the problem is shown. In FIGS. 175 (A) to 175 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 175 (A), the game state is sequentially along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “medium symbol stop”, and “big hit” The game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 175 (C), a start sound is awarded during the reproduction time of “first half notice A” as a new sound (“hold” in the drawing). 172 (B), the “hold winning sound” is assigned to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “first half announcement A” in advance, as shown in FIG. 172 (B). Is overwritten with the hold winning sound, and the output of the “first half notice A” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 of FIG. 172), the “holding prize sound” is assigned to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen preview” as shown in FIG. 172 (B). Is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the “full screen notice” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 176 (A) and 176 (B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 176 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the above-described sound control using a fixed channel, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the drawing). Is different. Here, that the channel division is an automatic channel indicates that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated in accordance with a rule described later (see above). "Sound control by automatic channel method".

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. It should be noted that the “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 176 (B) shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rule, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  Regarding the “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure, the sound whose reproduction has been started must not be silenced on the way no matter what until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter, abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined in the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sound for the AUTO group.
When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier for specifying a specific AUTO group and a priority (priority) can be specified in each AUTO group.
When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group.

  In the above case, when there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no free channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or is not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 177 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in the automatic channel system, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by a fixed channel, a left / right pan initial value, a vertical pan initial value, a volume initial value, Instead of the sound number, the playback type setting and the output type setting, an identifier and a priority (also referred to as “playback priority”) for specifying an AUTO group, a left / right pan initial value, an up / down pan initial value, a volume initial value, a sound It manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings, and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group of the plurality of AUTO groups in which each sound is to be reproduced. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the sound should be reproduced with higher priority as the numerical value is higher, while the sound should be reproduced without priority as the numerical value is lower. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, a notification sound having a priority of “25” (“information sound 1”, “information sound 2”, and “information sound 3”) Sound effect (“big hit decision sound” and “button press sound”) with priority “20”, BGM with priority “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and priority “10”. Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first-half notice sound effect" to "second-half notice sound effect"), and hold winning sound with priority "01" And Thus, in a state where there is no available channel, for example, when an attempt is made to reproduce the notification sound, it is not necessary to reproduce the notification sound using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) ) Is reproduced with priority using the channel on which the information is reproduced.

As already described, the initial value of the left and right pans is the sound from the left and right speakers in combination with the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). Represents the sound image localization initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume individually output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information.
For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the left speakers (the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464) of the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464, and when “0x80” is set, for example. Then, the volume difference individually output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xff” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speaker (the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464).

  Also, as already described, the initial value of the upper and lower pans represents, for example, the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the one body frame speaker 622. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image is localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. Can be done. The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these is set. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if “0xff” is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the main frame speaker 622 that is the lower speaker.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, within a setting range from “0x00” to “0xff”. In addition, “1” is set at the third byte (0x1ff if 0xff). ) Is set so that it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine, and it is always played back at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents a reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A effect sound”, while “second half notice A effect sound” and “second half notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "sound". When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source is exceeded by such a seek point, the number of sounds that can be registered exceeds the maximum number that can be registered.

  The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 178 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the game state, and the game state is, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “medium symbol stop”, and “big hit middle”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 178 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 178 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 178 (A) and 178 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 178 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “medium symbol stop” and “ The game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced throughout the reproduction channels 00 to 01 (see FIG. 179 (B)). Corresponding to range A). At this point, when the start winning is awarded (corresponding to the "hold winning" shown), and the hold winning sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved winning sound can be reproduced by using the reproduction channels 12 and 13, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "reserved sound reproduction" in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced all the time on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( (Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, when a start winning prize (corresponding to “holding prize winning” in the drawing) has been received and an attempt is made to reproduce the hold winning prize sound as a new sound, the reproduction channels 04 to 05 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without overwriting any of the sounds being played back with the winning prize sound (corresponding to “holding sound reproduction” shown).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 179 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” in the figure) is further generated, and thus the notification sound (25) having the highest priority of “25” as a new sound is added. Attempting to play back (corresponding to “notification 2” in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. Therefore, at the start timing, the sound having the lowest priority is searched for among the sounds being reproduced, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the hold winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above. However, the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the drawing) is Since the priority order of the reserved prize sound is higher than the priority (01), the reserved prize sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 180 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number being reproduced, an automatic allocation group, a priority at the time of automatic allocation, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a pan control work, and have respective information corresponding thereto.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The request sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The sound number during reproduction indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic allocation group, when "0", the channel is fixedly allocated, while when "1", the channel is automatically allocated ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). Equivalent). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, “1” indicates the AUTO group 1 and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time since the registration of the desired reproduction sound as “0”. The elapsed time since the registration is the same as the priority at the time of automatic assignment, when a new sound is to be reproduced in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority are being reproduced, Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, the sound reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and deleted.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-described set values of the left and right pans and the up and down pans.

  FIG. 181 shows an example of an empty channel search process when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In FIG. 181, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100), the effect control program checks the automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102). If the automatic allocation group is “0”, the allocation is fixed. , And playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that automatic allocation is performed, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to a monaural channel (step S1106). .

  If the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether there is a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) (step S1108). ) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound of the same or lower priority than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110).

  The rendering control program terminates the process when there is no channel of the reproduction sound equal to or lower than the priority order of the new sound in such a reproduced (monaural) channel, while ending the processing if it exists. Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

  When there are a plurality of the corresponding channels, the effect control program is playing the sound having the longest playback time from the registration among the corresponding channels based on the elapsed time since the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114). On the other hand, when there is one corresponding channel and there is one corresponding channel, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel satisfying a desired condition (step S1116).

  On the other hand, when the effect control program determines in step S1106 that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1106). S1120). If the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the effect control program determines whether or not a (Stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the new sound (step S1). In step S1124, if there is no sound, the process ends, and the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126).

  The effect control program starts outputting the new sound on a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when a plurality of corresponding channels do not exist. Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

  As described above, the production control program searches for an empty channel to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such an empty channel will be described in a more easily understood manner.

  FIGS. 182 (A) and 182 (B) to 185 (A) and 185 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 182 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a normal BGM reproduction request having a priority order of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel upon the occurrence of a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first-half notice_A having a priority of 05, and performs a search for the reproduction channels 02 to 03. , The reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel when a reproduction request for a button press sound having a priority order of 20 is issued, and searches the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a free space, the reproduction of the button press sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_B having a priority of 05, and searches for a reproduction channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06 to 07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the jackpot determined sound having the priority order of 20, and sets the reproduction channels 08 to 09 as reproduction channels. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the jackpot determined sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_C having a priority of 05, and performs a search for an available channel. Since there is a vacancy among the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a hold winning sound having a priority of 01, and makes the reproduction channels 12 to 13 search. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and sends it to the reproduction channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  FIGS. 186 (A) and 186 (B) to 189 (A) and 189 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 186 (A), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a request to play a reach BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and an empty channel is found in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Because of the presence, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the above-described processing, the production control program, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), triggers the occurrence of a request to reproduce a full-screen preview sound having a priority of 10 to trigger an empty channel. Is searched, and since there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full screen preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25. As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacancy)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the production control program searches for a vacant channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order 25 is generated, and performs a reproduction channel 04 to 05 ( Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacancy)” shown in the figure, reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel when a reproduction request for a preview sound of an accessory having a priority order of 10 is generated, and searches for reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is an empty space, reproduction of the accessory announcement sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a hold winning sound having a priority of 01, and performs reproduction channel 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacancy)” in the figure, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), the production control program searches for a free channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 2 having the priority order of 25 occurs, but no free channel exists. Therefore, in the channels corresponding to the sound being reproduced, the use of the reproduction by the reproduction channels 14 to 15 reproducing the “hold winning prize sound” having the lowest priority is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound in the stereo is started.

In this way, the sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a search is made for a reproduction channel having a lower priority according to the priority of the sound. Will be reproduced on the reproduction channel found by the search.
Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the unused channels be effectively used as described above, but also the sounds to be output can be increased as much as possible using the channels including the empty channels. Since it can be reproduced, various sound effects can be realized and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 190 (A) and 190 (B) to 191 (A) and 191 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 190A, the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request of the left symbol stop sound having the priority order of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, and searches for an empty channel in reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel when a reproduction request for a medium symbol stop sound having a priority order of 15 is issued, and performs a search for reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the medium symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel when a reproduction request of the jackpot BGM having the priority order of 15 occurs, and searches for a vacant channel in the reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the big hit BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement reproduction of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that this may be done.

[Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the case where the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

  FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel schemes or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 192 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described above as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by an automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since the sound control based on these two channel assignments has been described, a detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 192 (C) shows an embodiment in which sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by allocating channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups (corresponding to “PTN2” in the drawing). . FIG. 192 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the maximum number of reproduction channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for some of the reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 192 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of reproduction channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed on some of the reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). A specific example of the channel method shown in FIG. 192 (E) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 192.

  FIG. 192 (F) shows a case in which one automatic channel group is used to allocate channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method, and some of the reproduction channels are sound controlled by the fixed channel method described above. Control is performed, but is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel method shown in FIG. 192 (F) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 192.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped into one group, the assignment of empty channels or the replacement of channels being output is performed based on a pre-specified criterion. The sound can be output only by deciding the priority order. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method of outputting sound by designating a channel, it is not necessary to manage the channel, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. Becomes

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, the number of channels can be minimized. For example, a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels can be employed, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Subsequently, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control method, the automatic channel method dynamically changes the sound assignment to each channel so that the available channels can be effectively used to reproduce many sounds. In recent years, diversified gaming machines have selected and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, which may complicate sound source management.

  In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in a superimposed manner, it is possible to repeatedly execute a notice effect or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and the plurality of sounds and the reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are reliably output in duplicate. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that management is facilitated by dividing sounds by type.

  Further, the sound includes a sound to be output in preference to the effect sound, such as a notification sound, and a sound that is continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (D), a sound output with priority or a sound that is constantly output is output in a fixed channel method, and a sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

  With the configuration described above, it is possible to effectively utilize unused channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from being generated by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify by sound type such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data is facilitated.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 192 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 192 (C) and 192 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 192 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is set to 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by an automatic channel method. . Channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 193 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not to perform automatic allocation to the channel number, “division” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “use purpose” of each channel. It should be noted that “remarks” are added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 193 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 193, the configuration of each channel in this embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29 are fixed channel systems. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  The automatic channel type channels from channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the automatic channel type channels from channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment can output sound in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  The channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is represented by “channel number” which is the number of “channel” channel + 1) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, the sound is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or while waiting for a customer. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 5 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 6 and 7 are channels that are paired with channels 5 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound quality of BGM is improved by outputting not only a stereo output but also a plurality of sounds at the same time. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs simultaneously using up to eight channels (four pairs). Has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is set to the fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of the empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing a sound output when a notice effect is executed. In the announcement effect, the sound selected by the lottery is output each time according to the result of the fluctuation display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound output every time based on the predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels for outputting the sound at the time of the announcement effect is AUTO group 1.

  When outputting a sound at the time of performing the announcement effect, the peripheral control MPU first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, two empty channels are searched, and a continuous channel is set as an output channel in principle. At this time, if an empty channel exists, the setting is made so that the designated sound is output from the empty channel. On the other hand, if there is no free channel, the channel being used is released and a new sound is output or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect output in the automatic channel system.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, like the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the hold sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output without depending on the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of the start winning are output from the channels 24 to 29 as described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel system is applied. In the channels 24 to 29, a sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning and a sound output when the hold display changes at the start of the fluctuation are reproduced. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to output the sound at the time of determining the big hit without fail even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, thereby attracting the player's attention. Can be.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are the channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. In addition, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound relating to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound at the time of occurrence of an abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is allocated when output is constantly continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method for sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is possible to prevent the sound from being output while a vacant channel is generated, and to set a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[Free channel search processing]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an empty channel search process in the case where control for outputting a sound according to the present embodiment is performed. FIG. 181 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 194 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 194, in the processing of steps S1108 and S1120, when the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not an empty channel exists in the channels of the same group. That is, if there is no vacancy in the same channel group even if channels in different groups are vacant, the result of step S1108 and step S1120 is “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 194, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118, step S1132). Hereinafter, the selection condition of the channel for stopping the reproduction of the sound will be described with reference to FIG. The effect in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel whose sound output is to be replaced (sound reproduction is stopped or released) when no channel is available at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. . As specific selection conditions, attributes of a sound being reproduced and a new sound are compared, and a sound having a higher importance is given priority. The attributes include, as described below, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume level, the amount of change in the sound being played, and the like. It also includes the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 of FIG. 181, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time since the start of the reproduction in this way, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is ended, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, an effect with a long playback time can be an effect with a high expectation, so an effect with a short playback time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling an effect with a long reproduction time, the effect on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

  The condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time. However, other than this, for example, sound output of an effect with a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Alternatively, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of the reproduction with respect to the entire production time, that is, the progress ratio of the production. By setting the conditions in this way, the output of the sound can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the effect.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output may be an effect with a higher degree of importance. Therefore, a channel in which the volume of the output sound is low is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel having a large volume of output sound may be preferentially selected to cause the player to recognize that a new effect is to be performed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in volume of a sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect with a higher degree of importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change (panpot) of a sound image localization position. For example, as an effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sound of the stereo speaker can be a more important effect, consider a channel with a small change in the dynamic sound image localization position. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel having a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) sound number is selected. At this time, a priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect that is output as a high-quality stereo sound has a higher degree of expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel for outputting monaural sound is opened, a channel for outputting stereo sound is selected to increase the number of vacant channels. It may be.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted.
For example, an effect set so that the volume adjustment cannot be performed may have higher importance, or an effect set so that the volume adjustment may be performed may have higher importance.

  In addition to the conditions described above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a request for reproducing a new sound may be discarded without changing channels. Also, by assigning a unique priority to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

  In the table shown in FIG. 195, the conditions 1 to 8 are shown as examples, but these conditions may be applied alone or a combination of a plurality of conditions may be applied. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[Volume control]
Subsequently, an example will be described in which control is performed to assign channels based on the priority assigned to newly output sounds. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first-half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, in which (A) shows a timing at which a sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows a channel to which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 197 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 196, the first-half notice _A occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first-half notice_B is generated. Further, the first-half notice C is generated while the first-half notice_A and the first-half notice_B are being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the priority of the first-half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice_C is 20. Furthermore, since the first-half notice _B and the first-half notice _C are set with a volume suppression flag, when a low-priority notice effect is repeatedly performed in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppression volume value. Reduced.

  Explaining the content of each notice, the first notice _A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears. The character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first-half notice _B is an effect executed by operating the effect button. When the button is operated, the button press sound is reproduced (channels 18 and 19), and the first-half notice _B is started, and the effect is provided in stereo from channels 10 and 11. A sound is output.

  In the first-half notice_C, the display of the screen is stopped for a predetermined time together with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and the sound having a lower priority than the first-half notice_C, specifically, another notice effect and BGM are temporarily displayed. Is muted (blackout production). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first-half notice_C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each announcement effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing an example of a volume change of the effect sound in the first half variation of the present embodiment, in which (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started at time t0, and at time t1, the first-half notice_A is started. At this time, the effect sound effect of the first-half notice_A is output at a preset volume V_A.

  After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced by the volume V_T, and the effect sound of the first-half notice_B is output by the volume V_B. Since the priority of the first-half notice_B is higher than the first-half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume does not have to be lowered when the priority of the notice effect performed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notice effect being executed, or when the sound effect output at the same time is small. You do not need to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be reduced only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first-half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen darkens until time t5, and sound effects other than the first-half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first-half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  The effect sound effects of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B that have been muted from time t3 are restarted at time t5. The button press sound is normally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at the time t7, the first-half notice_B ends, and the first half of the change ends.

  During the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume being set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume for controlling the volume of the effect sound effect may be set to 0, and the first-half notice_C output of the sound effect May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first-half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when lowering the volume of the sound being played by outputting a new sound, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel in the channel system (fixed channel system, automatic channel system) may be lowered. Further, the volume of a sound being reproduced on a channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[effect]
With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, a sound having a higher priority can be output with priority. The sound with a high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for surely transmitting to a player or an employee of a game hall, or a player who has a high expectation that a result of a variable display will be a big hit, and Sound effect to increase the sense of expectation, or a sound effect that has a high stage effect and can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily manage the effect data related to the effect sound by classifying the channels used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups.
As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, such as by suppressing the occurrence of bugs due to systematic tests. Also, by enabling a stable game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs a sound effect of a notice effect, and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs a sound effect related to hold. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously. In particular, during the first half of the change, it is possible that the output of the effect sound exceeding the number of allocated channels may be required, for example, by performing the advance notice of the pending change together with the notice of the change. In such a case, in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1, the effect sound having a lower priority is output while being replaced with the effect sound having a higher priority, so that the interest of the game can be maximized. .

  Further, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect effect sound with the change of the hold display of the fluctuation display can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and is desirably executed reliably. . In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound related to such a hold display (hold sound) from a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the case of the announcement effect in the variable display, the output of the effect effect sound is stopped because the number of effect sound effects output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2. Is less likely to be. Further, even in the case of being stopped, the output of the effect sound effect having the lower priority is merely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely executing an effect with a high effect of increasing the expectation of the player.

  In the present embodiment, channels to which the automatic channel system is applied and channels to which the fixed channel system is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are used effectively by searching for available channels, and priority is given to directing effects and sound with high importance by setting priority. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to a case where sound is continuously output like BGM or a case where sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a game machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of the sound, each channel can be effectively used, and furthermore, appropriate control can be performed in accordance with the output state of the sound. For example, in the control for outputting BGM, it is sufficient to output a sound to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the game state. In the control for outputting an alarm sound, a specified channel can be output without searching for an available channel. Output the sound directly to the On the other hand, in the automatic channel method, as described above, the available channels can be utilized to the maximum extent, and a sound having a high effect can be output with priority.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. Further, the effect under execution can be continued without decreasing the volume without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the low-priority effect that has been executed is continuing even after the high-priority effect ends. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing the specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

  Here, a sound source IC used for producing sound effects and BGM is also used for driving the vibration speaker 354 described above. By giving sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the effect operation unit 301 is vibrated.

  Since the purpose of providing sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 is to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, a channel may be set each time when an effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 appears. However, in order to avoid confusion with sound information such as sound effects and BGM that actually emits sound, the fixed channel is assigned to a dedicated channel for the vibration speaker, although it is the same sound information.

As described above, the sound information of the sound ROM to be referred to is a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and changes (sweeps) from 38 Hz to 42 Hz eight times in one cycle in each 1 Hz, approximately one second, as described above. This is intermittently swept for one second and stored in a predetermined storage area of the sound ROM as sound information to be input again one second later.
Further, by controlling the volume as described above, the volume of the effect having a high priority is increased by emphasizing the volume, but the strength of the vibration is also increased in the same manner as the volume of the volume, as in the case of the above 40 Hz ± 2 Hz. To increase or decrease the amplitude of the sine wave of the sine wave, gradually increase or decrease the vibration, replace the sound intensity as well as adjust the volume of the sound I also use it.

  Although the sound source IC has been described as a single device having only such a function, in the effect display control unit, a VDP for controlling display of the effect display device 1600 includes a device in which a function corresponding to the sound source IC is incorporated. Even in such a case, the vibration can be controlled as long as the same sound control as described above can be performed. In such a case, the sound ROM and the image ROM may be hybridized or may be configured as the same device so that information to be used for each is stored in advance. Further, the CPU and the control ROM for controlling these may be respectively constituted by the same device.

  [15-2. Modification of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed] In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are set in advance. In this modification, a description will be given of a modification in which the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are variable.

[Direction example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, 9) and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 199 is a diagram illustrating a screen configuration example of an effect in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 199 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the occurrence of the reach.

In this modified example, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and an effect of displaying different scenes on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously.
The selection of the scene may be based on a lottery or may be selected by a player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the above-described embodiment. The default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in the present modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. Therefore, in the present modification, channels for outputting BGM are reallocated, and the arrangement of the channels is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control according to a modification of the present embodiment, in which (A) illustrates a default configuration, and (B) illustrates a configuration when a multi-screen effect is executed. The default configuration in FIG. 200A is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 193 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 200A is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 148B. Specifically, a fixed channel type channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels to which the automatic channel method assigned to the AUTO group 1 is adopted is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different announcement effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGMs corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output at a normal volume, the volume will be too high. Therefore, the output is performed at a volume lower than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, an announcement effect (second half announcement) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of other BGM is ended. . Further, when the player selects a scene, for example, the user selects a screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine, and changes the BGM of the selected scene to another one until the scene is determined. The volume may be set larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of another scene may be set smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment. Is shown.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of the change), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 200 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 200 (B)). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half change, a multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 199, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 200B) is output. At this time, the output is performed at a volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene to continue the effect is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, a display area corresponding to scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, a second-half notice_5 corresponding to scene 5 is executed.

  After the end of the multi-screen effect, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the arrangement of the channels may be returned to the default. When the output of the BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in the present modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next change.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in the present modified example, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half change.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the channel arrangement according to the effect content, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, or a background change) changes.

[effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to the “variable fixed channel” in FIG. 192 (F)) for performing sound control using the fixed channel method and the number of automatic channels for performing sound control using the automatic channel method (FIG. 192 (F) of the variable AUTOch) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to set a state in which more notification sounds, BGMs, or sound effects can be reproduced according to the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more kinds of notification sounds are output. Or the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced in the effect by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds can be flexibly dealt with.

  As shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the embodiment in which the vibration speaker 354 is mounted on the operation unit base 320 configuring the production operation unit 300 has been described. A means for generating vibration may be further provided. Hereinafter, a modified example will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, an eccentric motor 332 b is mounted on the rotation base 332 in the rendering operation ring 330, and is configured to generate vibration under the control of the peripheral control unit 1511. ing. The vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332b is transmitted from the rotation base 332 to the rotation operation unit 302, and the vibration is transmitted to a player who touches the rotation operation unit 302.

  Since the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation drive unit 340 is driven by the control of the peripheral control unit 1511, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates. In this case, the eccentric motor 332b is also configured to rotate in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 in the circumferential direction.

  The eccentric motor 332b is driven based on a special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and is configured to transmit vibration to the player. ing. For example, the eccentric motor 332b may be vibrated so as to indicate the special lottery result in a state where a pattern row including a plurality of patterns is variably displayed as an effect image indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation of the special lottery result for the player who has sensed the vibration of the eccentric motor 332b.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is provided with a rotation base initial position detection sensor, and is configured to detect whether the eccentric motor 332b is located at the initial position. When the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 or rotates the rotary operation unit 302 by driving the rotary drive unit 340 by the peripheral control unit 1511, the rotary operation unit 302 moves a predetermined amount from the initial position. Becomes

  Therefore, at a predetermined timing, the rotation base initial position detection sensor determines whether the rotation operation unit 302 is located at the initial position, and returns to the initial position if the rotation operation unit 302 is not located at the initial position. Control is performed. When the rotary operation unit 302 is located at the initial position, the eccentric motor 332b controls the eccentric motor 332b to be the most front side (hereinafter, the deepest position in the rotary operation unit 302 is 0 degrees, the right side position is 90 degrees, and the most front position is 180 degrees). The left and right positions are set to 270 degrees, and the positions of the rotary operation unit 302 and the eccentric motor 332b will be described.)

  The predetermined timing at which the rotation operation unit 302 is returned to the initial position is as follows: the effect display device 1600 stops changing the display of the pattern row including a plurality of patterns as the effect image indicating the special lottery result, and then performs the next change. The timing before the display is started, the timing at which the advantageous gaming state according to the special lottery result is generated, and the effect display device 1600 displays a pattern row including a plurality of patterns as an effect image indicating the special lottery result in a variable display. After the stop, the game ball B is not accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the timing when the demonstration screen is displayed, the predetermined time (specifically, 5 minutes), the ball launching device 540. Is determined to be a non-game state in which the game ball B is not driven by the player and the player is not playing a game. Preferred. With such a configuration, the rotary operation unit 302 returns to the initial position at a predetermined timing, so that a player who puts his hand in front of the rotary operation unit 302 or a player who presses the pressing operation unit 303 can be used. On the other hand, the vibration transmitted from the eccentric motor 332b can be transmitted efficiently.

  Further, since the position of the rotary operation unit 302 is controlled so that the eccentric motor 332b is located at the initial position, even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 with his / her hand on the rotary operation unit 302, the game Since the eccentric motor 332b also moves in accordance with the movement of the player's hand, the vibration can be efficiently transmitted to the palm of the player.

  Although the example in which the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is performed has been described, when performing the control for returning to the initial position, the player is notified that the control for returning to the initial position is being performed. It is desirable. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays that the control for returning to the initial position is being performed, and the main body frame speaker 622 outputs a sound indicating that the control for returning to the initial position is being performed. It is good to be constituted as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the player mistakenly thinks that the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is any effect related to the special lottery result.

  Although an example in which the control for returning the rotary operation unit 302 to the initial position is performed has been described, a configuration in which the rotary operation unit 302 is at the initial position may be visually recognized. For example, a mark indicating that the rotation operation unit 302 is on the near side may be provided at a position on the near side (at a position of 180 degrees) of the rotation operation unit 302 when the rotation operation unit 302 is at the initial position. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is appropriately performed without performing an operation such as disassembly.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 is located at the initial position, the decoration of the decoration unit 335b provided on the near side (at a position of 180 degrees) of the rotation operation unit 302 is different from the decoration of the decoration unit 335b provided on other parts. It may be different. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not control for returning the rotary operation unit 302 to the initial position is appropriately performed without performing an operation such as disassembly, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives a sense of aesthetic discomfort to the player.

  When the control for returning the rotary operation unit 302 to the initial position is performed, the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is located on the near side (the position of 180 degrees) has been described, but the eccentric motor 332b is on the left side (the position of 270 degrees). The initial position of the rotary operation unit 302 may be set so as to be located at a predetermined position on the near side (at a position of 180 degrees) from. For example, the initial position of the rotation operation unit 302 is set so that the eccentric motor 332b is located on the near side (the position at 180 degrees), or the rotation operation is performed such that the eccentric motor 332b is located on the left side (the position at 225 degrees). The initial position of the unit 302 may be set, or the initial position of the rotary operation unit 302 may be set so that the eccentric motor 332b is located on the left side (a position at 270 degrees). With this configuration, the vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332b is efficiently transmitted to the player operating the handle 182 with the right hand and operating the rotation operation unit 302 with the left hand. Becomes possible.

  The rotation base initial position detection sensor detects whether the rotation operation unit 302 is at the initial position, and controls the rotation drive unit 340 by the peripheral control unit 1511 to return the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position. Although the embodiment has been described, the rotation drive unit 340 may not be provided, and the rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position by a physical structure. For example, a torsion spring is mounted on the shaft of the operating ring transmission gear 350 to limit the rotation range of the operation ring transmission gear 350 to a predetermined range, and the torsion spring is restored even if the operation ring transmission gear 350 rotates. The rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position by a force. With such a configuration, the player grips the rotation operation unit 302 and rotates it by a predetermined angle, and then releases the hand from the rotation operation unit 302, or controls the rotation drive unit 340 by the peripheral control unit 1511. When the control of the rotation drive unit 340 by the peripheral control unit 1511 ends after the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the rotation operation unit 302 returns to the initial position by the restoring force of the torsion spring, and the eccentric motor 332b is located on the near side.

  The embodiment in which the rotary operation unit 302 returns to the initial position by the physical structure using the torsion spring without providing the rotation drive unit 340 is described. However, the control by the rotation drive unit 340 and the physical structure using the torsion spring are used. The rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position by both of the simple structures.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the rotation base 332 so as to move with a play of about several degrees in the rotation direction. With such a configuration, when vibration is generated by the eccentric motor 332b mounted on the rotation base 332, the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved little by little in the rotation direction. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production by the occurrence.

  Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332 has been described, the eccentric motor 332b may be configured to be mounted on the inner surface of a member directly touched by the player. Specifically, the eccentric motor 332b may be configured to be directly attached to the inner surface of the ring outer upper cover 335. Although the example in which the eccentric motor 332b is directly mounted on the inner surface of the ring outer upper cover 335 has been described, the eccentric motor 332b may be directly mounted on the inner surface of the ring outer lower cover 336 or the ring inner cover 337. With such a configuration, the vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332b can be more efficiently transmitted to the player.

  The embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 in addition to the point that the vibration speaker 354 is provided on the bottom wall of the main body 321 has been described. With such a configuration, it is possible to transmit vibrations to the player in different vibration modes. On the other hand, the vibration speaker 354 provided on the bottom wall of the main body 321 may be eliminated, and vibration may be generated in the effect operation unit 300 only by the eccentric motor 332b provided in the effect operation ring 330.

  The harness that supplies electric power to the eccentric motor 332b is drawn downward from the rotation base 332, and is connected to the effect operation ring decorative board 352 through a through hole 331c provided in the ring attachment base 331. The eccentric motor 332b is formed of a metal case on the outside, but a ground wire is drawn out of the metal case, and like the harness, the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is formed through the through hole 331c. It is connected to the. In the case of such a configuration, the rotatable angle of the rotary operation unit 302 is limited to a predetermined range (for example, a range of about 20 to 30 degrees left and right from the initial position) depending on the length of the harness and the ground wire. The Rukoto.

  Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are electrically connected to each other by the harness and the ground wire has been described, an electric signal for exchanging signals and current between the movable side and the fixed side like a slip ring is shown. A mechanism may be used to electrically connect the eccentric motor 332b provided on the movable side and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided on the fixed side. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the limitation on the rotatable angle of the rotation operation unit 302.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a plurality of (specifically, 18) decorative portions 335b are attached to the outer ring upper cover 335. Specifically, a plurality of (specifically, 18) decorative portions 335b are inserted from above into a penetrating portion provided to penetrate the outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 from above. ing. The decorative portion 335b is fixed to a penetrating portion provided on the outer upper surface portion 335a by a locking claw provided on the decorative portion 335b. The decorative portion 335b is formed of a synthetic resin, and the entire surface thereof is plated with a conductive metal. A ground wire is connected to the decorative portion 335b inside the ring outer upper cover 335, and this ground wire is drawn out of the rotating base 332 and finally passed through a through hole 331c provided in the ring mounting base 331. Are screwed to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is connected to the hinge member on the body frame provided on the body frame base unit 500. 510 is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and a ground wire 5592 connected to the connector CN14 of the ground circuit board 559 is screwed to a predetermined position of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530. . The door frame reinforcing unit 110, the door frame hinge assembly 120, the door frame hinge pin 122, the body frame hinge member 510, and the body frame reinforcing frame 530 are made of metal, respectively. The reinforcing frame 530 is electrically connected to a grounding wire. With such a configuration, the decorative portion 335b, which is attached to the surface of the rotary operation portion 302 and has a plated portion on the surface thereof, is connected to the ground wire and the door frame provided inside the ring outer upper cover 335. The static electricity possessed by the player can be finally removed to the ground circuit board 559 via the unit 110. The ground wire from the decorative portion 335b may also be electrically connected using an electric mechanism that exchanges signals and current between the movable side and the fixed side, such as a slip ring.

  In the embodiment, the decorative portion 335b is provided with a locking claw, and the decorative portion 335b is inserted from above into a penetrating portion provided to penetrate the outer upper surface portion 335a to fix the decorative portion 335b. Instead of fixing with the nails, the decorative portion 335b may be fixed to the ring outer upper cover 335 with a metal screw from the inside to fix the decorative portion 335b. Further, when screwing is performed, it may be configured to be fastened together with a ground wire connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110.

  Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is formed of a synthetic resin and the entire surface is plated is shown, the portion to be plated need not be the entire surface of the decorative portion 335b. When the decorative portion 335b is inserted into the penetrating portion provided on the outer upper surface portion 335a, the portion touched by the player, the portion where the ground wire is connected inside the ring outer upper cover 335, and those portions are electrically connected. It suffices that the portion to be connected is plated. Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is formed of a synthetic resin has been described, the entire decorative portion 335b may be formed of a conductive metal. With such a configuration, it is possible to electrically connect a portion touched by the player and a portion to which the ground wire is connected without performing plating on the entire surface of the decorative portion 335b. This can be simplified.

  A plurality (specifically, 18) of the decorative portions 335b are fixed to the outer upper surface portion 335a, and a ground wire is connected to one of the decorative portions 335b. . In this case, the ground wire is drawn out in a predetermined decorative portion 335b provided in a range from the near side (180-degree position) to the left side (270-degree position) when the eccentric motor 332b is at the initial position. I have. With such a configuration, the decorative portion 335b from which the ground wire is drawn is located at a position where the player can easily touch, so that the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed.

  Although the embodiment in which the ground wire is connected to one decorative portion 335b is shown, the ground wire is connected to the plurality of decorative portions 335b, each ground wire is pulled out from the rotating base 332, and the ring mounting base 331 is provided. May be connected to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 through the through hole 331c provided in the door frame. Alternatively, by electrically connecting the decorative portions 335b by wiring inside the outer upper surface portion 335a, a part of the ground wire is omitted, and the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit are connected by at least one ground wire. 110 may be configured to be electrically connected. As the decorative portion 335b to be electrically connected, the eccentric motor 332b is located at the initial position (for example, a position at 180 degrees) and the left side (at a position of 270 degrees) from the near side (at a position of 180 degrees) of the rotary operation unit 302. (Specifically, six) decorative portions 335b provided in the rotary operation unit 302, or all (specifically, eighteen) decorative portions 335b provided in the rotary operation unit 302 may be targeted. With such a configuration, even if the player touches any part of the rotation operation unit 302, the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed.

  Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is attached from the outside to the through portion provided in the outer upper surface portion 335a has been described, the decorative portion 335b is exposed from the through portion provided in the outer upper surface portion 335a. In the penetrating part provided in the outer upper surface part 335a, the decorative part 335b may be attached so as to penetrate from the inside to the outside. Further, the plurality of decorative portions 335b are integrally formed, and the decorative portions 335b are attached from the inside of the outer upper surface portion 335a, so that the plurality of decorative portions 335b are exposed in the plurality of penetrating portions. Is also good. Further, it is preferable to perform a plating process on the entire surface of the plurality of decorative portions 335b formed integrally. Further, the plurality of integrally formed decorative portions 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 may be electrically connected to each other by one ground wire. As described above, when the plurality of decorative portions 335b are integrally formed, and when the entire surface thereof is plated, any one of the plurality of decorative portions 335b located at a separated position is provided. When the player touches 335b, the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed.

  Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are electrically directly connected to each other by a ground wire has been described, the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 may be partially connected to each other via another member. It may be electrically connected. For example, a reinforcing metal plate for reinforcing the rotation operation unit 302 is arranged in the rotation operation unit 302, and the decoration unit 335b and the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are electrically connected via the metal plate. May be.

  Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332 has been described, the eccentric motor 332b may be mounted on the ring mounting base 331. The eccentric motor 332b is a predetermined position (for example, a position at 180 degrees, a position at 225 degrees, and a position at 270 degrees) on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 at the left side (270 degree position) from the most front side (180 degree position). At least one place). With such a configuration, vibration can be efficiently transmitted to a player who operates the pressing operation unit 303 or plays a game while putting his hand on the staging operation unit 300. . Further, even when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the vibration felt by the player is weakened.

  The harness and ground wire from the eccentric motor 332b are connected to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and are electrically connected to the circuit ground of the circuit on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 via a capacitor, a coil, and the like. The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is configured to be electrically connected to the operation unit relay board 392 via a harness and a ground line. The operation unit relay board 392 has a role of relaying a signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. A signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is used as a drive circuit for driving the eccentric motor 332b. And a control circuit that lights and blinks the LED, and is sent through the operation unit relay board 392 to control the drive of the eccentric motor 332b and emit light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Decoration is done. On the other hand, the ground line drawn from the operation unit relay board 392 is connected to the dish unit relay board 214. The ground line drawn from the plate unit relay board 214 is connected to the power supply board 630, and is finally connected to the connector CN15 of the ground circuit board 559 by the ground wire 5593. With such a configuration, even if electromagnetic noise due to, for example, electrostatic discharge enters the eccentric motor 332b, the noise can be removed.

  Although the embodiment in which the ground wire drawn from the decoration part 335b provided in the rendering operation unit 300 is finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 via the door frame reinforcement unit 110 has been described, the rendering operation unit 300 is decorated with a dish decoration. At the time of attachment to the unit 250, a ground wire on the effect operation unit 300 side and a reinforcing sheet metal provided on the dish decoration unit 250 side may be electrically connected. For example, a ground wire pulled out from the decoration part 335b is screwed together with a metal leaf spring at a predetermined position of the production operation unit 300, and a plate metal for reinforcing the dish decoration unit 250 is provided in the dish decoration unit 250, and the production is performed. When the operation unit 300 is attached to the dish decoration unit 250, the metal leaf spring provided in the rendering operation unit 300 and the reinforcing sheet metal provided in the dish decoration unit 250 are electrically connected. The sheet metal for reinforcement provided in the dish decoration unit 250 and the door frame reinforcement unit 110 may be connected by a ground wire. With such a configuration, it is possible to electrically connect the ground wire only by attaching the effect operation unit 300 to the dish decoration unit 250.

  Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b provided in the effect operation unit 300 is connected to the ground circuit board 559 via a ground wire or the like has been described, the entire upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin and is pulled out from the upper plate 201. The ground wire to be connected may be connected to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 by the ground wire 5592. Although the example in which the entire upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin is shown, only the bottom wall portion of the upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin, and the standing wall surrounding the periphery of the upper plate 201 is formed of a non-conductive resin. You may. Further, the entire upper plate 201 and the bottom wall may be formed of conductive metal parts instead of the conductive resin. With such a configuration, it is possible to discharge the static electricity accumulated in the game ball and the static electricity possessed by the player to the ground circuit board 559 via the upper plate 201. Although the example in which the upper plate 201 is made conductive is shown, the same configuration as the upper plate 201 may be adopted for the lower plate 202.

  In FIG. 52, the embodiment in which the board box 391 that houses the operation unit relay board 392 therein is attached to the rear of the operation unit base 320 has been described, but the board box 391 is provided on the side (right or left side) of the operation unit base 320. May be configured to be mounted in an upright state. In this case, the opening for connector connection provided in the board box 391 may be provided so as not to face the operation unit base 320 side. For example, when the board box 391 is mounted on the operation unit base 320 in a state of being upright, it is preferable to mount the board box 391 so that the connector connection opening provided on the board box 391 faces right. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the size of the gaming machine 1 from increasing in the front-rear direction. Further, even if the liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 from above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the liquid flows down to the substrate box 391.

  In FIG. 52, the embodiment in which the board box 391 accommodating the operation unit relay board 392 therein is attached to the rear of the operation unit base 320 is shown. May be mounted in a state where the board box 391 is horizontal so that the opening for use faces upward. Further, it is preferable that the opening for connector connection is provided with an upright wall that rises upward over the entire circumference of the opening. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the substrate box 391 from the front-back direction or the left-right direction.

  When an opening for connector connection is provided in the horizontal board box 391 as described above, the opening may be provided on the upper surface of the board box 391 at a position away from the operation unit base 320. Good. For example, when the board box 391 is mounted horizontally on the right side of the operation unit base 320, an opening for connector connection may be provided at a position on the upper right side of the center of the upper surface of the board box 391. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the liquid from entering the substrate box 391.

  FIG. 52 shows an example in which the operation unit relay board 392 is housed in the box-shaped board box 391 and arranged behind the operation unit base 320, but the operation unit relay board 392 is not housed in the board box 391. Is also good. For example, with respect to one surface of the substrate box 391 having a rectangular parallelepiped shape, it is preferable to provide a substrate mounting portion having a shape in which the surface is deleted and opened. In this case, the board mounting portion has a shape in which four standing walls are erected from four sides of the surface facing the deleted surface, and the operation unit relay board 392 is mounted on the surface facing the deleted surface. When such a board mounting portion is provided in the rendering operation unit 300, and the operation portion relay board 392 is mounted on the board mounting portion such that the mounting surface of the connector in the operation portion relay board 392 is located on the open surface. Good. With such a configuration, the non-mounting surface of the connector and the side surface of the operation part relay board 392 in the operation part relay board 392 are covered with the board mounting part, and the liquid flows down to the operation part relay board 392. Can be suppressed. Further, on the connector mounting surface, it is possible to easily attach and detach wiring to and from the connector. Although the example in which the board mounting portion has a rectangular shape and four upright walls are erected is shown, the board mounting portion may be any shape as long as the operation unit relay board 392 can be mounted. It is only necessary that a plurality of surfaces be upright so as to surround the periphery of the operation unit relay board 392. Further, the board mounting section may be separate from the operation section base 320 like the board box 391, or may be formed integrally with the operation section base 320.

  Further, it is preferable to provide the board mounting portion such that the surface in the open state is located on the opposite side to the operation portion base 320. For example, when the substrate mounting portion is mounted on the operation portion base 320 in a state of being upright on the right side, the mounting portion may be mounted such that the open surface faces the right side. With such a configuration, the non-mounting surface of the connector and the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 in the operation unit relay board 392 are covered with the board mounting unit, and the liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392. Can be suppressed. Although the example in which the board mounting portion is mounted on the right side of the operation portion base 320 in an upright state has been described, the board mounting portion may be mounted on the left side, the front side, the rear side, and the lower side of the operation portion base 320.

  Further, the board mounting portion may be provided in a horizontal state such that the surface in the open state faces upward. In this case, it is desirable that the position where the substrate mounting portion is provided is a position horizontally separated from the operation portion base 320. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the board mounting portion that covers the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 becomes an upright wall shape and the liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392 from front, rear, left, and right. Becomes possible.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is configured to be electrically connected to the operation unit relay board 392 via a harness and a ground wire (hereinafter, both are collectively referred to as “wiring”). When the provided effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the operation unit relay board 392 provided below are simply connected, when the liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 from above, the liquid flows down the wiring. May flow into the operation unit relay board 392. Therefore, in connecting the wiring to the operation unit relay board 392, it is desirable to provide a structure that prevents the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 via the wiring.

  For example, after the wiring from the effect operation ring decoration board 352 passes through a position lower than the lower end of the operation unit relay board 392, the wiring is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the wiring is connected to the operation unit relay board 392. Good. With such a configuration, since the operation unit relay board 392 is located at a position higher than the lowest position of the wiring, the liquid is prevented from entering the operation unit relay board 392 via the wiring. It is possible to do.

  Also, after wiring is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the wiring from the effect operation ring decoration board 352 faces downward, the wiring is once attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face upward, and the operation is again performed so as to face downward. After wiring is attached to the unit base 320, it may be configured to be connected to the operation unit relay board 392. At this time, it is preferable that the position where the direction of the wiring is changed so that the wiring is directed upward and the position of the operation unit relay board 392 be separated in the horizontal direction so as not to overlap in a plan view. By adopting such a configuration, even if the liquid propagates through the wiring, the liquid falls downward at a position where the wiring changes direction so that the wiring is directed upward, and the liquid is difficult to be transmitted to the wiring from there. Thus, it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 via the wiring. In the case of such a configuration, the operation unit relay board 392 can be attached to a position lower than the lowest position of the wiring. Further, instead of attaching the wiring to the operation section base 320 so as to face upward once, the wiring may be attached in a horizontal direction. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is difficult for the liquid to be transmitted first in the portion where the wiring is in the horizontal direction, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 via the wiring.

  As described above, by providing a downwardly convex portion at at least one point in the path of the wiring for electrically connecting the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the operation unit relay board 392, the liquid transmitted through the wiring is provided. Can be suppressed.

  When attaching the downward wiring to the operation unit base 320, it is preferable to use a binding band. With such a configuration, the binding band wound in the circumferential direction of the wiring can prevent the liquid flowing down the wiring from moving downward.

  An example in which a downwardly protruding portion is provided or a binding band is used to suppress the movement of a liquid in a wiring path for electrically connecting the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the operation portion relay substrate 392. However, it is supposed that the liquid falls directly below a portion of the wiring that is convex downward or a portion that uses the binding band. Therefore, the downwardly convex portion or the portion using the binding band in the wiring is arranged so that the unit lower cover 311 is located directly below, and the downwardly convex portion or the portion using the binding band in the wiring. When the liquid falls from the unit, the liquid may directly fall on the unit lower cover 311. Although the embodiment in which the liquid directly falls on the unit lower cover 311 has been described, it is sufficient that the liquid does not directly fall on an article that can be affected by the liquid, such as an electric component such as a motor or an LED provided in the rendering unit 300, a wiring, or the like. For example, the wiring may be attached so that the liquid directly falls on the bottom wall 321a of the main body 321.

  In the route of the wiring for electrically connecting the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the operation unit relay board 392, a downwardly convex portion is provided or a binding band is used to suppress the movement of the liquid. Although the embodiment has been described, such a method may be used in other places where liquid intrusion is assumed. For example, such a configuration is adopted in a harness that connects the second rotation detection sensor 348 and the operation unit relay board 392, or a harness that connects the operation unit relay board 392 and the dish unit relay board 214 or a ground wire. You may.

  In addition, a buffer member may be disposed such that an impact is transmitted gently at any position between the operation unit relay board 392 and the vibration speaker 354 or between the operation unit relay board 392 and the eccentric motor 332b. For example, when mounting the substrate box 391 behind the operation unit base 320, the substrate box 391 may be mounted on the operation unit base 320 via an elastic member made of synthetic rubber. With this configuration, the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and the eccentric motor 332b is elastically transmitted to the operation unit relay board 392 housed in the board box 391, and is mounted on the operation unit relay board 392. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation that the electric / electronic parts are broken or the stress is concentrated on the solder part for attaching the electric / electronic parts to the operation part relay board 392 and cracks are generated.

  Although the operation unit relay board 392 relays signals from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, a microcomputer or a ROM is mounted on the operation unit relay board 392 and transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. The vibration speaker 354 provided in the effect operation unit 300, the eccentric motor 322b, the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the like may be controlled based on the command.

  FIG. 209 (a) is a plan view showing a modification of the member provided on the base portion 221 of the ball lending operation unit 220. The illustration of the upper bowl removing button 222 is omitted. FIG. 209 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 209 (a). FIG. 209 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 209 (a).

  A disc-shaped ball rental operation base 223 having translucency is attached to the base portion 221 from below. The ball lending operation base 223 is formed in a flange shape on the entire periphery of the end thereof, and is attached to the base 221 by bonding or screws. . Further, two openings are provided on the front side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending button 224 formed in a circular shape and a return button 225 formed in a triangular shape are respectively provided from the two openings. It is exposed. A ball lending display unit 226 is provided below and below the ball lending operation base 223.

  The ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 are mounted on a ball lending board 227. The ball rental board 227 is attached to the ball rental board case 228 from above. The ball lending board case 228 is attached to the base portion 221 from below, whereby the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 are exposed from the opening provided in the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending operation is performed. The lending display unit 226 is configured to be located behind and below the ball lending operation base 223.

  The ball lending button 224 includes a ball lending button pressing portion 224a, a ball lending button housing portion 224b, a ball lending button spring 224c, and a ball lending button microswitch 224d. During the non-pressing operation, the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is in a state of being urged upward by the ball lending button spring 224c. When the player presses the ball lending button pressing section 224a, the ball lending button microswitch 224d detects the pressing operation by the player, and a signal is sent via the ball lending board 227, so that a predetermined number of signals are sent. The game ball B is supplied to the upper plate 201.

  The return button 225 includes a return button pressing section 225a, a return button housing section 225b, a return button spring 225c, and a return button microswitch 225d. During the non-pressing operation, the return button pressing portion 225a is in a state of being urged upward by the return button spring 225c. When the player presses the return button pressing portion 225a, the pressing operation by the player is detected by the return button microswitch 225d, and a signal is sent through the ball rental board 227, so that the ball rental machine prepaid. The card will be returned.

  The ball lending display unit 226 includes a 7-segment LED 226a and a ball lending status display LED 226b. The 7-segment LED 226a and the ball lending status display LED 226b are mounted on the ball lending display board 226c, respectively, and function as the ball lending display unit 226 as a whole. The ball lending display unit 226 is mounted on the ball lending board 227, is driven by the ball lending board 227, and is configured so that the 7-segment LED 226a and the ball lending status display LED 226b are turned on. The seven-segment LED 226a has a three-digit display unit, and can display numbers and alphabets according to the lighting and extinguishing modes of the seven segments. For example, the remaining amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine, and an error code indicating that the ball lending machine has failed can be displayed by lighting. The ball lending state display LED 226b indicates the state of the ball lending machine. When the ball lending can be performed, the ball lending board 227 turns on the ball lending state. In addition, by driving by the ball lending substrate 227, it may be made to blink at a low speed during ball lending, or to blink at a high speed during return of a prepaid card. The 7-segment LED 226a and the ball lending state display LED 226b can visually confirm the display state through the transparent ball lending operation base 223. In driving the 7-segment LED 226a and the ball lending status display LED 226b, a drive circuit may be provided on the ball lending display unit 226 or the ball lending board 227 to drive.

  209 (a) to 209 (c), base portion 221, ball rental operation base 223, ball rental button pressing portion 224a, ball rental button housing portion 224b, return button pressing portion 225a, return button housing. The portion 225b and the ball rental substrate case 228 are formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin. The ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a may be formed of a non-conductive elastic body. The ball rental button spring 224c and the return button spring 225c are formed of a conductive metal such as stainless steel or brass. The ball lending board 227 is provided on its upper surface with a ball lending button microswitch 224d, a return button microswitch 225d, and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the ball lending display unit 226 to the ball lending board 227.

  In such a configuration, when a player having static electricity tries to start a game and brings his / her fingertip close to the ball lending button pressing portion 224a, a discharge occurs, and the generated high-voltage pulse causes the ball lending operation unit 220 to operate. Electrical components such as the ball rental button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b included in the ball rental display unit 226, and the ball rental board 227 may be broken. In particular, there is a problem that LEDs have low resistance to high voltage and are easily affected by discharge. Further, not only at the start of the game but also during the game, static electricity may be generated in the player due to friction between the player and the clothes worn by the player. Therefore, for example, when a player who tries to finish the game brings his / her finger near the return button pressing portion 225a, there is a possibility that a discharge may occur, and in this case, the electric component may be broken. Therefore, if the static electricity possessed by the player can be properly removed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball rental operation unit 200 breaks down. Hereinafter, an example in which the conductive unit 229a and the ground wire 229b are employed as members for removing static electricity in the ball lending operation unit 200 will be described.

  FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (b) schematically show members near the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). FIG. 210 (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 210 (a). The shaded portions in FIGS. 210A to 210C indicate conductive portions 229a made of a conductive member. Further, a portion shown by a thick line indicates the ground wire 229b.

  FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (c) show a ball lending button 224 in which the entire ball lending button pressing portion 224a is formed of a conductive synthetic resin instead of a non-conductive synthetic resin, and one end of a ground wire 229b. Is attached to the bottom of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. In this example, the ball lending button pressing portion 224a functions as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is drawn out of the ball lending operation unit 220 through the ball lending button housing opening 224e and the ball lending board case opening 228a, and finally the body frame metal member provided on the body frame 4. Is connected to the other end. With such a configuration, the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed via the ball lending button pressing portion 224a (conductive portion 229a) and the ground wire 229b.

  In addition, at least one place between the bottom surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the upper part of the ball lending button spring 224c, and between the lower part of the ball lending button spring 224c and the upper surface of the ball lending substrate 227, a thin non-conductive member is formed. It is desirable to interpose and electrically insulate. Alternatively, a non-conductive elastic body may be used instead of the ball rental button spring 224c. Further, at the portion where the bottom surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the ball lending button microswitch 224d are in contact, at least one of the contacting portions is formed of a non-conductive member so as to be electrically insulated. It may be.

  With such a configuration, in order to start a game in the gaming machine 1, the finger of the player who has pressed the ball lending button 224 touches the ball lending button pressing portion 224 a, and the ball lending button is pressed. Since the static electricity of the player is removed by the pressing part 224a (conductive part 229a) and the ground wire 229b, a discharge occurs near the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button microswitch 224d and the return button microswitch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball lending status display LED 226b included in the ball lending display unit 226, the ball lending board 227, and the like can be prevented from occurring.

  FIG. 210 (b) is a modification in which the return button pressing portion 225a of the return button 225 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin instead of a non-conductive synthetic resin, and the return button pressing portion 225a functions as a conductive portion 229a. Is shown. Also in the return button 225, by adopting the same structure as the example shown in the ball lending button 224, it is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player. Note that both the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a may be configured to be the conductive portions 229a.

  With such a configuration, when the finger of the player who wants to end the game in the gaming machine 1 comes into contact with the return button pressing portion 225a, the return button pressing portion 225a (the conductive portion 229a) and the ground wire 229b are used. Since the static electricity of the player generated during the game is removed, a discharge occurs near the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, and the ball lending display unit 226 are provided. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball lending state display LED 226b, the ball lending board 227, and the like included in the device break down.

  FIG. 211 (a) schematically shows members near the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). FIG. 211B schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 211A. The shaded portions in FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b) indicate conductive portions 229a made of a conductive member. Further, a portion shown by a thick line indicates the ground wire 229b.

  FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b) show the ball lending operation base 223 in which the entire ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a transparent conductive synthetic resin instead of a transparent non-conductive synthetic resin, and is grounded. This shows a modification in which one end of the line 229b is attached to the bottom of the ball lending operation base 223. In this example, the ball rental operation base 223 functions as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is drawn out of the ball lending operation unit 220 through the ball lending board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main frame metal member provided on the main frame 4.

  With such a configuration, in order to start a game in the gaming machine 1, a finger of a player who tries to press the ball lending button 224 touches the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending operation base 223. Since the static electricity of the player is removed by the 223 (conductive portion 229a) and the ground wire 229b, a discharge occurs near the ball rental operation base 223, and the ball rental button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball lending status display LED 226b, the ball lending board 227, and the like included in the ball lending display unit 226 break down. Also, when the finger of the player who wants to end the game in the gaming machine 1 attempts to press the return button pressing portion 225a, the finger of the player comes into contact with the ball lending operation base 223, and the same effect is obtained. It is possible to obtain.

  Although the example in which the entire ball leasing operation base 223 is formed of a transparent conductive synthetic resin has been described, the entire ball leasing operation base 223 is formed of a transparent non-conductive synthetic resin, and the entire surface thereof has a transparent conductive resin. The conductive portion 229a may be formed by applying a paint. Alternatively, after the entire ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a transparent non-conductive synthetic resin and a predetermined portion of the front and rear surfaces of the ball lending operation base 223 is masked so that the ball lending display portion 226 becomes visible. Alternatively, the conductive portion 229a may be formed by vacuum-depositing aluminum on a portion other than the masked portion.

  FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (c) schematically show members near the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). FIG. 212D is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 212B. 212 (a) to 212 (d) indicate the conductive portion 229a made of a conductive member. Further, a portion shown by a thick line indicates the ground wire 229b.

  FIG. 212 (a) to FIG. 212 (d) show an opening in a ball lending operation base 223 made of a non-conductive synthetic resin, a conductive part 229a made of a conductive synthetic resin attached from below, and a ground wire 229b. Is attached to the lower surface of the conductive portion 229a. FIG. 212A shows an example in which a conductive portion 229a is attached between a ball lending button 224 and a return button 225. FIG. 212 (b) is an example in which the conductive portion 229a has a right angle and the conductive portion 229a is attached between the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225, and between the ball lending button 224 and the ball lending display portion 226. . FIG. 212 (c) shows an example in which a conductive portion 229a is attached between the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display portion 226. The ground wire 229b is drawn out of the ball lending operation unit 220 through the ball lending board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main frame metal member provided on the main frame 4.

  With such a configuration, in order to start the game in the gaming machine 1, the finger of the player who tried to operate the ball lending button 224 is likely to move close to the ball lending display unit 226 behind the finger. Even if it becomes, since the static electricity of the player is removed by the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire 229b, a discharge occurs near the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button micro switch 224d and the return button micro The switch 225d, the seven-segment LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b of the ball rental display unit 226, the ball rental board 227, and the like can be prevented from occurring.

  213 (a) to 213 (d) and FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c) schematically show members near the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). . FIG. 213 (e) is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 213 (c). In FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (e) and FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c), the shaded portions indicate conductive portions 229a made of a conductive member. Further, a portion shown by a thick line indicates the conductive portion 229a or the ground wire 229b.

  FIG. 213 (a) to FIG. 213 (d) show conductive paint around an opening for exposing a ball lending button pressing portion 224a provided on a ball lending operation base 223 formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin. This is a modified example in which a conductive portion 229a is provided by applying a conductive material. FIG. 213 (a) is an example in which a conductive portion 229a is provided concentrically with the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. FIG. 213 (b) is an example in which the area of the left side and the near side is widened in the conductive portion 229a provided concentrically. FIG. 213 (c) is an example in which the concentric conductive portion 229a is provided only in the front half. FIG. 213 (d) is an example in which the conductive portion 229a provided concentrically is divided into four parts at the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. In addition, as the conductive paint, a colorless and transparent paint may be used, or a colored paint may be used.

  FIG. 213 (a) to FIG. 213 (d) show how to provide the conductive portion 229a in plan view. FIG. 213 (e) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 213 (c). As shown by a thick line in FIG. The side wall of the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a provided on the ball lending operation base 223, the bottom surface of the ball lending operation base 223, and the flange-like portion provided at the end of the ball lending operation base 223 The conductive portion 229a is formed by continuously applying the conductive paint over the entire surface. One end of the ground wire 229b is attached to the lower surface of a flange-like portion provided at the end of the ball lending operation base 223 functioning as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is drawn out of the ball lending operation unit 220 through the ball lending board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main frame metal member provided on the main frame 4.

  With such a configuration, in order to start the game in the gaming machine 1, the finger of the player who has pressed the ball lending button 224 is pressed by the conductive portion 229a provided around the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. , The static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire 229b, so that a discharge occurs near the ball rental operation base 223, and the ball rental button micro switch 224d and the return button micro The switch 225d, the seven-segment LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b of the ball rental display unit 226, the ball rental board 227, and the like can be prevented from occurring.

  FIG. 213 (b) is a modified example in which the area of the left side and the near side is widened in the conductive part 229a provided concentrically. With such a configuration, when the finger is approached from the near side or the left side In addition, the probability that the player's finger contacts the conductive portion 229a can be increased. FIG. 213 (c) is a modification in which the conductive portion 229a is provided only in the front half. This is because the player generally moves his / her finger from the near side to press the ball lending button 224, and thus it is not always necessary to provide the conductive portion 229a for the rear half. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of the paint forming the conductive portion 229a. FIG. 213 (d) is a modified example in which the conductive paint is provided at a plurality of sites. The side wall of the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a provided on the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending operation is performed. It is desirable to apply a conductive paint on at least one of the bottom surface of the base 223 and the flange-shaped portion provided at the end of the ball lending operation base 223 so that a plurality of portions are electrically connected. With such a configuration, the degree of freedom regarding the shape of the conductive portion 229a can be increased. In particular, when a colored conductive paint is used, both design and conductivity can be achieved.

  FIG. 213 (a) to FIG. 213 (e) show an example in which the conductive paint is applied to the periphery of the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. May be adopted. FIG. 214 (a) is a modified example in which a conductive paint is applied around an opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a.

  With such a configuration, the finger of the player who wants to end the game in the gaming machine 1 comes into contact with the conductive portion 229a provided around the return button pressing portion 225a, so that the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire are provided. Since the static electricity of the player is removed by 229b, a discharge occurs near the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, and the ball lending display unit 226 have seven segments. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the LED 226a, the ball lending state display LED 226b, the ball lending board 227, and the like break down.

  FIGS. 214 (b) and 214 (c) show a conductive portion 229a formed by applying a conductive paint to the ball lending operation base 223 so as to include both the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a. This is a modified example. By adopting such a configuration, the possibility that the finger of the player comes into contact with the conductive portion 229a is increased regardless of which pressing portion is pressed, so that FIG. 213 (a) and FIG. 214 (a) are used. As compared with the case where the conductive portion 229a is provided only around one of the pressing portions as described above, the ball lending button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a and the ball lending status display LED 226b of the ball lending display portion 226, It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation where the ball rental board 227 or the like breaks down. Further, the degree of freedom regarding the shape of the conductive portion 229a can be increased. In particular, when a colored conductive paint is used, both design and conductivity can be achieved.

  In FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (e) and FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c), the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the opening for exposing the return button pressing portion 225a are shown. Although an example in which the conductive portion 229a is formed by applying a conductive paint to the periphery has been described, the conductive portion 229a may be provided by a method other than applying the conductive paint. For example, the conductive portion 229a may be formed by bending a thin piece made of a metal such as aluminum and attaching the thin piece to the opening of the ball rental base 223. In addition, a conductive portion 229a made of a conductive synthetic resin is formed in advance, and the ball lending operation base 223 and the conductive portion 229a are integrally molded by insert molding when molding the ball lending operation base 223 with the synthetic resin. You may.

  215 (a) and 215 (b) schematically show members near the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). FIG. 215 (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 215 (b). 215 (a) to 215 (c) indicate a conductive portion 229a made of a conductive member. Further, a portion shown by a thick line indicates the conductive portion 229a or the ground wire 229b.

  FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b) show that a conductive paint is applied around an opening for mounting a ball rental operation base 223 provided on a base portion 221 formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin. This is a modification in which a conductive portion 229a is provided. FIG. 215 (a) is an example in which a conductive portion 229a is provided concentrically with the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 215 (b) is an example in which the concentric conductive portion 229a is provided only in the front half. In addition, as the conductive paint, a colorless and transparent paint may be used, or a colored paint may be used.

  FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b) show how to provide the conductive portion 229a in plan view. FIG. 215 (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 215 (b). The conductive portion 229a is configured by continuously applying a conductive paint over the side wall of the opening for mounting the ball-and-ball rental operation base 223 provided on the portion 221 and the bottom surface of the base portion 221. One end of the ground wire 229b is attached to the bottom surface of the base portion 221 functioning as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is drawn out of the ball lending operation unit 220 through the ball lending board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main frame metal member provided on the main frame 4.

  With such a configuration, in order to start or end the game in the gaming machine 1, a finger of a player who attempts to press the ball lending button 224 or the return button 225 is provided around the ball lending operation base 223. Since the static electricity of the player is removed by the conductive part 229a and the ground wire 229b by contacting the conductive part 229a, the discharge occurs near the ball rental operation base 223, and the ball rental button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball lending state display LED 226b of the ball lending display unit 226, the ball lending board 227, and the like can be prevented from occurring.

  FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (c) show an example in which the conductive portion 229a is formed by applying a conductive paint around the opening for mounting the ball rental operation base 223. The conductive portion 229a may be provided by a method other than applying a paint. For example, the conductive portion 229a may be formed by bending a thin piece of metal such as aluminum and attaching it to the opening of the base portion 221. Alternatively, the conductive portion 229a made of a conductive synthetic resin may be formed in advance, and the base portion 221 and the conductive portion 229a may be integrally molded by insert molding when molding the base portion 221 with the synthetic resin.

  FIG. 216 (a) schematically shows members near the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). FIG. 216 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 216 (a). The shaded portions in FIGS. 216A and 216B indicate conductive portions 229a made of a conductive member. Further, a portion shown by a thick line indicates the ground wire 229b.

  FIGS. 216 (a) and 216 (b) show a modification in which the base portion 221 formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin is formed of a conductive synthetic resin, and the base portion 221 functions as the conductive portion 229a. It is an example. One end of the ground wire 229b is attached to the bottom surface of the base portion 221 functioning as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is drawn out of the ball lending operation unit 220 through the ball lending board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main frame metal member provided on the main frame 4.

  With such a configuration, in order to start or end the game in the gaming machine 1, the finger or the palm of the player who has attempted to press the ball lending button 224 or the return button 225 has the ball lending operation base 223. Since the static electricity of the player is removed by the conductive part 229a and the ground wire 229b by contacting the surrounding conductive part 229a, a discharge occurs near the ball rental operation base 223, and the ball rental is performed. The button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, the seven-segment LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b, and the ball rental board 227 included in the ball rental display unit 226 can be prevented from being out of order.

  When the upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin and the ground wire drawn from the upper plate 201 is finally connected to the ground circuit board 559, the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201 are connected to each other. It may be configured to be electrically conductive so that the static electricity of the player flows from the base 221 to the upper plate 201. As a method of electrically connecting the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201, the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201 are connected by a ground wire, or the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201 are directly contacted. Good to do.

  Up to here, FIGS. 209 (a) to 216 (b) show an example in which the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed by providing the conductive portion 229 a near the ball rental operation base 223. On the other hand, if the ball lending button 224 or the ball lending button 225 is pressed by mistake while playing a game, unnecessary ball lending is performed or a prepaid card is ejected, and so on. There is also a problem that is reduced. Therefore, a modified example in consideration of solving such a problem will be described.

  FIGS. 217 (a) to 217 (c) are diagrams showing a modification of FIG. 210 (c). FIG. 217 (a) shows an example in which the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation is at the same height as the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 217 (b) shows an example in which the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation is lower than the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. In such an example, although the occurrence of an erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is suppressed, from the viewpoint of removing static electricity possessed by the player, the risk of failure of the electric component increases. FIG. 217 (c) shows an example in which the ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin and functions as the conductive portion 229a. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove static electricity possessed by the player while preventing an erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a.

  FIGS. 218 (a) to 218 (c) are diagrams showing a modification of FIG. 211 (b). FIG. 218 (a) shows the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a at the same height as the upper surface of the conductive ball lending operation base 223 during the non-pressing operation, and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a being the ball lending operation base 223. The example shown in FIG. FIG. 218 (b) shows the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a at the time of the non-pressing operation having a downwardly convex spherical shape, and the peripheral portion thereof being flush with the upper surface of the conductive ball lending operation base 223. An example is shown in which the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a has an upwardly convex spherical shape, and the center thereof is at the same height as the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. In FIG. 218 (c), the height of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a or the return button pressing portion 225a is not changed, and the entire periphery of the ball lending operation base 223 is formed so as to be convex upward. An example is shown in which the height of the top of the portion is higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation or the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove static electricity possessed by the player while preventing erroneous operations on the ball lending button pressing section 224a and the return button pressing section 225a.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 212 (d). FIG. 219 shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a is projected in a wall shape to a position higher than the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. The height of the conductive portion 229a is higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove static electricity possessed by the player while preventing erroneous operations on the ball lending button pressing section 224a and the return button pressing section 225a.

  FIGS. 220 (a) and 220 (b) are diagrams showing a modification of FIG. 213 (e). FIG. 220 (a) shows an opening in which the ball lending button pressing portion 224a of the ball lending operation base 223 is exposed, extends upward in a tubular shape, and the height of the top is higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. An example is shown. FIG. 220B shows an example in which the overall thickness of the ball lending operation base 223 is increased, and the height of the upper surface thereof is higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. In addition, an electric section 229a is provided in each of the openings where the ball lending button pressing section 224a is exposed. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove static electricity possessed by the player while preventing erroneous operations on the ball lending button pressing section 224a and the return button pressing section 225a.

FIG. 221 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 215 (c). FIG. 221 shows the base 221.
The example in which the semicircular convex part whose cross section is convex upward is continuously formed in the peripheral part of the opening for exposing the ball lending operation base 223 in FIG. The height of the top of the projection is higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. In addition, a conductive portion 229a is provided on the convex portion provided on the base portion 221. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove static electricity possessed by the player while preventing erroneous operations on the ball lending button pressing section 224a and the return button pressing section 225a.

  FIGS. 222 (a) and 222 (b) are views showing a modification of FIG. 216 (b). FIG. 222A shows an example in which the ball lending operation base 223 is attached to a cylindrical opening vertically extending downward provided in the conductive base 221. FIG. 222B shows an example in which a cylindrical opening extending downward is provided in the conductive base portion 221, and the opening is formed so as to taper downward. The height of the upper surface of the base portion 221 is higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove static electricity possessed by the player while preventing erroneous operations on the ball lending button pressing section 224a and the return button pressing section 225a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (a), the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 are arranged so as to fit within the circular ball lending operation base 223 when viewed in a plan view. Hereinafter, a modified example of the arrangement and shape of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 will be described. In the following modifications, the technical concept of the conductive portion 229a shown in FIGS. 209 to 222 can be appropriately adopted.

  FIG. 223 (a) shows an example in which the ball lending operation base 223 is rectangular. FIG. 223 (b) shows an example in which a ball lending button 224 and a return button 225 are provided on the base unit 221. Also, an example is shown in which the conductive unit 229 is provided on the base unit 221 so as to be located between the ball lending display unit 226, the ball lending button 224, and the return button 225. As a method of providing the conductive portion 229a on the base portion 221, a mounting method as shown in FIG. 212 can be employed. Although the example in which the conductive portion 229a is attached as shown in FIG. 212 is shown, a method described in a drawing other than FIG. 212 may be adopted instead of such a method. This is the same in the following modified examples. FIG. 223 (c) shows an example in which the shape of the return button 225 is made the same circle as the ball lend button 224, and the size of the return button 225 is smaller than the ball lend button 224. The size of the ball lending button 224 may be the same size as the return button 225, or may be smaller than the return button 225. FIG. 223 (d) shows an example in which a ball lending button 224, a conductive part 229a, a ball lending display part 226, and a return button 225 are arranged from the left in the horizontal direction. FIG. 223 (e) is a modified example of FIG. 223 (d), and shows an example in which a conductive portion 229a is arranged between the ball lending display portion 226 and the return button 225. FIG. 223 (f) shows an example in which a ball lending button 224, a conductive portion 229a, a return button 225, and a ball lending display portion 226 are arranged in the horizontal direction from the left.

  FIG. 224 (a) shows an example in which a ball lending display unit 226, a conductive unit 229a, a ball lending button 224, and a return button 225 are arranged from the left in the horizontal direction. In FIG. 224 (b), the ball lending display unit 226, the conductive unit 229a, the ball lending button 224, and the return button 225 are arranged from the left in the horizontal direction, and the conductive unit 229a is arranged in front of the ball lending display unit 226. FIG. FIG. 224 (c) shows an example in which the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 are arranged on the left side, the ball lending display section 226 is arranged on the right side, and the conductive section 229a is arranged therebetween. FIG. 224 (d) shows an example in which the ball lending display unit 226 is arranged in the front, the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 are arranged in the rear, and four conductive units 229a are arranged around the ball lending display unit 226. It is a thing. Further, an example is shown in which the area of the two conductive portions 229a on the left side and the front side of the four conductive portions 229a where the finger of the player's left hand is likely to approach is large.

  According to the example shown in FIGS. 223 (a) to 224 (d), a ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224, a return button 225, and a ball lending display unit 226 provided in the ball lending operation unit 220 are arranged. In this case, it is possible to remove static electricity possessed by the player while increasing the degree of freedom in design.

  Although the example in which the ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the right side in front of the gaming machine has been described, the ball rental operation unit 220 may be provided at another position in front of the gaming machine. For example, you may comprise so that it may be provided in the position of the front side of the upper plate 201 provided in the left side of a gaming machine, or the position of the front side of the lower plate 202.

  The example in which the ball lending state display LED 226b is provided in the ball lending display unit 226 to display the ball lending state is shown. However, the same LED is provided in the ball lending button 224, and the ball lending button pressing unit 224a is colored or colorless and transparent. It may be formed of a synthetic resin, and may be configured to turn on the LED that has been turned off until the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is pressed or until the ball lending is completed. . Further, the lighting mode of the LED may be made different at the start of ball lending, during ball lending, and at the time of ball lending end. In driving the LED, a drive circuit may be provided in the ball lending button 224 or on the ball lending board 227 to drive the LED.

  With such a configuration, it is determined that the pressing operation on the ball lending button pressing unit 224a is appropriately received and the ball lending has been started, that the ball lending is normally performed, and that the ball lending has ended. Are more easily recognized.

  Although the example in which the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is formed of a transparent synthetic resin has been described, the ball lending button pressing portion 224a may be formed of a translucent translucent synthetic resin. In this case, the ball lending button spring 224c and the ball lending button microswitch 224d are invisible or invisible to the player, so that the aesthetic appearance of the ball lending button 224 can be enhanced.

  Further, as the lighting mode of the LED described above, a continuous lighting state (for example, about 2-3 seconds), a fast blinking state, a slow blinking state, an unlit state, and the like may be adopted. Alternatively, an LED that can emit multicolor light (white, red, green, blue, etc.) may be adopted as the LED, and the LED may be driven to emit light in a different emission color for the above-described lighting mode. For example, the LED may be driven to emit light in a white and fast blinking state at the start of lending a ball, and the LED may be driven to emit light in a lighting state continued in blue (for example, about 2-3 seconds) at the end of lending a ball.

  With such a configuration, it is determined that the pressing operation on the ball lending button pressing unit 224a is appropriately received and the ball lending has been started, that the ball lending is normally performed, and that the ball lending has ended. Are more easily recognized.

  Although a modification in which an LED or the like is provided in the ball lending button 224 has been described, a similar configuration may be employed in the return button 225. For example, that the pressing operation on the return button pressing unit 225a is properly received and the return processing of the prepaid card is started, that the return processing of the prepaid card is normally performed, and that the return processing of the prepaid card is completed Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted as shown by the lighting mode of the LEDs provided in the return button 225, respectively. With such a configuration, the player can more easily recognize the state of the return processing.

  Although an example in which a conductive synthetic resin or a conductive paint is used as a member for forming the conductive portion 229a has been described, the conductive portion constituting a portion where a contact of a player described in each embodiment is assumed is assumed. Instead of the member, another conductive member may be adopted. Examples of the conductive member include a synthetic resin containing a carbon filler or a metal powder, a synthetic resin having a surface subjected to a vacuum deposition process or a plating process of aluminum or a conductive paint, a carbon filler or a metal powder. An elastic body such as rubber or a metal such as stainless steel or brass may be employed. In the case where a vacuum deposition process or a metal is used, the surface thereof shows a metallic luster, so that the design can be improved. Further, even when the conductive portion 229a is formed using a colored conductive paint, if the same color non-conductive paint is applied to a portion that is not the conductive portion 229a, the conductivity is exhibited without deteriorating the design. It is possible to do.

  For example, a vacuum deposition process of aluminum is performed on the entire surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin, or the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is formed of a synthetic resin containing a carbon filler. A colored or colorless conductive paint may be applied to the entire surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin, or the ball lending button pressing portion 224a may be made of carbon filler or rubber containing metal powder. The lendable button pressing portion 224a may be configured to function as the conductive portion 229a by being formed of an elastic body or by forming the ball lending button pressing portion 224a of a metal such as stainless steel or brass.

  The ball rental button pressing portion 224a has been described as a modified example in which another conductive member is employed. In), the above-described conductive member may be employed.

  The above-described technical idea may be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which a game ball is sealed in a game machine and the game ball circulates inside the game machine. An example is shown below. In the ball lending display section 226, the ball lending number is displayed above the 7-segment LED 226a for displaying the number of balls lent to the player. When the player operates the ball lending button 224, for example, at the start of a game, the frequency displayed on the 7-segment LED 226a is subtracted from the existing frequency and displayed for the frequency corresponding to the number of lent balls. The number of balls for lending displayed on the number-of-lending-balls display LED by the number corresponding to the number of balls that have been added is displayed in addition to the number of existing balls for lending. During the game, the number of balls to be loaned displayed on the number-of-leased balls display LED increases or decreases due to the launch of the game ball or the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning opening. At the end of the game, when the player operates the ball lending button 224, data indicating the number of balls to be loaned displayed on the number-of-balls-displayed LED and the frequency displayed on the seven-segment LED 226a are recorded on the prepaid card, After being transmitted to the management device via the inter-machine, the prepaid card is ejected from the inter-machine. In such a configuration, by employing the conductive portion 229a as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number-of-leased-ball display LED fails.

  The purpose is to protect the LED which is an electronic element constituting each segment of the ball lending display section 226 (7-segment LED 226a, ball lending status display LED 226b) arranged near the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 from static electricity. Although the embodiment has been described, the above-described embodiment is applied to an LED mounted on the upper surface of the central button decoration board 376 so as to emit light when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed and to increase the player's willingness to play. It is possible. Further, the above embodiment can be applied not only to the ball rental display unit 226 and the center button decoration board 376 but also to LEDs mounted on various boards having a light emitting function provided in the gaming machine 1. is there.

  Also, a drive circuit for driving an LED mounted on various substrates having a light emitting function to emit light, a drive circuit for driving a vibration motor 332b provided for vibrating the effect operation unit 301, and the like. The above embodiment can be applied. The drive circuit is constituted by an IC in which a plurality of electronic elements are integrated or an electronic circuit constituted by a plurality of electronic elements, but an IC in which a plurality of electronic elements other than the drive circuit which need to be protected from static electricity are integrated. The above embodiments can be applied to an electronic circuit including a plurality of electronic elements. Although the example in which the present invention is applied to an IC in which a plurality of electronic elements are integrated or an electronic circuit including a plurality of electronic elements has been described, a single electronic element (eg, a transistor, a capacitor, a diode, a resistor, an LED, a fuse) is used. Can be applied to the substrate provided in the gaming machine 1 to apply the above embodiment.

In the above embodiment, the base unit 221, the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the like are described as the conductive unit 229a. It is also possible to provide a possible cross-shaped direction input key and a production operation button that is operated at the time of production while the design is changing, and apply the above-described technical idea regarding the countermeasures against static electricity to these.

  In the gaming machine, as described with reference to FIG. 203, there is a case where an illegal electric circuit or an illegal board is arranged at a position that is difficult for a store clerk of the gaming hall to notice. Such an illegal electric circuit or an illegal board can be mounted also on the front side of the external terminal board 558. For example, by disguising a signal output from the external terminal board 558, May also be used for the purpose of concealing that fraud has been committed.

  By the way, when attaching a signal line to the external terminal board 558 from the island facility side, first, the gaming machine 1 is placed on the island facility, and the outer frame 2 is fixed to the island facility, so that the gaming machine 1 is attached to the island facility. Then, by opening the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 in a door shape, the rear surface side of the main body frame 4 is exposed, and then the external terminal plate 558 provided on the main body frame 4 is Signal lines from island facilities were to be connected. However, if the external terminal plate 558 is fixedly provided to the main body frame 4, there is a problem that it is difficult to connect a signal line from the island facility to the external terminal plate 558. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the external terminal plate 558 is configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4 as described below.

  By the way, when the external terminal board 558 is detachable from the main body frame 4 as described above, after the signal line from the island facility is connected to the external terminal board 558, the external terminal board 558 is connected to the main body frame 4. Otherwise, when the main frame 4 is closed, the signal line from the island equipment or the external terminal plate 558 itself will be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and The signal line or the external terminal plate 558 itself may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown below, whether an illegal electric circuit or an illegal board is attached to the front side of the external terminal board 558, or whether the external terminal board 558 is properly attached to the main body frame 4 or not. When the game board 5 is removed from the gaming machine 1 by making the structure behind the payout base 551 constituting the main body frame 4 visible so that it can be confirmed whether or not it is located outside the main body frame 4. The attached state of the terminal plate 558 can be confirmed from the front side of the main body frame 4. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1, the existing game board 5 is set to a new state in which the door frame 3 is opened at a predetermined angle with respect to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. When attempting to replace the game board 5, when removing the existing game board 5, there is no improper electric circuit or improper board attached to the front side of the external terminal board 558, and the external terminal board 558 is properly connected to the main body. It is possible to confirm from the front side whether or not it is attached to the frame 4.

  FIG. 225 (A) is a perspective view schematically showing the payout base unit 550 in the present embodiment. 225 (A), the payout base unit 550 has a structure in which a ball tank 552, a tank rail 553, a payout unit 560, and an external terminal plate unit 594 are attached to a payout base 551. FIG. 225 (B) shows a state in which the external terminal plate unit 594 is attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k which is a part of the payout base 551. In the present embodiment, the payout base 551 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Note that, instead of the colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the payout base 551 may be formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin or a translucent synthetic resin.

  FIG. 226 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 225 (B). FIG. 226 shows a state in which the external terminal plate unit 594 is attached to the payout base 551. In front of the payout base 551, the game board 5 is detachably positioned. The dispensing base 551 has an external terminal plate mounting portion 551k that is inclined so that the upper portion thereof is inclined forward in a region on the right side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the rear. The plate unit 594 is detachably attached by a not-shown locking portion. The external terminal plate mounting portion 551k is formed integrally with the payout base 551, and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin like the payout base 551. Further, it is formed in a planar shape, with the upper part inclined forward.

Further, the external terminal board unit 594 is formed by the external terminal board 558 and the mounting surface cover 595 located on the back side of the external terminal board 558. The mounting surface cover 595 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Further, the mounting surface cover 595 is provided with an opening for attaching a signal line from an island facility to the output terminals PT1 to PT10.
The side wall of the mounting surface cover 595 has an external terminal plate locking portion 551l that can detachably lock the external terminal plate 558.

  FIG. 227 (A) is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 225 (B). FIG. 227 (B) is an enlarged view of the photocoupler PC1 shown in FIG. 227 (A). The external terminal board 558 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular printed board, and both sides are covered with a green resist. On the rear side of the external terminal plate 558, an external terminal plate side connector 558b, photocouplers PC1 to PC10, and output terminals PT1 to PT10 for connecting signal lines from island facilities are provided. On the back side of the external terminal plate 558, a green resist is exposed. The signals input from the payout control board 633 to the external terminal plate 558, the photocouplers, and the output terminals PT1 to PT10 specifically adopt the embodiments described above with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. You may.

  To the external terminal plate side connector 558b, a payout control board side connector provided at an end of a wiring for transmitting a signal from the payout control board 633 is detachably connected, and a signal from the payout control board 633 is externally connected. After the signal is transmitted to the terminal board 558 and converted by the photocouplers PC1 to PC10, the signal from the payout control board 633 is finally output to the signal line to the island facility by the output terminals PT1 to PT10. Is transmitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 227 (A) and 227 (B), no electronic components are mounted on the front side of the external terminal board 558, and a green resist and a printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 are formed. The external terminal board side connector 558b, the photocoupler PC1 to the photocoupler PC10, and the metal terminal 558c made of a thin metal wire of the output terminal PT1 to the output terminal PT10 that have passed through the through-hole are connected to the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558. It is exposed in an upright or slightly bent state. Further, the metal terminals 558c exposed through the through holes of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558 are attached to the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558 by solder portions 558d. This surface is visible from the front side via the transparent payout base 551. As described above, since no extra components are mounted on the front side of the external terminal board 558, it can be easily confirmed whether or not an improper electric circuit or an improper board is installed. In the following embodiments, this surface where only the metal terminal 558c and the solder portion 558d are visually recognized may be referred to as a solder surface.

  Instead of the example shown in FIG. 227 (A), an external terminal plate 558 may be directly attached to the payout base 551 as shown in FIG. 228 (A). FIG. 228 (A) schematically shows a cross-sectional view of an external terminal plate attaching portion 551k and an external terminal plate 558 attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k. In this example, the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k is provided integrally with the external terminal plate locking portion 551l and the external terminal plate spacer 551m. Specifically, the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k, the external terminal plate locking portion 551l, and the external terminal plate spacer 551m may be integrally formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate spacer 551m may have a columnar shape perpendicular to the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k.

  In the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k having such a structure, the external terminal plate locking portion 551l is elastically deformed outward, and the external terminal plate 558 is placed on the external terminal plate spacer 551m. By releasing the elastic deformation of the portion 551l, the external terminal plate 558 can be held by the external terminal plate locking portion 551l and the surface forming the top of the external terminal plate spacer 551m. In addition, the external terminal plate 558 can be detached by elastically deforming the external terminal plate locking portion 551l to the outside in a state where the external terminal plate 558 is thus mounted on the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. I have. In a state where the external terminal plate 558 is attached, the surface forming the top of the external terminal plate spacer 551m is a metal terminal 558c which stands upright from a solder surface of a printed circuit board constituting the external terminal plate 558 or a solder for fixing the metal terminal 558c. The printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 is configured to be in contact with the resist-coated surface without making contact with the portion 558d.

  As shown in FIGS. 227 (A) and 228 (A), the external terminals are separated from each other by a predetermined distance (about 2 to 5 mm) without the metal terminals 558c and the solder portions 558d coming into contact with the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. By configuring so that the board unit 594 and the external terminal board 558 can be attached, game balls are supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 provided adjacent to the external terminal board 558, or the game ball moves within the island facility. The metal terminal 558c of the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the external terminal board 558 is dispensed by a transparent synthetic resin due to vibration generated by the operation of various members in the gaming machine 1 or the like. By contacting the base 551 many times, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the payout base 551 is damaged and the visibility of the external terminal plate 558 is reduced. Also, when attaching / detaching the external terminal plate 558, the metal terminal 558c of the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the external terminal plate 558 comes into contact with the payout base 551 formed of a transparent synthetic resin many times. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the payout base 551 is damaged and the visibility of the external terminal plate 558 is reduced. Further, since the external terminal plate locking portion 551l and the external terminal plate spacer 551m are formed of a colorless and transparent member similarly to the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k, an incorrect electric circuit or an incorrect substrate is installed. Possible blind spots can be reduced.

  Instead of the example shown in FIG. 227 (A), an external terminal plate unit 594 may be formed as shown in FIG. 228 (B). In the example shown in FIG. 228 (B), the external terminal plate 558, the mounting surface cover 595 located on the back side of the external terminal plate 558, and the solder surface cover 596 located on the front side of the external terminal plate 558 make the external terminal It is configured to form a plate unit 594. The external terminal plate unit 594 may be configured to be detachable from the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. The mounting surface cover 595 and the solder surface cover 596 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The mounting surface cover 595 is provided with openings for attaching signal lines from island facilities to the output terminals PT1 to PT10.

  Instead of the example shown in FIG. 227 (A), as shown in FIG. 228 (C), an external terminal plate 558 is mounted on a cylindrical external terminal plate mounting case 597 to form an external terminal plate unit 594. The external terminal plate unit 594 may be configured to be detachably attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k. Specifically, a plurality of plate-shaped external terminal plate mounting portions 597a that stand upright from the inner wall of the external terminal plate mounting case 597 toward the inside of the case are provided. It is good to constitute so that it may be mounted. Further, the external terminal plate 558 may be fixed to the external terminal plate mounting case 597 by screwing a printed board constituting the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 597a.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 227 (A) to 228 (C), the outer periphery of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558 may be entirely covered. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 227 (A) and 228 (B), the external shape of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal plate 558 and the inner peripheral shape of the mounting surface cover 595 are the same, and the external terminal plate When the 558 is attached to the mounting surface cover 595, it is preferable that the end surface of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the inner circumference of the mounting surface cover 595 abut without any gap. With such a configuration, it is difficult to pass an incorrect electric circuit or wiring from an incorrect board between the end surface of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the outer peripheral end surface and the mounting surface cover 595, It is possible to suppress execution of an illegal act.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 228 (A), an upright wall having the same height as the tip of the external terminal plate locking portion 551l is attached to the external terminal plate 558 so as to surround the external shape of the printed board constituting the external terminal plate 558. It is preferable to provide the mounting portion 551k so that the inner wall of such an upright wall abuts the end surface of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 which forms the outer periphery without any gap.

  In the example shown in FIG. 228 (C), instead of providing a plurality of plate-shaped external terminal plate mounting portions 597a standing inward from the inner wall of the external terminal plate mounting case 597 toward the inside, one external terminal is provided. The plate mounting portion 597a may be configured to go around the inside of the external terminal plate mounting case 597, and the external terminal plate 558 may be mounted thereon. In this case, the height of the external terminal plate mounting portion 597a from the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k may be constant. With such a configuration, the bottom surface at the peripheral edge of the printed circuit board that forms the external terminal plate 558 comes into contact with the upper surface of the external terminal plate mounting portion 597a without any gap. Further, in a state where the external terminal plate 558 is placed on the external terminal plate placement portion, the end surface that forms the outer periphery of the printed circuit board that forms the external terminal plate 558 and the inner periphery of the external terminal plate placement case 597 have no gap. You may comprise so that it may contact. With such a configuration, it is more difficult to pass an incorrect electric circuit or an incorrect wiring from the board between the end surface which forms the outer periphery of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the mounting surface cover 595. In addition, it is possible to further suppress the execution of an illegal act.

  In the example shown in FIG. 228 (C), the entire bottom surface and end surface of the peripheral portion of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal plate 558 are connected to the upper surface of the external terminal plate mounting portion 597a and the external terminal plate mounting case 597. 227 (A) to 228 (B), the external terminal plate locking portion which can be elastically deformed to the outside in the example shown in FIGS. 227 (A) to 228 (B). The external terminal plate 558 is locked by 551l. Then, in such an external terminal plate locking portion 551l, in order to enable elastic deformation, the external terminal plate locking portion 551l is disposed on the left and right sides of the external terminal plate locking portion 551l with respect to the length direction. It is necessary to provide a slit-shaped structure, but in this slit-shaped portion, the bottom surface and the end surface of the peripheral portion of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558 cannot be abutted without any gap. Therefore, as a portion to be brought into contact as described above, it is preferable that at least a portion excluding the external terminal plate locking portion 551l be brought into contact.

  Similarly, when attaching the external terminal plate unit 594 to the external terminal plate attachment portion 551k, it is desirable that the external terminal plate unit 594 be attached so as to be in contact with no gap. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 227 (A), the external terminal plate is placed in a state where the surfaces forming the lower ends of the four side walls provided in the mounting surface cover 595 are in contact with the surface forming the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. The unit 594 may be configured to be mounted on the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 228 (B), the surfaces forming the lower ends of the four side walls provided in the mounting surface cover 595 and the surfaces forming the upper ends of the four side walls provided in the solder surface cover 596 correspond to each other. The external terminal plate unit 594 is configured to be in contact with the external terminal plate unit 594, and the external terminal plate unit 594 is mounted to the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k while the entire lower surface of the solder surface cover 596 is in contact with the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. It is good to constitute so that it becomes. In the example shown in FIG. 228 (C), the external terminal plate mounting case 597 is in a state where the surfaces forming the lower ends of the four side walls and the surface forming the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k are in contact with each other. The terminal plate unit 594 may be configured to be mounted on the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. As described above, the gap between the external terminal plate unit 594 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k is reduced as much as possible, so that the space in which an incorrect electric circuit or an incorrect board is provided can be reduced. Become.

  As a configuration in which the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 can be attached to and detached from the external terminal plate attachment portion 551k, for example, the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 may be fixed by a locking claw or the like, and may be configured to be detachable by a manual operation without using a tool. Alternatively, the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 may be configured to be detachably fixed to the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k with a screw or the like. As described above, by making the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 detachable from the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 558 can be removed. The work of connecting the signal lines from the island facilities can be performed efficiently.

  An openable / closable lid may be provided at an opening provided in the mounting surface cover 595 so that the upper part of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is covered when the lid is closed. With such a configuration, the external terminal board 558 can be protected after the wiring from the island facility is connected to the output terminals PT1 to PT10.

  The external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k are parallel to each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a space in which an incorrect electric circuit or an incorrect board can be attached.

  In the example shown in FIG. 227 (A), since the external terminal plate 558 is completely housed in the mounting surface cover 595 constituting the external terminal plate unit 594, the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k are not connected to each other. It is configured such that the mounting surface cover 595 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k come into contact with each other without contact. Here, the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k is made of a synthetic resin in which the hardness of the synthetic resin forming the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k is higher than the hardness of the synthetic resin forming the mounting surface cover 595. The synthetic resin and the synthetic resin forming the mounting surface cover 595 may be employed. Alternatively, the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k is made of a synthetic resin in which the hardness of the synthetic resin forming the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k and the hardness of the synthetic resin forming the mounting surface cover 595 are the same or almost the same. And the synthetic resin forming the mounting surface cover 595 may be employed. In this case, the same type of synthetic resin may be used as the synthetic resin forming the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k and the mounting surface cover 595. With such a configuration, when the external terminal plate unit 594 is attached or detached, the mounting surface cover 595 damages the external terminal plate attachment portion 551k, and the visibility of the external terminal plate attachment portion 551k decreases. Such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

  Note that when the external terminal plate unit 594 has the solder surface cover 596 as shown in FIG. 228 (B), the external terminal plate 558 does not damage the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. On the other hand, the external terminal plate 558 may damage the solder surface cover 596. Therefore, it is preferable that the solder surface cover 596 and the metal terminal 558c of the mounting component standing upright on the front surface of the external terminal plate 558 are arranged close to but not in contact with each other. For example, the solder surface cover 596 may be attached to the mounting surface cover 595 such that the tip of the metal terminal 558c is separated from the solder surface cover 596 by about 2 to 5 mm. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the metal surface 558c of the component mounted on the external terminal plate 558 damages the solder surface cover 596.

  FIG. 229 is a sectional view showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 229, the mounting surface cover 595 is formed in a trapezoidal cross section. In this example, as in the example shown in FIG. 226, the upper side of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558, which has a horizontally-long rectangular shape, is inclined forward. In addition, the solder surface of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558 is in a state of obliquely downward and forward. By adopting such a mode, when the game board 5 is removed and the clerk of the game hall visually recognizes the external terminal board mounting portion 551k from diagonally below, an unauthorized electric circuit or an unauthorized This makes it easy to confirm whether or not the substrate is attached. In addition, it is possible to easily check whether the external terminal plate unit 594 is properly attached.

  FIG. 230 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 230, the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k has an L-shaped cross section, and the external terminal plate unit 594 is mounted to the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k in such a state as to stand vertically. ing. In this example, the upper surface of the payout base 551 and the upper surface of the mounting surface cover 595 are flush. The back of the payout base 551 and the back of the mounting surface cover 595 are flush. By adopting such an embodiment, even if dust or dirt falls on the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k from between the external terminal plate units 594, the dust or dirt is formed on the vertical portion of the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. The visibility can be maintained in the vertical portion of the external terminal plate attachment portion 551k without the accumulation.

  FIG. 231 is a sectional view showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 231, the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k has a U-shaped cross section, and the external terminal plate unit 594 is mounted on the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k in a vertically standing state. doing. In this example, the back of the payout base 551 and the back of the mounting surface cover 595 are flush. By adopting such an aspect, as compared with the aspect of attachment of the external terminal plate unit 594 as shown in FIG. , And the visibility of the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k can be maintained. Further, since the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k is located below the example shown in FIG. 230, the front side of the external terminal plate 558 is more easily visible.

  FIG. 232 is a cross-sectional view showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 232, the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k has an L-shaped cross section, and the external terminal plate unit 594 is mounted on the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k in a horizontal state. . In this state, the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k in a state parallel to the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the payout base 551 and the upper surface of the mounting surface cover 595 are flush. The back surface of the payout base 551 and the back surface (side surface) of the mounting surface cover 595 are flush with each other.

  FIGS. 226 and 229 to 232 show examples in which the external terminal plate unit 594 including the external terminal plate 558 and the mounting surface cover 595 is attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k. In the example shown in FIGS. 229 to 232, the external terminal plate unit 594 and the external terminal plate 558 may be attached in the manner shown in FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (C).

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 226 and 229 to 231, the dispensing base 551 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, so that all of the solder surfaces located on the front side of the external terminal plate 558 are transparent external terminals. It is configured to be visible through the plate mounting portion 551k. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 232, all of the solder surfaces located on the lower surface side of the external terminal plate 558 are configured to be visible through the transparent external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. Not only is the dispensing base 551 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, but also members of the members constituting the main body frame base unit 500 that are formed of a material other than metal such as synthetic resin are formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the front side of the external terminal board 558. Further, the main frame base unit 500 and the payout base unit 550 may be integrally formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and in this embodiment, the front side of the external terminal plate 558 may be configured to be visible. Alternatively, an opening may be provided in the main body frame base unit 500, and the transparent external terminal plate mounting portion 551k and the external terminal plate 558 may be visible from the opening.

  Although the example in which the dispensing base 551 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been described, when the dispensing base 551 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, the dispensing is performed as illustrated in FIGS. 233 (A) to 234 (D). The external terminal plate 558 may be configured to be directly visible by providing a dispensing base opening 551n that forms a punched opening in the base 551. Further, even when the payout base 551 is formed of a translucent or colored transparent synthetic resin, the payout base 551 may be provided with a payout base opening 551n that forms a punched opening. In this case, the visibility of the external terminal plate 558 can be improved by making the external terminal plate 558 directly visible. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is checked whether an improper electric circuit or an improper board is attached to the front side of the external terminal board 558, and whether the external terminal board 558 is properly installed. can do.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 233 (A) to 234 (D), a plurality of examples in which the payout base openings 551n are provided will be described. In these drawings, the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 attached to the rear of the payout base 551 is viewed from the front. In this state, the external terminal board side connector 558b is located on the left side.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (A), a payout base 551 is formed with a payout base opening 551n in a horizontally long rectangular shape so that the central portion of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558 can be visually recognized. The upper side and the lower side of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the upper side and the lower side of the horizontally long rectangular dispensing base opening 551n are configured to be parallel to each other. Similarly, the left side and the right side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the left side and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular dispensing base opening 551n are configured to be parallel to each other. Further, the distance between each side forming the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558 and each side facing these sides in the horizontally long rectangular dispensing base opening 551n is the same. I have.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (B), a payout base opening 551n having a horizontally long rectangular shape is formed in the payout base 551 so that the lower side of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558 can be visually recognized. Further, the lower side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the upper side and the lower side of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. Also, the lower side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 is configured to be located at the center of the payout base opening 551n in the vertical direction.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (C), a payout base opening 551n having a square shape is formed in the payout base 551 so that the lower right part of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 can be visually recognized. Further, the lower side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the upper side and the lower side of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. Further, the right side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the left side and the right side of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. The lower right part of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558 has a right-angled shape, and the right-angled apex portion is configured to be located exactly at the center of the square-shaped dispensing base opening 551n. ing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (D), a rectangular notch is provided in the lower right portion of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal plate 558 so that a right-angled vertex located in the notch can be visually recognized. In addition, a square-shaped payout base opening 551n is formed in the payout base 551. Further, the lower side of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558, the lower side forming the cutout, and the upper side and the lower side of the payout base opening 551n are located in parallel. Further, the right side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558, the right side forming the cutout, and the left side and the right side of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. Further, the right-angled vertex portion located in the notch portion is configured to be located exactly at the center of the square-shaped payout base opening 551n.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (E), the payout base 551 is formed such that a part of the upper side connected to the right side and the right side and a part of the left side connected to the right side of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558 can be visually recognized. A payout opening 551n having a vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the base. Further, the right side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the left side and the right side of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. Further, the upper and lower sides of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the upper and lower sides of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. Further, the right side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 is configured to be located at the center of the payout base opening 551n in the left-right direction.

  In the example shown in FIG. 233 (F), two vertically elongated payout base openings 551n are formed on the right side of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558. Also, the right side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the left side and the right side of the two payout base openings 551n are arranged in parallel. Further, the upper and lower sides of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the upper and lower sides of the two payout base openings 551n are located in parallel.

  By employing the configuration shown in FIGS. 233 (A) to 233 (F), it becomes easy to confirm whether or not an incorrect electric circuit or an incorrect board is attached to the front side of the external terminal plate 558. In addition, it is easy to confirm whether the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is properly attached.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 233 (B) and 233 (E), since the payout base opening 551n has a rectangular shape, the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is attached to the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k. When properly attached, the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is not visible, and the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is appropriately attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k. However, when the right side of the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 hangs down about the external terminal plate side connector 558b as an axis, the external terminal plate exposed from the payout base opening 551n. Since the side 585 and the long side forming the payout base opening 551n are not parallel, the external terminal plate 558 Rui can recognize accurately that the external terminal plate unit 594 is not properly installed.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 233 (C) and 233 (D), the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is not properly mounted on the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k, and thus, Even if the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is not properly attached, the user can recognize that the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is not properly attached.

  In the example shown in FIG. 234 (A), a vertically long rectangular dispensing base opening 551n is formed at the lower right side of the printed circuit board forming the external terminal board 558. Further, the lower side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the upper side and the lower side of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. Further, the right side of the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 and the right side and the left side of the payout base opening 551n are arranged in parallel. In this example, when the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is appropriately attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k, the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 cannot be visually recognized, The external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is not properly attached to the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k, and the right side of the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is downward with the external terminal plate side connector 558b as an axis. In the case where the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is not properly attached, it is possible to confirm through the payout base opening 551n that the terminal terminal hangs down.

  FIG. 234 (B) is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 233 (B). In this example, an example is shown in which, instead of the external terminal plate 558, a mounting surface cover 595 constituting the external terminal plate unit 594 is disposed at a position visible through the payout base opening 551n. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the attachment state of the external terminal plate unit 594. Note that the configuration may be such that the solder surface cover 596 is visible, instead of the mounting surface cover 595. In addition, not only in FIG. 234 (B) but also in FIGS. 233 (C) to 234 (A), FIGS. 234 (C), and 234 (D), the external terminal plate unit 594 is similarly used instead of the external terminal plate 558. The payout base opening 551n may be formed so as to be checked.

  When the payout base 551 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the mounting surface cover 595 and the solder surface cover 596 constituting the external terminal plate unit 594 may be formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, since the external shape of the external terminal plate unit 594 can be visually recognized, it is easy to confirm the attachment state of the external terminal plate unit 594.

  Alternatively, when the dispensing base 551 is formed of a colored transparent or translucent synthetic resin, the mounting surface cover 595 and the solder surface cover 596 constituting the external terminal plate unit 594 are formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Is also good. With such a configuration, the payout base opening 551n and the mounting surface cover 595 and the solder surface cover 596 visually recognized through the payout base opening 551n can be easily visually distinguished, and the external terminal plate unit is provided. It becomes easy to confirm the attachment state of the 594.

  FIG. 234 (C) is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 233 (C). In this example, at a position corresponding to an extension of a side forming a printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558, a straight-out payout base mark 551o indicating an appropriate mounting position of the external terminal board 558 is provided on the payout base 551. I have. The payout base mark 551o may be formed by applying a paint to the payout base 551. It should be noted that a linear payout base mark 551o is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined structure on the external terminal plate 558 side, not limited to an extension of a side forming a printed board constituting the external terminal plate 558. May be. For example, a linear payout base mark 551o may be provided on an extension of a side forming the mounting surface cover 595 or the solder surface cover 596, or a linear discharge base mark portion 551o located on the solder surface side of the external terminal plate 558. May be configured such that a linear payout base mark 551o is located on an extension of the metal terminal 558c. Although the example applied to FIG. 233 (C) is shown, such an embodiment may be applied to another drawing.

  FIG. 234 (D) is a further modification. In this example, four payout base openings 551n are provided corresponding to the four vertices of the printed board constituting the external terminal board 558. The payout base openings 551n provided at the upper right and lower left have the same function as the example shown in FIG. 233 (C). On the other hand, regarding the payout base openings 551n provided at the upper left and lower right, when the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 are appropriately mounted, the payout base mark 551o described above depends on the opening shape. It has the same function as. On the other hand, when the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 are not properly attached, the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 are visually recognized from the payout base openings 551n provided at the upper left and lower right. As a result, it can be confirmed that the attachment state of the external terminal plate unit 594 is not appropriate. As described above, instead of providing the payout base mark portion 551o alone, another member provided in the body frame 4 in the vicinity of the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k functions as the payout base mark portion 551o. For example, the main frame 4 may be configured such that holes or slits provided in a row provided for the purpose of heat dissipation or ribs provided for reinforcement function as such a payout base mark 551o. Good.

  In addition, an opaque member (for example, the main body frame base unit 500) constituting the main body frame 4 is located in front of the colorless transparent or colored transparent dispensing base 551, and is located in front of the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594. In some cases, the external terminal plate 558 and / or at least a part of the external terminal plate unit 594 may be invisible. Therefore, in the case where such a configuration is employed, in the case where the embodiment shown in FIGS. 233 (A) to 234 (D) is employed, the payout base opening 551n is provided at a position which is not hidden by the opaque member. It is good to constitute. With such a configuration, whether or not an improper electric circuit or an improper substrate is mounted on the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is determined by checking whether the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is mounted. You can check whether it is appropriate.

  Note that, in the case where the payout base 551 is made of an opaque, translucent, or colored and transparent synthetic resin, an example is described in which the payout base opening 551n is provided. The dispensing base opening 551n may be provided. With such a configuration, a tool (driver or the like) having a finger or a shaft having a thickness of about 2 to 5 mm is inserted into the payout base opening 551n, and the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is inserted. By applying a force to the rear, it is possible to confirm whether or not the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 are properly attached.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 227 (A) to 232, when the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is properly attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k, the finger or tool is used. Even if a force is applied to the rear, the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 move only by a design play (less than 1 mm). On the other hand, when the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 are not properly attached to the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k, the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate The terminal board 558 and the external terminal board unit 594 largely move rearward, and the clerk at the game hall can notice that the external terminal board 558 and the external terminal board unit 594 are not properly attached.

  It is desirable that the payout base opening 551n has a shape that does not allow game balls to pass through. For example, as shown in FIGS. 233 (A), 233 (B), 233 (E), 233 (F), 234 (A), and 234 (B), the payout base opening 551n is rectangular. In the example, the length of the short side of the rectangle may be less than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball. Further, as shown in FIGS. 233 (C), 233 (D), 234 (C), and 234 (D), in a case where the payout base opening 551n is a square, the length of one side of the square is The length should be less than the diameter of the game ball. As a length less than the diameter of the game ball, for example, a length of about 5-9 mm may be adopted. By using the dispensing base opening 551n having the short side or the side having such a length, the transport path in the island facility may be dropped when the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is not properly mounted. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball that has entered enters the inside of the payout base opening 551n, and to attach the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 by inserting a tool from the payout base opening 551n as described above. It is possible to simultaneously realize the two functions of checking the state.

  233 (A) to 234 (A), 234 (C), and 234 (D), a part of the external terminal plate 558 can be visually recognized from the payout base opening 551n, depending on the visibility state. 234 (A) to 234 (A), and 234 (C), as shown in FIG. 234 (B), in which the attachment state of the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 can be confirmed. In the example shown in FIG. 234 (D), instead of the external terminal plate 558, a part of the external terminal plate unit 594 is similarly made visible, and the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit You may comprise so that the attachment state of 594 can be confirmed.

  In the case where the payout base 551 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, the payout base 551 is provided with the payout base opening 551n that allows the external terminal plate 558 to be visually recognized. Even in the case of being formed of resin, the payout base opening 551n may be provided.

  An example is shown in which the external terminal board 558 becomes visible from the front side when the gaming board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 with the main body frame 4 closed, but only when the door frame 3 is open at this time. It may be configured to be visible from the front side, or may be configured to be visible from the front side even when the door frame 3 is closed without the game board 5 attached after the game board 5 is removed.

  When the external terminal board 558 or the external terminal board unit 594 is removed from the payout base 551, the payout control board side connector connected to the external terminal board side connector 558b of the external terminal board 558 is connected to the payout control board 633. Only the extending wiring or the wiring extending from the dispensing control board side connector connected to the external terminal board side connector 558b of the external terminal board 558 to the dispensing control board 633 and the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are connected. The external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is held by the signal line with respect to the gaming machine. When the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is left in such a mode, the external terminal plate unit 594 may be sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main frame 4 is opened and closed. is there. Therefore, the external terminal plate unit 594 may be attached to the payout base 551 via a hinge to be openable and closable.

  The payout control board side connector for connecting the wiring from the payout control board 633 may be configured to be detachable from the external terminal board side connector 558b provided in the external terminal board 558. In this case, the external terminal board 558 or the external terminal board unit 594 can be completely removed from the gaming machine. Thereby, after connecting the signal line from the island facility to the output terminals PT1 to PT10 provided in the external terminal board 558, the payout control board is connected to the external terminal board 558 or the external terminal board side connector 558b provided in the external terminal board unit 594. It is possible to attach the dispensing control board side connector for connecting the wiring from 633, and then attach the external terminal board 558 or the external terminal board unit 594 to the external terminal board attaching section 551k. The connection of the signal line from the island facility to the PT 10 can be performed without disturbing other members.

  The mounting surface cover 595 may be configured to be detachable from the external terminal plate 558. Further, the solder surface cover 596 may be configured to be detachable from the mounting surface cover 595. With such a configuration, when the external terminal board 558, the mounting surface cover 595, and the solder surface cover 596 are damaged, only the damaged member can be replaced.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 226 and FIGS. 230 to 232, since the mounting surface cover 595 is located above the external terminal plate 558, the external terminal plate 558 is protected from dust from above in the island facility. Even if a game ball or the like falls, the components mounted on the external terminal board 558 can be protected. In the case where the external terminal plate 558 is directly attached to the payout base 551, the payout base 551 is provided with an eave portion projecting rearward, and the external terminal plate is located at a position where the entire external terminal plate is hidden by the eaves portion in plan view. You may comprise so that a board may be attached. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 231, the external terminal plate 558 may be directly attached to the payout base 551 without providing the mounting surface cover 595.

  Although the example in which the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 are provided on the right side of the ball tank 552 in rear view has been described, the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate unit 594 are provided so as to be located below the ball tank 552. You may. In this case, it is preferable to adopt an attachment mode as shown in FIG. With such a configuration, the external terminal plate 558 is located below, and the clerk of the game hall can more easily see the solder side of the external terminal plate 558.

  The external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is attached to the payout base 551 so as to protrude from the end of the payout base 551 in a front view, and a part of the external terminal plate 558 is transparent without passing through the payout base 551. You may comprise so that it may become visible through the back cover 640 formed with a synthetic resin.

  Although the example in which the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 is mounted on the rear surface of the payout base 551 has been described, the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 may be mounted on the front surface of the payout base 551. In this case, the external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 may be attached to the dispensing base 551 so that the electronic component mounting surface of the external terminal plate 558 faces forward, or the solder surface of the external terminal plate 558 may be positioned forward. The external terminal plate 558 or the external terminal plate unit 594 may be attached to the dispensing base 551 so as to face. In the former case, an opening may be provided in the payout base 551 so that a signal line from the island facility can be connected to the external terminal board 558 through the opening.

  The example in which one external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551 has been described. However, two or more external terminal plates 558 and one or more external terminal plates 558 and one or more ground circuit boards 559 are provided on the payout base 551. It may be configured as follows. As described above, it is necessary to check the state even when a plurality of circuit boards are attached to the payout base 551.

  In this case, it is not preferable that one of the circuit boards overlaps with the other circuit board to make it difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, a plurality of circuit boards are mounted on the payout base 551 so as to be arranged vertically or horizontally. It is good to constitute so that it may not overlap when seen from the front side. Further, the circuit board may be arranged on the upper surface and the rear surface of the payout base 551, respectively. These embodiments may be combined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a region in which an incorrect electric circuit or an incorrect substrate may be provided.

  The lower left portion of the horizontally long rectangular external terminal plate 558 may be cut into a predetermined shape so as not to interfere with the tank rail 553. For example, the lower left portion of the external terminal plate 558 may be cut obliquely, as viewed from the back side, or the lower left portion of the external terminal plate 558 may be cut so as to match the shape of the tank rail 553. In this case, the mounting surface cover 595 and the solder surface cover 596 may be formed in a shape that matches the external shape of the external terminal plate 558.

  An external terminal board side connector 558b for connecting the payout control board side connector is provided on the left side of the external terminal board 558 in a front view (closed end side of the main body frame 4), and wiring for connecting the payout control board 633 and the payout control board side connector. May be arranged along the closed end side of the main body frame 4. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which wiring is caught by a replenishing machine that replenishes the ball to the ball tank 552.

  Further, the external terminal plate side connector 558b, the payout control board side connector, and the wiring connecting the payout control board 633 and the payout control board side connector may be configured to be visible through the colorless and transparent payout base 551. With this configuration, it is confirmed whether or not an improper electric circuit or an improper board is attached from the external terminal board side connector 558b to the wiring connecting the payout control board 633 and the payout control board side connector. It becomes possible. In this case, the external terminal board side connector 558b is provided on the left side of the external terminal board 558 in the front view (closed end side of the main body frame 4), and wiring for connecting the payout control board 633 and the payout control board side connector is provided. It is good to make it along the closed end side of the main body frame 4. Also, at least a part of the ball guiding unit 570 and the upper full sphere path unit 600 are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and wiring for connecting the payout control board 633 and the payout control board side connector via these members. May be configured to be visible. Further, by attaching the wiring connecting the payout control board 633 and the payout control board side connector to the left side plate portion 551b constituting the side surface of the payout base 551, the ball guiding unit 570 and the upper full tank path unit 600 can be connected. Alternatively, it may be configured to be visible through the payout base 551.

  With reference to FIGS. 233 (A) to 234 (D), a plurality of embodiments in which the payout base 551 is provided with the payout base opening 551n have been described, and FIGS. 235 (A) to 236 (D) will be described below. For reference, a further embodiment in which a payout base 551 is provided with a payout base opening 551n is shown. Note that these drawings also show a state in which the printed circuit board constituting the external terminal board 558 attached to the rear of the payout base 551 is viewed from the front. In this state, the external terminal board side connector 558b is located on the left side. 235 (A) to 236 (D), which will be described later, with respect to each of the modified examples in the plurality of embodiments in which the payout base openings 551n shown with reference to FIGS. 233 (A) to 234 (D) are provided. The embodiments described in (1) and (2) are applicable.

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 235 (A) and 235 (B), in the payout base 551 to which the external terminal plate 558 is attached, a payout base opening 551n corresponding to each vertex of the horizontally long rectangular external terminal plate 558. Are provided. FIG. 235 (A) shows a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551, and FIG. 235 (B) shows a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not properly attached to the payout base 551. 4 shows an example of a state. As described above, the visual state through the payout base opening 551n differs between the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is properly mounted and the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not properly mounted. Can be checked from the front side.

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 235 (C) and 235 (D), in the payout base 551 to which the external terminal plate 558 is attached, the payout base openings 551n corresponding to the respective vertices of the horizontal rectangular external terminal plate 558. Are provided. FIG. 235 (C) shows a state where the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551, and FIG. 235 (D) shows a state where the external terminal plate 558 is not properly attached to the payout base 551. 4 shows an example of a state. As described above, the visual state through the payout base opening 551n differs between the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is properly mounted and the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not properly mounted. Can be checked from the front side.

  The embodiment shown in FIGS. 235 (E) and 235 (F) is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 235 (C) and 235 (D), and the external terminal plate 558 is attached. In the payout base 551 to be provided, two payout base openings 551n are provided corresponding to the upper left and lower right vertices of the horizontally long rectangular external terminal plate 558. FIG. 235 (E) shows a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551, and FIG. 235 (F) shows a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not properly attached to the payout base 551. 4 shows an example of a state. As described above, the visual state through the payout base opening 551n differs between the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is properly mounted and the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not properly mounted. Can be checked from the front side.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 236 (A), two external terminal plates 558 are attached to the payout base 551, and one payout base opening 551n is provided in the payout base 551. The attachment state of the two external terminal boards 558 can be confirmed through the 551n. The two external terminal boards 558 are attached to the payout base 551 in such a manner that the sides are in contact with each other, and the two side faces of the two external terminal boards 558 are located at the center in the left-right direction of the payout base opening 551n. Have been. With such a configuration, when the space behind the two external terminal plates 558 is visible, the mounting mode of at least one of the two external terminal plates 558 is not appropriate. Can be recognized.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 236 (B), two external terminal plates 558 are attached to the payout base 551, and one payout base opening 551n is provided in the payout base 551. The attachment state of the two external terminal boards 558 can be confirmed through the 551n. The two external terminal plates 558 are attached to the payout base 551 with their sides being separated by a predetermined distance, and the payout base opening 551n can be visually recognized as if it were equally divided into three parts in the left-right direction. With such a configuration, for example, in a case where the visual recognition mode through the payout base opening 551n is viewed in a mode other than the three-divided mode, the external terminal plate 558 is attached. It can be recognized that the embodiment is not appropriate.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 236 (C), two external terminal plates 558 attached to the mounting surface cover 595 are attached to the payout base 551, and one payout base opening is provided in the payout base 551. 551n are provided, and the mounting state of the two mounting surface covers 595 can be checked through the payout base opening 551n. The two mounting surface covers 595 are attached to the payout base 551 in a state where the sides contact each other, and the two side surfaces of the two mounting surface covers 595 are located at the center in the left-right direction of the payout base opening 551n. Have been. With such a configuration, when the rear space is visible from between the two mounting surface covers 595, at least one of the two mounting surface covers 595 is not properly mounted. Can be recognized.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 236 (D), two external terminal plates 558 attached to the mounting surface cover 595 are attached to the payout base 551, and one payout base opening is provided in the payout base 551. 551n are provided, and the mounting state of the two mounting surface covers 595 can be checked through the payout base opening 551n. The two mounting surface covers 595 are attached to the payout base 551 with their sides separated from each other by a predetermined distance, and are visible as if the payout base opening 551n is equally divided in the left-right direction. By adopting such a configuration, for example, in a case where the visual recognition mode via the payout base opening 551n is in a state in which the visual recognition mode is visually recognized in a mode other than the three-divided mode, the mounting surface cover 595 is attached. It can be recognized that the embodiment is not appropriate.

  Hereinafter, another embodiment of the payout base 551 and the payout base opening 551n provided in the payout base 551 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  237 and 238 each show a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551. 237 (A) is a front perspective view, FIG. 237 (B) is a plan view, FIG. 237 (C) is a left side view, FIG. 237 (D) is a front view, FIG. 237 (E) is a right side view, 237 (F) is a bottom view. FIG. 238 (A) is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 238 (B) is a rear view.

  239 and 240 each show a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551. 239 (A) is a front side perspective view, FIG. 239 (B) is a plan view, FIG. 239 (C) is a left side view, FIG. 239 (D) is a front view, FIG. 239 (E) is a right side view, 239 (F) is a bottom view. FIG. 240A is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 240B is a rear view.

  FIGS. 241 and 242 show an example of a state where the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551, but the attachment manner is not appropriate. FIG. 241 (A) is a front perspective view, and FIG. 241 (B) is a front view. FIG. 242 (A) is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 242 (B) is a rear view.

  In FIGS. 241 to 250, illustration of members provided on the external terminal plate 558 is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a payout base first opening 660, a payout base second opening 662, and a payout base third opening 664 are provided as openings in a payout base 551 formed of a black opaque synthetic resin. I have. The first payout base opening 660 and the second payout base opening 662 are provided so as to be vertically arranged when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. The third payout base opening 664 is provided at a central position in the vertical direction in the left direction as viewed from the first payout base opening 660 and the second payout base opening 662 when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. I have.

  A first outer end plate holding portion 670 for contacting and holding an external terminal plate 558 covered with a green circuit protection film is provided behind the first base 660 of the dispensing base. The first outer end plate holding part 670 is provided with a first upper holding part 670a vertically provided rearward from the upper side of the payout base first opening 660 and a rearward from the right side of the payout base first opening 660. Vertically, a first side holding portion 670b provided at the same height as the first upper holding portion 670a, and a payout base first opening 660 from a rear surface of the first upper holding portion 670a and the first side holding portion 670b. And a square-shaped first rear holding portion 670c provided so as to cover a part thereof. Further, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin integrally with the payout base 551. In a state where the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the inner surface of the first backside holding portion 670c and the rear portion not covered by the first backside holding portion 670c via the first base of the payout base 660. The space is visible.

  A second outer end plate holding portion 672 for contacting and holding the external terminal plate 558 is provided behind the second base 662 of the payout base. The second outer end plate holding portion 672 is provided vertically from the lower side of the payout base second opening 662 toward the rear, and the second lower end holding portion 672a is provided from the right side of the payout base second opening 662 toward the rear. The second side holding portion 672b provided vertically at the same height as the second lower holding portion 672a, and the second base 672a and the second base 672b of the payout base second opening 662 from the rear surface of the second side holding portion 672b. And a second back holding portion 672c having a square shape provided so as to cover a part thereof. The first back holding part 670c and the second back holding part 672c have the same thickness and are separated from the payout base 551 by the same distance. Further, the second outer end plate holding portion 672 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin integrally with the payout base 551. In a state where the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the inner surface of the second back holding portion 672c and the rear portion not covered by the second back holding portion 672c via the payout base second opening 662. The space is visible.

  A third outer end plate holding portion 674 for contacting and holding the external terminal plate 558 is provided behind the third base 664 of the payout base. The third outer end plate holding portion 674 protrudes leftward toward the center of the third payout base opening 664 from the rear right side of the third payout base opening 664 on the back side of the payout base 551. It is composed of a plate-shaped holding portion 674a and a third claw-shaped holding portion 674b projecting rearward from the tip of the third plate-shaped holding portion 674a. Further, the third outer end plate holding portion 674 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin integrally with the payout base 551. When the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the front surface of the third plate-like holding portion 674a and the third plate-like holding portion 674a are not covered via the payout base third opening 664. The space behind is visible.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a payout base first boss 680, a payout base second boss 682, a payout base third boss 684, and a payout base fourth boss 686. When viewed from the front side, the payout base first boss 680 is on the left side of the payout base first opening 660, the payout base second boss 682 is on the left side of the payout base second opening 662, and the payout base third The boss 684 is located below the payout base third opening 664, and the fourth payout base boss 686 is located below the payout base third opening 664. The first boss 680-the fourth boss 686 of the payout base are formed integrally with the payout base 551 from a black opaque synthetic resin.

  The first payout base boss 680 to the fourth payout base boss 686 each have a cylindrical shape projecting rearward from the payout base 551, and have a cylindrical opening at the center. The back surface of the first payout base boss 680 to the fourth payout base boss 686 is formed at the same height as the third plate-like holding portion 674a of the third outer end plate holding portion 674. The first payout base boss 680 to the fourth payout base boss 686 function as a spacer for providing a distance between the front side (solder surface side) of the external terminal plate 558 and the back side of the payout base 551. Further, the fourth payout base boss 686 also functions as a screw hole for attaching the external terminal plate 558 to the payout base 551, but details thereof will be described later.

  239 and 240 show a state in which a rectangular external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551. In this state, the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551 by the first outer end plate holding portion 670, the second outer end plate holding portion 672, the third outer end plate holding portion 674, and the outer end plate fixing screw 558e. Fixed.

  Specifically, the inner surface of the first upper holding portion 670a of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 is in contact with the upper side of the external terminal plate 558, and the first side holding portion of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 is contacted. The inner surface of 670b is in contact with the right side of the external terminal plate 558, and the inner surface of the first back holding portion 670c of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 is in contact with the back surface of the external terminal plate 558.

  The inner surface of the second lower holding portion 672a of the second outer end plate holding portion 672 is in contact with the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and the inner surface of the second side holding portion 672b of the second outer end plate holding portion 672. And the right side of the external terminal plate 558 is in contact, and the inner surface of the second rear holding portion 672c of the second outer end plate holding portion 672 is in contact with the rear surface of the external terminal plate 558.

  In addition, the back surface of the third plate-shaped holding portion 674a of the third outer end plate holding portion 674 is in contact with the front surface of the external terminal plate 558, and the right surface of the third claw-shaped holding portion 674b of the third outer end plate holding portion 674 , The left side of the external terminal plate 558 is in contact with the external terminal plate 558.

  The back surface of the first boss 680 to the fourth boss 686 of the payout base and the front surface of the external terminal plate 558 are in contact with each other. Further, a metal outer end plate fixing screw 558e is detachably attached to a screw hole (not shown) provided in the external terminal plate 558 and a fourth payout base boss 686 provided in the payout base 551 from behind. ing.

  When attaching the external terminal plate 558 to the payout base 551 in the present embodiment, between the payout base first boss 680 and the inner surface of the first rear holding portion 670c of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 and the payout base After the right side of the external terminal plate 558 is obliquely inserted between the second boss 682 and the inner surface of the second backside holding portion 672c of the second outer end plate holding portion 672, the left side of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to the third outer end. It is pressed forward toward the plate holder 674. At this time, when a force is applied to the third claw-shaped holding portion 674b from the front surface of the external terminal plate 558 toward the front, the third plate-shaped holding portion 674a bends forward. When the front surface of the external terminal plate 558 comes into contact with the back surface of the first boss 680 to the fourth boss 686 of the payout base, the payout base 551 and the external terminal plate 558 are in a parallel state, and the third plate-like holding is performed. The portion 674a returns from the state of being curved forward to the original position. In this state, the movement of the external terminal plate 558 in the left-right direction is restricted by the inner surfaces of the first side holding portion 670b and the second side holding portion 672b and the third claw-shaped holding portion 674b. In addition, the movement of the external terminal plate 558 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the first back holding part 670c and the second back holding part 672c and the first payout base boss 680 to the fourth payout base boss 686. In this state, the external terminal plate 558 is fixed to the screw holes (not shown) provided in the external terminal plate 558 and the fourth base boss 686 from outside by fixing the external end plate fixing screw 558e. .

  As shown in FIG. 239, when the payout base first opening 660 to the payout base third opening 664 are viewed from the front side when the external terminal plate 558 is attached at an appropriate position, the payout base In almost all areas of the one opening 660 and the payout base second opening 662, the green external terminal board 558 is exposed. Further, the green external terminal plate 558 is exposed in the upper right and lower right regions of the third base 664 of the payout base. Further, the first external boss 680 to the third boss 684 of the payout base allows the green external terminal plate 558 to be visually recognized. Further, with respect to the fourth payout base boss 686, the metal outer end plate fixing screw 558e is in a visible state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 237, when the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the inner surface of the first back holding part 670 c is visible from the payout base first opening 660. At the same time, the rear of the gaming machine becomes visible in a region that is not covered by the inner surface of the first back holding portion 670c. In addition, from the payout base second opening 662, the inner surface of the second back holding portion 672c becomes visible, and in a region not covered by the inner surface of the second back holding portion 672c, Becomes visible. Further, the rear of the gaming machine can be visually recognized without the green external terminal plate 558 being exposed in the upper right and lower right regions of the third payout base opening 664. In addition, the payout base first boss 680 to the payout base fourth boss 686 allow the rear of the gaming machine to be visually recognized.

  As described above, when the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the external terminals are connected to the openings (the payout base first opening 660 and the payout base second opening 662) provided in the payout base 551. In the state where the plate 558 is attached, the members (the first back holding part 670c and the second back holding part 672c) that are not visible or hard to see become visible. In addition, in a state where the external terminal plate 558 is attached from the opening provided in the payout base 551 (the payout base third opening 664, the payout base first boss 680 to the payout base fourth boss 686), it is invisible or invisible. The rear of the gaming machine, which was difficult to visually recognize, can be visually recognized. In this manner, the visual recognition mode behind the opening provided in the payout base 551 determines whether or not the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551 in a state where the clerk of the game hall removes the game board 5. It is possible to check from the front side.

  In the present embodiment, the payout base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674 formed integrally with the payout base 551, the first payout base boss 680 to the payout base fourth boss 686. Is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin, and the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a green circuit protection film, so that the payout base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674, the payout base The color of the first boss 680 to the fourth payout base boss 686 is different from the color of the external terminal board 558. Thus, the payout base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674, the first payout base boss 680 to the fourth payout base boss 686, and the external terminal plate 558 are visually distinguished. It is easy. The dispensing base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674, the dispensing base first boss 680 to the dispensing base fourth boss 686, and the color of the external terminal plate 558 are different. To do so, the dispensing base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674, the first dispensing base boss 680 to the fourth dispensing base boss 686 are formed of black opaque synthetic resin. The terminal plate 558 may be covered with a red or white circuit protective film. Alternatively, the dispensing base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674, the first dispensing base boss 680 to the fourth dispensing base boss 686 are formed of a red opaque or blue opaque synthetic resin, The external terminal plate 558 may be covered with a green circuit protective film. In this manner, the payout base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674, the payout base first boss 680 to the payout base fourth boss 686, and the external terminal plate 558 are visually recognized in different colors. By making it possible, it becomes possible to easily recognize the attachment mode of the external terminal plate 558. Note that a similar configuration may be adopted in other embodiments in this specification.

  Note that an example has been described in which the payout base 551, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 to the third outer end plate holding portion 674, and the first payout base boss 680 to the payout base fourth boss 686 are formed of an opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, the payout base 551 may be formed of a colored transparent or translucent synthetic resin. In this case, since the external shape of the external terminal plate 558 can be recognized in a region other than the payout base first opening 660 to the payout base third opening 664, it is possible to roughly grasp the mounting mode of the external terminal plate 558. Becomes possible. Note that a similar configuration may be adopted in other embodiments in this specification.

  FIGS. 237 to 240 show a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is properly attached to the payout base 551 and a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551. Referring to 242, an example is shown in which the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551, but the attached state is not appropriate.

  241 and 242 are diagrams illustrating an example of a state where the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551, but the attached state is not appropriate. As shown in the drawing, in this example, although the external terminal plate 558 is fixed to the payout base 551 by the outer end plate fixing screw 558e, the external terminal plate 558 is not fixed to the first outer end plate holding portion 670. The first rear holding portion 670c, the second rear holding portion 672c of the second outer end plate holding portion 672, and the third claw-shaped holding portion 674b of the third outer end plate holding portion 674 are located behind the external terminal. The plate 558 stops at a position rotated clockwise by about 10 degrees when viewed from the front with the outer end plate fixing screw 558e as a rotation axis due to its own weight.

  In such a state, the visual recognition state of the first payout base opening 660 to the third payout base opening 664 corresponds to the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551 as shown in FIG. Is different, so that the clerk of the game hall can confirm whether the attachment mode of the external terminal plate 558 is appropriate.

  Hereinafter, another embodiment of the payout base 551 and the payout base opening 551n provided in the payout base 551 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  243 and 244 each show a state where the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551. FIG. 243 (A) is a front perspective view, FIG. 243 (B) is a plan view, FIG. 243 (C) is a left side view, FIG. 243 (D) is a front view, and FIG. 243 (E) is a right side view. 243 (F) is a bottom view. FIG. 244 (A) is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 244 (B) is a rear view.

  FIGS. 245 and 246 each show a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551. 245 (A) is a front perspective view, FIG. 245 (B) is a plan view, FIG. 245 (C) is a left side view, FIG. 245 (D) is a front view, FIG. 245 (E) is a right side view, FIG. 245 (F) is a bottom view. FIG. 246 (A) is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 246 (B) is a rear view.

  247 and 248 each show an example of a state where the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551, but the attachment manner is not appropriate. FIG. 247 (A) is a front perspective view, and FIG. 247 (B) is a front view. FIG. 248 (A) is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 248 (B) is a rear view.

  In the present embodiment, a payout base first opening 660 is provided as an opening in the payout base 551 formed of a black opaque synthetic resin.

  A first outer end plate holding portion 670 for contacting and holding an external terminal plate 558 covered with a green circuit protection film is provided behind the first base 660 of the dispensing base. The first outer end plate holding portion 670 is a plate-shaped first lower holding portion 670d provided vertically from the center of the lower side of the payout base first opening 660 toward the rear, and an upper portion from the rear of the first lower holding portion 670d. And a plate-shaped first backside holding portion 670c provided vertically toward. Further, the first outer end plate holding portion 670 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin integrally with the payout base 551. In a state where the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the inner surface of the first backside holding portion 670c and the rear portion not covered by the first backside holding portion 670c via the first base of the payout base 660. The space is visible.

  A second outer end plate holding portion 672 is provided at the upper right of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 when viewed from the front side. The second outer end plate holding section 672 has a second front holding section 672d and a second side holding section 672b. Further, the second outer end plate holding portion 672 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin integrally with the payout base 551.

  A third outer end plate holding portion 674 is provided at the upper left of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 when viewed from the front side. The third outer end plate holding portion 674 has a third front holding portion 674d and a third side holding portion 674c. Further, the third outer end plate holding portion 674 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin integrally with the payout base 551.

  Above the payout base first opening 660, a payout base first boss 680 is provided. Further, the payout base first boss 680 is formed integrally with the payout base 551 from a black opaque synthetic resin. The first payout base boss 680 has a cylindrical shape protruding rearward from the payout base 551, and has a cylindrical opening at the center. The back surface of the second front holding portion 672d, the back surface of the third front holding portion 674d, and the back surface of the payout base first boss 680 are formed at the same height from the payout base 551.

  245 and 246 show a state in which a rectangular external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551. In this state, the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551 by the first outer end plate holding portion 670, the second outer end plate holding portion 672, the third outer end plate holding portion 674, and the outer end plate fixing screw 558e. Fixed.

  Specifically, the inner surface of the first lower holding portion 670d of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 and the lower side of the external terminal plate 558 are in contact with each other, and the first rear holding portion 670c of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 is contacted. And the back surface of the external terminal board 558 are in contact with each other.

  Also, the inner surface of the second side holding portion 672b of the second outer end plate holding portion 672 and the right side portion of the external terminal plate 558 are in contact with each other, and the inner surface of the second front holding portion 672d of the second outer end plate holding portion 672. And the front surface of the external terminal board 558 is in contact.

  Further, the inner surface of the third side holding portion 674c of the third outer end plate holding portion 674 is in contact with the left side portion of the external terminal plate 558, and the inner surface of the third front holding portion 674d of the third outer end plate holding portion 674. And the front surface of the external terminal board 558 is in contact.

  The back surface of the first base 680 of the payout base and the front surface of the external terminal plate 558 are in contact with each other. In addition, a metal outer end plate fixing screw 558e is detachably attached to a screw hole (not shown) provided in the external terminal plate 558 and a payout base first boss 680 provided in the payout base 551 from behind. ing.

  When attaching the external terminal plate 558 to the payout base 551 in the present embodiment, the external terminal plate 558 is placed between the payout base first opening 660 and the first rear holding portion 670c of the first outer end plate holding portion 670. After being inserted obliquely, the right side of the external terminal plate 558 contacts the second side holding portion 672b of the second outer end plate holding portion 672, and the left side of the external terminal plate 558 holds the third outer end plate. After adjusting the position of the external terminal plate 558 in the left-right direction so as to be in contact with the third side holding portion 674c of the portion 674, the external terminal plate 558 is made vertical. In this state, the inner surface of the first backside holding portion 670c of the first outer end plate holding portion 670 is in contact with the backside of the external terminal plate 558. Then, in this state, the external terminal plate 558 is attached by turning the outer end plate fixing screw 558e from behind into the screw hole (not shown) provided in the external terminal plate 558 and the fourth payout base boss 686. Complete.

  As shown in FIG. 245, when the payout base first opening 660 is viewed from the front side when the external terminal plate 558 is mounted at an appropriate position, almost all of the payout base first opening 660 is provided. In the region, the green external terminal plate 558 is exposed. In addition, regarding the payout base first boss 680, the metal outer end plate fixing screw 558e is in a visible state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 243, when the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the inner surface of the first back holding part 670 c is visible from the payout base first opening 660. At the same time, the rear of the gaming machine becomes visible in a region that is not covered by the inner surface of the first back holding portion 670c. The payout base first boss 680 also makes the rear of the gaming machine visible.

  As described above, when the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551, the external terminal plate 558 is attached from the opening (the payout base first opening 660) provided in the payout base 551. In (2), the member (first back holding portion 670c) that is not visible or difficult to view becomes visible. In addition, in the state where the external terminal plate 558 is attached from the opening (the first boss 680 of the payout base) provided in the payout base 551, the rear of the gaming machine, which cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize, can be visually recognized. In this manner, the visual recognition mode behind the opening provided in the payout base 551 determines whether or not the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551 in a state where the clerk of the game hall removes the game board 5. It is possible to check from the front side.

  FIGS. 243 to 246 show a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551 and a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is not attached to the payout base 551. Referring to 248, an example is shown in which the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551, but the attached state is not appropriate.

  247 and 248 show an example of a state in which the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the payout base 551, but the attached state is not appropriate. As shown in the figure, in this example, although the external terminal plate 558 is fixed to the payout base 551 by the outer end plate fixing screw 558e, the external terminal plate 558 is fixed to the first outer end plate holding portion 670. It is located behind the first back holding part 670c.

  In such a state, the visual recognition state of the payout base first opening 660 can be visually recognized in a state where the first external end plate holding part 670 is located at the first back holding part 670c in front of the green external terminal board 558. This visual recognition mode is different from the state in which the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall can check whether the attachment mode of the external terminal plate portion 558 is appropriate.

  FIGS. 249 and 250 show an embodiment which can be applied to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 249 (A) is a front perspective view, FIG. 249 (B) is a plan view, FIG. 249 (C) is a left side view, FIG. 249 (D) is a front view, FIG. 249 (E) is a right side view, 249 (F) is a bottom view. FIG. 250A is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 250B is a rear view.

  In this embodiment, a fourth payout base opening 666 is provided in a part of the payout base 551, and a rear protruding portion 676 protruding rearward from the right side of the fourth payout base opening 666 is provided. The rear projecting portion 676 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin integrally with the payout base 551. The rear protruding portion 676 includes a left protruding portion 676a whose rear end is bent rightward at a right angle.

  The left protruding portion 676a has the same thickness in the front-rear direction as the external terminal plate 558, and when the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551, the front surface of the left protruding portion 676a is formed. And the front surface of the external terminal plate 558, the rear surface of the left protruding portion 676a, and the rear surface of the external terminal plate 558 are provided on the same surface.

  When the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551, the right side surface of the external terminal plate 558 and the left side surface of the left protruding portion 676a are separated by a predetermined distance. In a state where the external terminal plate 558 is appropriately attached to the payout base 551, the left side and the right side of the fourth payout base opening 666 and the right side of the external terminal plate 558 are parallel in a front view.

  When such a dispensing base fourth opening 666 is viewed from the front side, the left side forming the dispensing base fourth opening 666, a part of the right side of the green external terminal plate 558, the rear space, the black The left protruding portion 676a and the right side forming the payout base fourth opening 666 are visually recognized. Further, the fourth payout base opening 666 is formed in a square shape, and a part of the right side of the green external terminal board 558 and the left side of the black left protrusion 676a form the fourth base of payout base when viewed from the front side. The part 666 can be visually recognized as if it were equally divided into three parts in the vertical direction.

  By adopting such a configuration, for example, when the external terminal plate 558 is mounted in an inappropriate manner as shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, it is possible to recognize that the mounting mode of the external terminal board 558 is inappropriate. Becomes In addition, since the external terminal plate 558, the space between the external terminal plate 558 and the left protruding portion 676a, and the visual recognition mode (color) of the special visual recognition portion are different from each other, these are clearly distinguished and visually recognized. Can be.

  The fourth payout base opening 666, the rear protruding portion 676, and the left protruding portion 676a may be provided in the payout base opening 551n described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 236, and FIGS. 248 may be provided at a predetermined position of the payout base 551 in the embodiment shown in FIG.

  For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 242, the middle position between the first payout base boss 680 and the fourth payout base boss 686, and the position of the second payout base boss 682 and the third payout base boss 684. By providing the payout base fourth opening 666, the rear protrusion 676, and the left protrusion 676a at an intermediate position, the position of the external terminal plate 558 may be configured to be visible.

  In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 242, the front surface of the first back holding portion 670c, the front surface of the second back holding portion 672c, the front surface of the third plate-shaped holding portion 674a, and FIGS. The front surface of the first rear holding portion 670c in the embodiment described above, and the front surface of the left protruding portion 676a in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 249 and 250 are respectively represented by the external terminal plate 558 and the like. It functions as a special visual recognition unit that allows the user to grasp the mounting state of the external connection board connected to the outside by wiring. Specifically, the visual recognition status of the special connection portion and the external connection board that can be visually recognized through the opening such as the payout base first opening 660 to the payout base fourth opening 666 depends on the mounting state of the external connection board. Because of the change, the clerk of the game hall can grasp the mounting mode of the external connection board.

  In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 242, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 248, and the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 249 and 250, the payout base first opening. 660 to the fourth payout base opening 666, the first payout base boss 680 to the fourth payout base boss 686, and the like, a predetermined portion on the front surface of the external terminal plate 558 can be visually recognized. Although it has been shown that the mounting mode of the plate 558 can be grasped, the mounting surface cover 595 to which the external terminal plate 558 described with reference to FIG. May be configured to be visible from the opening in the same manner as the external terminal plate 558 in each of the embodiments described above.

  As for the shape of the end of the mounting surface cover 595, a flat plate-shaped protrusion extending horizontally from the end of the mounting surface cover 595 and the dispensing base 551 is provided integrally with the mounting surface cover 595. The overhanging portion may be configured to be visible at each opening similarly to the external terminal plate 558. Further, it is preferable that the mounting surface cover 595 and the plate-shaped overhanging portion can be attached similarly to the external terminal plate 558. Such a plate-like overhang may be configured to extend outward from the entire periphery of the end of the mounting surface cover 595, or only the portion corresponding to each opening at the end of the mounting surface cover 595. You may comprise so that a plate-shaped overhang | projection part may be provided.

  Although an example is shown in which a plate-shaped overhang is provided on the mounting surface cover 595 described with reference to FIG. 227 (A), the solder surface cover 596 described with reference to FIG. In the external terminal board mounting case 597 described with reference to (C), plate-like overhangs are provided in the same manner, and these overhangs are formed from the openings in the same manner as the external terminal board 558 in each embodiment described above. You may comprise so that it may be visually recognizable.

  In the case of such a configuration, the mounting state of the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, the external terminal board mounting case 597, and the like to the payout base 551 can be confirmed by visual recognition through each opening. it can.

  The dispensing base 551, the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, and the external terminal board mounting case 597 may be formed of synthetic resins of different colors. For example, when the payout base 551 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin, the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, and the external terminal board mounting case 597 may be formed of a synthetic resin other than the black opaque synthetic resin. Specifically, the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, and the external terminal board mounting case 597 may be formed of a colorless transparent, red transparent, black transparent, and red opaque synthetic resin. With such a configuration, there is a visual difference between the dispensing base 551 in which the opening and the special viewing portion are integrally provided, and the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, and the external terminal plate mounting case 597. As a result, the mounting mode of the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, the external terminal board mounting case 597, and the like can be easily confirmed.

  When a plate-shaped overhang is provided on the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, and the external terminal board mounting case 597, in addition to the plate-shaped overhang, the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, The external terminal board 558 attached to the external terminal board mounting case 597 may be configured to be visible from the same opening. With such a configuration, the mounting mode of the external terminal board unit 594 to the payout base 551 and the mounting mode of the external terminal board 558 to the mounting surface cover 595, the solder surface cover 596, and the external terminal board mounting case 597 are simultaneously performed. It is possible to confirm. Note that the solder surface cover 596 described with reference to FIG. 228 (B) may be formed of a colorless and transparent or colored and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the external terminal plate 558 located behind the solder surface cover 596 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  Also, the external terminal plate locking portion 551l of the mounting surface cover 595 described with reference to FIG. 229 and the portion of the external terminal plate 558 locked by the external terminal plate locking portion 551l are made visible. An opening may be provided at a position on the extension of the external terminal plate engaging portion 551l in the external terminal plate attaching portion 551k. By employing such a configuration, it is possible to check the state of attachment of the external terminal plate 558 to the external terminal plate locking portion 551l from the front side through this opening. Further, the distal end portion of the external terminal plate locking portion 551l may be configured to enter the opening or penetrate the opening. In this case, since the distance between the solder surface located on the front side of the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k is closer, the front side of the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k are provided. Can be reduced, and the occurrence of a situation in which an incorrect element is mounted in the gap between the front side of the external terminal plate 558 and the external terminal plate mounting portion 551k can be suppressed. In addition, since the length of the external terminal plate locking portion 551l itself is increased, the external terminal plate locking portion 551l can be easily bent, and the work of attaching and detaching the external terminal plate 558 from the mounting surface cover 595 is easy. Becomes

  In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 250, the member functioning as the special viewing portion is provided integrally with the payout base 551, but the member functioning as the special viewing portion is provided separately from the payout base 551. It may be constituted by a body member. In this case, a member functioning as a special visual recognition unit may be configured to be directly or indirectly detachably attached to the payout base 551 or the main body frame 4. Further, the member attached in this manner may be a member having only a function as a special viewing portion. Alternatively, a predetermined member, which is located behind the external terminal plate 558 and has a predetermined function, may also function as a special visual recognition unit.

  For example, members such as the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are located behind the opening provided in the dispensing base 551, and this opening is provided. These members may be configured to function as a special visual recognition unit with respect to the external terminal plate 558 provided so as to be visible through the unit. The payout base 551 and these members may be formed of synthetic resins of different colors. For example, when the payout base 551 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin, these members may be formed of a non-black opaque synthetic resin. Specifically, these members may be formed of a colorless transparent, red transparent, black transparent, red opaque, translucent synthetic resin. Further, the color of the external terminal plate 558, the color of these members, and the color of the payout base 551 may be different. Further, the openings may be provided so that the ends of these members are positioned in parallel with predetermined sides forming the opening or predetermined sides forming the external terminal plate 558. It is preferable that a predetermined side of the external terminal plate 558 is also arranged in parallel with these. With such a configuration, a visual difference between the dispensing base 551 provided with the opening, these members, and the external terminal plate 558 becomes clear, and as a result, the attachment mode of the external terminal plate 558 can be confirmed. It will be easier.

  In addition, the payout base opening 551n in each embodiment illustrated with reference to FIGS. 235 (A) to 236 (D) may be configured to apply the special visual recognition unit in each mode described above. In each of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 236 (A) and 236 (B), one of the two external terminal plates 558 functions as a special visual recognition unit for the other. ing. The other of the two external terminal plates 558 also functions as a special visual recognition unit for one of them. Similarly, in each of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 236 (C) and 236 (D), one of the two mounting surface covers 595 functions as a special visual recognition unit for the other. Has become. Further, the other of the two mounting surface covers 595 functions as a special visual recognition unit for one of them.

  Referring to FIG. 233 to FIG. 250 and the like, by visually recognizing whether or not external terminal plate 558 or the like is at a predetermined position through an opening provided in payout base 551, external terminal The embodiment has been described in which the attachment state of the plate 558 or the like can be confirmed.

  When it is visually recognized that the external terminal plate 558 or the like is not at a predetermined position, it can be recognized that the external terminal plate 558 or the like is not properly attached to the payout base 551.

  On the other hand, even when it is visually recognized that the external terminal plate 558 and the like are at a predetermined position, it cannot always be said that the external terminal plate 558 and the like are properly attached to the payout base 551. This is because the state of the external terminal plate 558 and the like other than the portion visible through the opening cannot be recognized from the front side.

  Due to such a premise, it cannot be asserted that the external terminal plate 558 and the like are attached to the payout base 551 in an appropriate manner, but the external terminal plate 558 and the like are provided at least with a certain degree of reliability in an appropriate manner. Can be given to the store clerk of the gaming hall.

  Further, since it is possible to check whether or not the external connection board is arranged at least in a predetermined position of the gaming machine without opening the main body frame, when the main body frame is opened and closed, the external connection board and the wiring connected thereto are not connected. It is possible to prevent the external connection board from being damaged by being sandwiched between the frame and the main body frame, disconnection of the wiring, and interference with other members such as the tank rail 553.

  Each technical item in any of the embodiments may be applied to the other embodiments to provide an example.

  In the embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine may be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also, in this case, the same operation and effect as those described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 10 Outer frame left assembly 11 Outer frame left member 11a Depression 11b Swelling part 11c Cavity part 12 Upper left connecting member 12a Horizontal fixing part 12b Upper horizontal fixing Part 12c Lower horizontal fixing part 13 Lower left connecting member 13a Horizontal fixing part 13b Upper horizontal fixing part 13c Lower horizontal fixing part 13d Abutment part 20 Outer frame right assembly 21 Outer frame right member 21a Depression 21b Swelling part 21c Cavity part 22 Upper right Connecting member 22a Horizontal fixing portion 22b Upper horizontal fixing portion 22c Lower horizontal fixing portion 23 Lower right connecting member 23a Horizontal fixing portion 23b Upper horizontal fixing portion 23c Lower horizontal fixing portion 23d Contact portion 24 Upper hooking member 24a Mounting portion 24b Hanging piece Part 25 Lower hook member 25a Attachment part 25b Hook piece 25c Insertion opening 30 Outer frame upper member 30a Notch 30b Mounting step 40 Lower frame assembly 40a curtain plate internal space 41 outer frame lower member 41a cutout portion 41b recess 42 curtain plate front member 42a opening 43 curtain plate rear member 43a connection cylinder 43b rib 44 ball bite prevention mechanism 44a mounting portion 44b first discharge port 44c second Discharge port 44d Standing wall portion 44e Upper end protruding portion 45 Guide member 50 Outer frame upper hinge assembly 51 Outer frame upper hinge member 51a Upper fixing portion 51b Front extension portion 51c Bearing groove 51d Horizontal fixing portion 51e Edge wall portion 52 Lock member 52a Lock body 52b Operation piece 52c Elastic portion 52d Mounting hole 53 Mounting screw 60 Outer frame lower hinge member 60a Horizontal portion 60b Rise 60c Outer frame lower hinge pin 60d Discharge hole

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 100 door frame base unit 101 door frame base 101 a door window 101 b handle mounting seat surface 101 c insertion recess 101 d cylinder insertion hole 101 e ball feeding opening 101 f ball passage hole for lower plate 101 g ball passage opening for upper plate 101 h glass unit mounting portion 101 i slit 101j Through hole 102 Handle mounting part 102a Tube part 102b Flange part 102c Ridge 102d Reinforcement rib 103 Speaker duct 103a Cable holder 104 Door frame main relay board 105 Door frame sub relay board 106 Rear handle relay board 107 Door frame relay board cover 108 Door Relay board cover after frame 109 Cable cover 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame reinforcement unit 111 Left reinforcement frame 112 Right reinforcement frame 113 Upper reinforcement frame 114 Intermediate reinforcement frame 114a Notch 114b Penetration 115 Cylinder mounting frame 116 Hook member 120 Door frame hinge assembly 121 Hinge bracket 121a Mounting piece 121b Projection piece 122 Hinge pin on door frame 123 Flange member 124 Lock spring 125 Door frame lower hinge member 125a Mounting piece 125b Projection piece 126 Hinge pin under door frame

130 Cylinder lock 131 Cylinder main body 132 Keyhole 133 Rotation transmitting member

140 ball feeding unit 141 front cover 141a entrance 141b ball outlet 141c slit 141e ball feeding opening 142 rear cover 142a hitting supply port 142b mounting recess 143 ball punching member 143a partitioning section 143b rotating rod section 143c operating rod section 143d weight Ball feeding member 144a Blocking section 144b Ball holding section 144c Rod section 145 Ball feeding solenoid 146 Ball feeding operating rod 146a Iron plate 147 Ball feeding crank 147a Engaging section 147b Shaft section 147c Transmission section

150 Fail cover unit 150a Penetrating ball passage 150b Filled ball receptacle 150c Foul ball receptacle 150d Ball discharge port 150e Storage passage 150f Door opening / closing contact part

151 Unit body 152 Lid member 153 Movable piece 154 Full tank detection sensor 155 Spring

160 Glass unit 161a Mounting piece 161b Locking piece 161 Glass frame 162 Glass plate 163 Glass unit mounting member 163b Projection 163a Base

170 Security cover 171 Body part 172 Rear projecting piece 173 Locking piece

180 Handle unit 181 Handle base 181a Base 181b Front end 181c Groove 182 Handle 182a First protrusion 182b Second protrusion 182c Third protrusion 182d Fourth protrusion 182e Slit 182f Locking protrusion 183 Cover base 183A Handle boss Handle 184 Handle Cover 186 Inner base 187 Shaft member 187a Drive gear unit 188 Transmission gear 189 Handle rotation detection sensor 189a Detection shaft 190 Handle return spring 191 Auxiliary spring 192 Handle touch sensor 193 Single button 194 Single button operation sensor

200 plate unit 201 upper plate 201a guide passage portion 201b grounding member 202 lower plate 202a lower plate ball hole 210 plate base unit 211 plate unit base 211a upper plate ball supply port 211b speaker port 211c lower plate ball supply port (ball opening)
211d Notch portion 211e Upper sphere feeding port 211f Mounting projection 211g Slider insertion port 211h Handle insertion port 211i Cylinder insertion port 211a Upper sphere feeding port

212 Upper plate main body 212a Production operation unit mounting portion 213 Mounting base 213a Insertion port 213b Through hole 214 Plate unit relay board 220 Ball lending operation unit 221 Base portion 222 Plate lump extraction button 223 Ball lending operation base 224 Ball lending button 224a Ball lending button Button pressing part 224b Ball lending button housing part 224c Ball lending button spring 224d Ball lending button micro switch 224e Ball lending button housing part opening 225 Return button 225a Return button pressing part 225b Return button housing part 225c Return button spring 225d Return button micro Switch 226 Ball rental display 226a 7 segment LED
226b Ball rental status display LED
226c Ball rental display board 227 Ball rental board 228 Ball rental board case 228a Ball rental board case opening 229a Conductive part 229b Ground wire 230 Upper disc removal unit 231 Front base 232 Front slider 240 Upper disc removal unit 241 Rear base 241a Ball receiving port 241b Ball feeding guide path 241c Ball removal guide path 242 Upper tray ball removal slider 242a Operation receiving section 242b Operation transmission section 243 Spring 244 Rear cover 250 Plate decoration unit 251 Lower plate body 252 Plate unit main body 252a Upper side expansion Outer part 252b Lower front decorative part 252c Bottom plate part 252d Lower plate opening 252e Front notch 252f Bottom notch 252g Handle insertion opening 252h Cylinder insertion opening 252i Production operation unit attachment unit 260 Lower plate extraction unit 261 Lower plate extraction base 2 2 Slider 263 Lower plate removal button 264 Spring 265 Lower plate removal lid 266 Holding mechanism 270 Upper left decorative unit 271 Upper left decorative unit 272 Upper left reflector 273 Upper left decorative substrate 275 Upper right decorative unit 276 Upper right decorative unit 277 Plate Upper right reflector 278 Upper right decorative plate 280 Lower left decorative unit 281 Lower left decorative body 282 Lower left reflector 283 Lower left decorative substrate 285 Lower right decorative unit 286 Lower right decorative body 287 Lower right reflector 288 Lower right decorative plate

300 effect operation unit 301 effect operation unit 302 rotation operation unit 303 pressing operation unit 303a center pressing operation unit 303b outer periphery pressing operation unit 310 effect operation unit cover unit 311 unit lower cover 311a drain hole 312 unit front cover 312a dish upper decorative body 312b Dish lower center decoration 313 Dish center upper reflector 314 Dish center upper decoration board 315 Dish lower center reflector 316 Dish center lower decoration board 320 Operating section base 321 Body section 321a Bottom wall 321b Through hole 322 Flange section 323 Leg section 324 Upper mounting section 325 Gear bearing part 325 Gear bearing part 330 Production operation ring 331 Ring mounting base 331a Placement part 331b Boss part 331c Through hole 332 Rotation base 332a Ring gear 332b Eccentric motor 333 Bush 3 4 Ring Preventing Member 335 Ring Outer Upper Cover 335a Outer Upper Surface 335b Decoration 335c Outer Upper Cover Attachment 336 Ring Outer Lower Cover 336a Outer Lower Surface 336b Outer Lower Cover Attachment 337 Ring Inner Cover 337a Inner Surface 337b Tube Surface Part 337c Inner cover mounting part 340 Rotation drive unit 341 Rotation drive base 342 Operation ring drive motor 343 Drive gear 344 Transmission gear 344a First gear 344b Second gear 345 Transmission detection gear member 345a Gear part 345b Detecting piece 346 Gear cover 347 First Rotation detection sensor 348 Second rotation detection sensor 349 Sensor cover 350a Ring side gear portion 350b Drive side gear portion 351 Gear mounting member 352 Rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352a Front decorative substrate 352b Rear decorative substrate 352 Staging operation unit mounting unit 353 decorative board cover 353a before the board cover 354 vibration speaker

360 effect operation button unit 361 button unit base 361a base body 361b leg 362 guide shaft 363 upper base 364 elevating base 364a guide hole 364b center hole 364c upright wall 364d guide pin 365 elevating spring 366 center shaft 367 operating button elevating drive motor 37 Button elevating drive motor terminal 368 Elevating drive gear 369 Follower gear 370 Elevating cam driving gear member 370a Gear portion 370b Connecting portion 370c Elevation detecting piece 371 Elevating cam member 371a Cam portion 371b First cam 371c Locking portion 371d Second cam 371e Third Cam 371f Connected portion 372 Gear cover 373 Central button body 373a Tube portion 373b Bottom portion 373c Guide hole 373d Central opening 373e Press detection piece 37 3f Guide boss 374 Button spring 375 Center button cover 375a Top plate section 375b Peripheral wall section 376 Center button decoration board 377 Perimeter button decoration board 378 Perimeter board cover 378a Board section 378b Cylindrical section 379 Perimeter decoration lens 380 Perimeter button cover 380a Cylindrical section 380b Unit 381 Press detection sensor 382 Elevation detection sensor 390 Operation unit relay board unit 391 Board box 391a Motor cover 391b Board box opening 391c Waterproof wall 392 Operation unit relay board 392a Operation unit relay board connector 393 Board box cover 393a Board box cover Liquid guide

400 Door frame left side unit 401 Door frame left side base 402 Frame left side decorative board 403 Left side reflector 404 Door frame left side decorative body 402a Left side upper decorative board 402b Left side lower decorative board 403a Through hole 410 Door frame right side unit 410a Side window 410b Decorative part in side window 411 Door frame right side base 412 Decorative member in side window 412a Connection base 413 Decorative substrate in side window decorative part 414 Internal reflector 415 Right side reflector 415a Through hole 416 Door frame right side outer panel 416a Through hole 417 Door frame right side inner panel 417a Through hole 418 Door frame right side decorative board 418a Right side upper decorative board 418b Right side lower decorative board 419 Door frame right side decorative body

450 Door frame top unit 451 Door frame top base 451a Main body 451b Front projection 452 Top upper cover 452a Opening 453 Door frame top decoration 454 Door frame top bottom plate 454a Reinforcement rib 454b Central speaker port 454c Side speaker port 455 Door frame top Center decoration board 456 Door frame top left decoration board 457 Door frame top right decoration board 458 Top center reflector 459 Top left reflector 460 Top right reflector 461 Central speaker box 462 Top center speaker 463 Speaker bracket 464 Top side speaker 465 Top bottom cover 466 Lower Cover frame 467 Door frame top relay board 468 Door frame top top plate

500 body frame base unit 501 body frame base 501a base body 501b game board insertion port 501c game board placement section 501d game board regulation section 501e launching device mounting section 501f cylinder insertion port 501g speaker opening section 501h cable mounting recess section 501i cable insertion port 501j Backward extension part 501k Upper hinge attachment part 501l Lower hinge attachment part

502 Connection cable guide member 502 Connection cable guide member 502a Guide body 502b Frame piece 502c Mounting shaft 502d Through hole 503 Connection cable 504 Binding band 505 Game board lock member 510 Main frame upper hinge member 520 Main frame lower hinge assembly 521 Lower hinge One main body 521a Lower hinge hole for outer frame 522 Lower hinge second main body 522a Lower hinge hole for door frame 522b Restricting piece 530 Main frame reinforcing frame 531 Left position restricting member 540 Ball launching device 541 Launching base 542 Launching solenoid 543 Hitting hammer 544 Launching Rail 550 Dispensing base unit 551 Dispensing base 551a Top plate 551b Left plate 551c Right plate 551d Upper back plate 551e Left back plate 551f Inner plate unit 551g Bottom plate unit 551h Connecting plate unit 551i Back cover -Mounting portion 551j Storage case portion 551k External terminal plate mounting portion 551l External terminal plate locking portion 551m External terminal plate spacer 551n Payout base opening portion 551o Payout base mark portion 552 Ball tank 552a Mounting portion 552b Mounting portion 552c Mounting portion 552d Mounting portion 552e Mounting portion 553 Tank rail 554 First rail cover 555 Second rail cover 556 Ball rectifying member 557 Ball stopper 558 External terminal plate 558a Case portion 558b External terminal plate side connector 558c Metal terminal 558d Solder portion 558e External end plate fixing screw 559 Ground circuit board 560 Dispensing unit 570 Ball guiding unit 570a Guide path 571 Guide unit base 572 Guide path front lid 573 Movable piece member 574 Ball cutting sensor 580 Dispensing device 580a Dispensing path 5 0b Ball passage 581 Dispensing device main body 581a Main unit side guide wall 582 Dispensing device rear lid 582a Rear lid side guide wall 583 Discharge device front lid 584 Discharge motor 585 Drive gear 586 First transmission gear 587 Second transmission gear 588 Discharge gear member 588a Dispensing gear 588b Detection piece 589 Dispensing blade 589a Blade piece 589b Ball housing section 590 Blade rotation detection sensor 591 Discharge detection sensor 592 Ball removal movable piece 593 Ball removal lever ER1, ER2 Earth resistance 594 External terminal plate unit 595 Mounting surface cover 596 Solder surface Cover 597 External terminal board mounting case 597a External terminal board mounting section 600 Upper full sphere path unit 600a Upper discharge ball receiving path 600b Upper sphere storage path 600c Upper normal discharge path 600d Upper full discharge path 600e Upper ball discharge 601 Upper full tank base 601a Back cover mounting portion 602 Upper full tank cover 603 Dispensing device pressing member 610 Lower full tank path unit 610a Lower normal discharge path 610b Lower full discharge path 610c Lower ball discharge path 611 Lower full base 612 Lower full base Ton cover 613 Discharge passage opening / closing door 613a Operating projection 614 Closing spring

620 Board unit 620a Speaker unit 620b Base unit 620c Power supply unit 620d Dispensing control unit 620e Interface unit 621 Speaker cover 621a Speaker mounting part 621b Front recessed part for space 621c Connection part 621d Penetrating cylinder 622 Body frame speaker 623 Speaker box 623 Penetrating cylinder 623a Front base 626 Rear base 627 Ball ejection guide part 628 Discharge ball receiving part 629 Ball discharge port 630 Power supply board 631 Power supply board cover 632 Discharge control board box 633 Discharge control board 634 Board base 635 Interface board 636 Interface board cover 640 Back cover 650 Locking Unit 651 Unit base 652 Door frame hook 653 Outer frame hook 654 Transmission Linda 655 tablets spring 656 outer frame for unlocking lever

660 Dispensing base first opening 662 Dispensing base second opening 664 Dispensing base third opening 666 Dispensing base fourth opening 670 First outer end plate holding part 670a First upper holding part 670b First lateral holding part 670c 1st back holding part 670d 1st lower holding part 672 2nd outer end plate holding part 672a 2nd lower holding part 672b 2nd side holding part 672c 2nd back holding part 672d 2nd front holding part 674 3rd outer end plate Holding portion 674a Third plate-shaped holding portion 674b Third claw-shaped holding portion 674c Third side holding portion 674d Third front holding portion 676 Rear projecting portion 676a Left projecting portion 680 Payout base first boss 682 Payout base second boss 684 Payout Base Third Boss 686 Payout Base Fourth Boss

700 First operation line disabling member 7000 Second operation line disabling member 7000D Dynamic operation line disabling member B Game ball Q Illegal ball L Operation line

1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stopper part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Out port 1009 Security concave part 1010 Notch part 1012 Firing path part 1013 Fall ball drop port 1014 Return path Part 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1100 Gaming panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1121 Through hole 1122 Notch

1200 board holder 1201 discharge unit 1300 main control unit 1310 main control board 1320 main control board box 1400 function display unit 1401 status display 1402 ordinary symbol display 1403 ordinary reservation display 1404 first special symbol display 1405 first special reservation number Display 1406 Second special symbol display 1407 Second special reservation number display 1408 Round display

1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1511 Peripheral control unit 1512 Performance control unit 1520 Peripheral control board box

1600 Effect display device (also called game board effect display device)
1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece

2000 Front unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening 2100 Starting opening unit 2200 Side unit

2400 Attacker unit 2401 Gate sensor 2402 Second starting opening sensor 2403 Big winning opening sensor 2404 Starting opening solenoid 2405 Attacker solenoid

2500 Center role 2501 Warp entrance 2502 Warp exit 2503 Stage 2600 Presentation unit

3000 Back unit 3001 General winning opening sensor 3002 First starting opening sensor 3003 Magnetic sensor

3010 back box 3010a opening 3010b liquid crystal mounting part 3010c fixing groove 3010d notch part 3010e fixing piece part 3020 locking mechanism 3031 panel relay board (driving board in FIG. 169)
3100 Back production unit

4000 detection sensor unit (origin position detection sensor unit in FIG. 169)
4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input section 4163 Voltage output section 4164 Detection circuit section 4165 RTC control section 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Avoidance unit 4167 Avoidance unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4200 Game ball guideway unit 4510 Avoidance unit STR Transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 Connector RR Contact resistance CON2 Connector CON3 Connector member CON4 Connector member 4504-4506 Connector member 5000 Actor group 01
5002 Character group 02
5004 Character group 03
5006 Character group 04
5008 Character group 05
CN11 connector CN12 connector CN13 connector CN14 connector CN15 connector 5591 ground wire 5592 ground wire 5593 ground wire 5594 ground wire 5595 ground wire

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine having a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a game board is detachable with respect to the main body frame,
An external connection board that is detachably provided to the main body frame and is connected to the outside by wiring,
The body frame has an opening at a position visible from the front in a state where the game board is removed from the body frame and the body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame,
In the closed state of the main body frame relative to the body frame status and the outer frame is removed the game board from part of the external connection substrate through the opening when viewing the opening from the front Only are visible,
A gaming machine , wherein the mounting state of the external connection board can be confirmed by visually recognizing an end of the external connection board mounted on the main body frame within the opening .